JP6947977B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The invention described herein (hereinafter referred to as "the present invention") relates to slot machines and pachinko machines, etc. The gaming machine (including casino machine stop operation of the reel is not performed).

A slot machine, which is a typical gaming machine, generally has control related to the progress of a game using a reel (for example, control of reel drive, control of combination determination (role lottery), acceptance / withdrawal of game media such as game medals. The purpose is to improve the interest of the game according to the game situation and the main control board (main control means) that performs control of the game, transfer control of the game state between multiple game states with different probability of winning the combination, etc.). It is equipped with a sub-control board (sub-control means) that controls various effects (image effect by image display device, voice effect by speaker device, etc.), and information transmission between both boards is sub-controlled from the main control board. It is possible to do it in only one direction to the substrate. The control boards such as the main control board and the sub control board are housed in a board case (see, for example, Patent Document 1 below).

Further, in a slot machine, in general, an effective line is set by inserting a specified number of game media, and a reel rotation start operation such as tilting a start lever is performed by a player to start a combination determination process. Any game combination (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as "role") or loss is determined, and then a plurality of reels start rotating. When a predetermined rotation speed is reached after a plurality of reels have started rotating, a reel rotation stop operation such as pressing a stop switch is enabled, and the player performs a reel rotation stop operation for each reel to perform each reel rotation stop operation. Is designed to stop rotating in sequence.

Usually, the rotation stop of the plurality of reels is controlled based on the timing of the reel rotation stop operation by the player and the determined combination. That is, each reel is controlled so that it can be stopped at an arbitrary timing within a predetermined time (usually, a time during which a maximum of 5 symbols can be moved) from the timing when the reel rotation stop operation is performed. The winning combination determined by the determination process (hereinafter, appropriately referred to as "allowable combination") is established as much as possible (the combination of symbols constituting the combination (corresponding symbol) is stopped and displayed on the valid line). , The winning combination that has not been determined (not won) by the above combination determining process is not established (the corresponding symbol is not stopped and displayed on the valid line).

In addition, in slot machines, in general, a re-game combination (a role in which a game medium cannot be acquired even if it is established, but the player can perform the next game without introducing a new game medium) or a small role (a role) or a small role ( In addition to the normal role called a role (winning role) that enables the acquisition of a predetermined number of game media at the time of establishment, special game conditions (for example, a predetermined small winning combination determination probability (winning probability) are usually set. There is a special role called a bonus role that triggers the setting of). Usually, only a small number of constituent symbols of the symbol combination that defines such a special combination are arranged on each reel.

Therefore, even when the special combination is decided (winning), the player performs the reel rotation stop operation for each reel at the timing when the corresponding symbol can be stopped and displayed while discriminating the symbol to be rotated and displayed. If (hereinafter, such an operation is referred to as "pressing") is not possible, it is difficult to establish a special role. However, if a special role has been decided but it cannot be established, the information indicating that the special role has been decided will be carried over to the next game (hereinafter,). As appropriate, it is referred to as "carrying over the winning of the special role", "carrying over the winning of the special role", etc.), and even for players who are not good at pushing, the opportunity to establish the decided special role is guaranteed.

Further, in the conventional slot machine, a plurality of RT states (game states) having different determination probabilities (winning probabilities) of the replay combination (replay combination) are provided, and a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, a predetermined symbol). It is generally known that the combination is stopped and displayed) to shift to another RT state. Such a transition between RT states is controlled by the main control board because the combination (re-game combination) determination probability fluctuates. In addition, the period during which the RT state in which the probability of determining the replaying combination is set to be the highest is controlled may be referred to as the replay time.

On the other hand, a game period (game state) called AT (assist time) is set to notify information so that the player can play a game advantageously, and a predetermined notification effect (assist effect) is performed within this game period. It is also done. Such an AT may be set during a period (replay time) controlled to the RT state in which the probability of determining the replay combination is set to be the highest, and the AT during such a replay time is generally set. It is called ART (Assist Replay Time). As an assist effect performed during AT, for example, when a small winning combination that enables acquisition of a game medium is determined (winning), that fact is notified or the determined small winning combination is established (correspondence). The operation mode of the stop switch (operation order indicating the order in which a plurality of stop switches should be operated (hereinafter referred to as "push order") and the operation mode required for stopping and displaying the symbol on the effective line) , The stop switch is known to notify the operation position (hereinafter referred to as "push position") indicating when the reel should be operated at what rotation position.

Until now, slot machines (also referred to as "sub-AT machines") in which the above-mentioned control processing related to AT (also referred to as "AT-related control processing") is exclusively performed by the sub-control means have been common, but the sub-control means has been used. On the other hand, there was a problem that AT could be forcibly set by performing fraudulent acts (goto acts), so recently, AT-related is the main control means that is harder to cheat than the sub control means. A slot machine (also referred to as a "main AT machine") that performs a part of control processing is also known. For example, the main control means exclusively performs the process related to the AT setting and the process of determining the push order to be notified during the AT, and the sub control means is mainly determined by the main control means during the AT set by the main control means. There is known a main AT machine that performs a process of executing notification (assist effect) of the pressing order. In such a main AT machine, various information about the AT is managed by the main control means, and the information is appropriately transmitted from the main control means to the sub control means.

In addition, when a special role is established or an AT is set, a signal indicating that fact is sent to an external device such as a history display device or a management computer (hall computer) installed in a game store (hall). Output (hereinafter, such an output signal is appropriately referred to as an "outer end signal"), and based on this outer end signal, the history such as the number of times a special combination is established and the number of times an AT is set is grasped and displayed to the player. It is also widely used to manage the ratio of the number of game media paid out to the number of game media input (ball output rate).

Further, in a conventional slot machine, a machine that sets a state in which execution of a predetermined control process related to the progress of a game is delayed for a certain period of time (hereinafter, appropriately referred to as "freeze") is known. This freeze is set on the main control board when it is suggested that an advantageous state has occurred for the player, thereby increasing the player's expectation that the advantageous state has occurred. It is often used for the purpose of enhancing the interest. Further, when such a freeze is set, an effect of driving the reel in a special mode (hereinafter, appropriately referred to as "freeze reel effect") can be executed, or a reel can be used as in a normal game in a slot machine. It is also common to execute a game-like effect (hereinafter, appropriately referred to as "pseudo-game effect") performed by driving a reel.

In addition, a conventional slot machine outputs (transmits) a signal (hereinafter referred to as a "test signal") for transmitting various information to a predetermined test device for inspecting whether or not it conforms to a legal standard or the like. ) Is configured to. The slot machine to be tested is configured to have a specification (hereinafter referred to as "test specification") provided with a test circuit for electrically connecting to the test device. On the other hand, slot machines with specifications sold to amusement stores (hereinafter referred to as "mass production specifications") do not have a circuit for testing, but have the same control program as those with test specifications, so they are determined in advance. A process for outputting a test signal is performed at a predetermined timing.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2011-78444

In the conventional gaming machine, the substrate case is laser-marked to prevent unauthorized duplication of the substrate case, but the countermeasures are insufficient.

The present invention has been made in view of such circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing the game from proceeding in a situation that may be disadvantageous to the player.

The following gaming machines according to the present invention have the following features. In the following description of the feature configuration, an example of the corresponding configuration in the embodiment described later is shown in parentheses.
The first gaming machine according to the present invention includes a plurality of reels, a plurality of stop switches, an image display means, an internal drawing means, and a reel control means, and when a power failure is detected, a power source is supplied. The remaining one predetermined reel that is configured to be able to execute the disconnection process, determines a predetermined result as the determination result of the internal lottery means, and has not yet detected the operation of the stop switch among the plurality of reels. As a result of detecting the operation of the predetermined stop switch corresponding to the predetermined reel at a predetermined timing while the is rotating, when the predetermined symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops, the predetermined symbol combination corresponds to the predetermined symbol combination. The game medium is configured to be imparted, the predetermined result is determined as the determination result of the internal lottery means, and the remaining one of the plurality of reels for which the operation of the stop switch has not yet been detected. When the reels are rotating, the plurality of reels are stopped due to the detection of power failure even though the operation of the predetermined stop switch corresponding to the predetermined reel is detected at the predetermined timing. Even when the predetermined symbol combination does not stop in the situation, the game medium corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination can be applied after the power is restored, and the reel control means is for accelerating the specific reel. It is configured so that the acceleration process can be executed over a predetermined period, and when a power failure is detected during the predetermined period during which the acceleration process for accelerating the specific reel is executed and then the power is restored, the predetermined value is obtained. The operation mode of the stop switch which is advantageous to the player based on the fact that the acceleration process for accelerating the specific reel can be continuously executed in the remaining period of the period and the predetermined conditions are satisfied. Is possible to start a predetermined gaming state capable of notifying, and based on satisfying a specific condition, the image display means for displaying the end image of the predetermined gaming state including information on the total number of acquisitions in the predetermined gaming state. Attention to prevent the player from being absorbed in the game when displaying the end image of the predetermined gaming state including the information on the total number of acquisitions in the predetermined gaming state on the image display means. the evoked images can be displayed on the image display means, if the game media is provided in the specific condition is satisfied game, after the game media is granted, the total acquisition number information at a given gaming state The end image of the predetermined gaming state including the above is displayed on the image display means, and the above-mentioned place. When the end image of the predetermined game state including the total number of acquired information in the predetermined game state and the caution image for preventing the player from being absorbed in the game are displayed on the image display means. Have.

As a reference, the method of manufacturing the substrate case unit of the gaming machine is as follows: a first case member (for example, the case body 721 in the ninth embodiment) and a second case member (for example, a ninth case member) that can be coupled to the first case member. A gaming machine including a case lid 741) in the embodiment and a control board housed inside a case formed by combining the first case member and the second case member and controlling the operation of the gaming machine. The method for manufacturing the substrate case unit of the above, wherein the second case member is formed on one side (for example, the front side in the ninth embodiment) of the first case member and coupled to the first case member. A first adjacent surface portion adjacent to one side surface (for example, a main body side adjacent surface portion 731 in the ninth embodiment) and a first engraved portion (for example, a first engraved portion) formed on the first adjacent surface portion so as to project to the one side. The first case member is manufactured by molding so as to have the main body side model name engraved portion 732) in the ninth embodiment, and is formed on the one side surface of the second case member. A second adjacent surface portion (for example, a lid-side adjacent surface portion 751 in the ninth embodiment) adjacent to the first adjacent surface portion of the first case member coupled with the first case member, and the second adjacent surface portion projecting to the one side. The second case member is manufactured by molding so as to have the second engraved portion (for example, the lid side model name engraved portion 752 in the ninth embodiment), and the first case member and the second case By connecting the members and accommodating the control board inside the case so that the first adjacent surface portion and the second adjacent surface portion are adjacent to each other, the first engraved portion and the second engraved portion are formed. Are adjacent to each other to form an integral marking, and a marking portion having a marking shape different from that of the integral marking is formed straddling the first marking portion and the second marking portion by laser marking.

According to the above-mentioned gaming machine, it is possible to prevent the gaming from proceeding in a situation that may be disadvantageous to the player.

It is a front view of the slot machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows schematic structure of the said slot machine. It is a figure which shows the symbol arrangement of the reel of the said slot machine. It is a figure which shows the type-1 of the game combination in the said slot machine. It is a figure which shows the type-2 of the game combination in the said slot machine. It is a figure which shows the type-3 of the game combination in the said slot machine. It is a figure which shows (A) type of game combination-4, (B) specific symbol in the said slot machine. It is a figure which shows the winning combination result number selection probability (replaying combination, winning combination-1) in the said slot machine. It is a figure which shows the winning combination result number selection probability (replaying combination, winning combination-2) in the said slot machine. It is a figure which shows the winning combination result number selection probability (replaying combination, winning combination-3) in the said slot machine. It is a figure which shows (A) combination determination result number selection probability (re-game combination / winning combination-4), (B) combination determination result number selection probability (special combination) in the slot machine. It is a block diagram which conceptually shows the function of the said slot machine. It is a figure which shows the relationship of each RT state in the said slot machine. It is a figure which shows the relationship of each game mode in the said slot machine. It is a figure which shows the outline of (A) AT lottery, (B) AT precursor G number lottery, (C) push order hit game lottery performed by the main control means of the slot machine. It is a figure which shows the push order instruction number-corresponding push order-display content correspondence table in the said slot machine. It is a figure which shows the combination determination result number-pushing order instruction number correspondence table in the said slot machine. In the slot machine, (A) display mode of push order instruction number A2 by WIN lamp, (B) display mode of push order instruction number A2 by liquid crystal display device, (C) display mode of push order instruction number A8 by WIN lamp, (D) Display mode of push order instruction number A8 by the liquid crystal display device, (E) Display mode of push order instruction number A10 by the liquid crystal display device, (F) Mode of displaying the push order instruction number in binary by the WIN lamp, ( G) It is a figure which shows the mode of change of the push order instruction display by a liquid crystal display device. It is a figure which shows the effect group number | combination determination result number correspondence table in the said slot machine. It is a figure which shows the list of the combination determination result number for mask processing in the said slot machine. It is a figure which shows the list of the push order instruction number which can be determined on the sub side in the said slot machine. It is a figure which shows the push order notification timing in the said slot machine. It is a figure which shows (A) push order notification start timing, (B) push order notification start timing (change example), (C) push order notification start timing (another change example) in the said slot machine. It is a figure which shows the difference of the circuit composition between the test specification and the mass production specification in the control board of the said slot machine. It is a figure of (A) change example M1, (B) change example M2, (C) change example M3 which shows the difference of the circuit composition between the test specification and mass production specification in the control board of the said slot machine. It is a figure which shows the structure of the storage area in the said slot machine. (A) operation state flag storage area, (B) operation symbol display flag storage area, (C) winning / RP combination determination result number storage area, (D) accessory combination determination result number storage area, (E) in the slot machine. ) Push order instruction number storage area, (F) Winning information output period timer storage area. In the above slot machine, (A) test output port PO7 (at the time of winning / RP winning information output), (B) test output port PO7 (at the time of character winning information output), (C) test output port PO8 (operating state) It is a figure which shows (at the time of information output). It is a figure which shows (A) winning / RP winning information storage area, (B) accessory winning information storage area in the said slot machine. It is a figure which shows (A) stop acceptance designation table T1 and (B) stop acceptance designation table T2 in the said slot machine. It is a figure which shows (A) winning information output timing, (B) re-game operation state flag set timing, (C) BB / RB operation state flag set timing in the said slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows each flow of (A) test specification judgment preparation process, (B) test specification judgment preparation process (change example J1), (C) test specification judgment preparation process (change example J2) in the said slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the game progress control processing in the said slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the game start processing in the said slot machine. The flow of (A) game mode 0 (lever) processing, (B) game mode 1 (lever) processing, (C) game mode 2 (lever) processing, and (D) push order instruction number setting processing in the slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows. (A) Game mode 3 (lever) processing, (B) Game mode 4 (lever) processing, (C) Game mode 5 (lever) processing, (D) Game mode 6 (lever) processing, (E) in the slot machine ) It is a flowchart which shows each flow of the game mode 7 (lever) processing. It is a flowchart which shows each flow of (A) symbol stop test signal output processing, (B) symbol stop test signal output in the said slot machine. (A) Reel rotation start preparation process, (B) Reel rotation start preparation process (change example K1), (C) Reel rotation start preparation process (change example K2), (D) Reel rotation start preparation process (D) It is a flowchart which shows each flow of the change example K3). The flow of (A) reel rotation start preparation process (change example K4), (B) reel rotation start preparation process (change example K5), and (C) reel rotation start preparation process (change example K6) in the slot machine is shown. It is a flowchart. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the game end check processing in the said slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows each flow of (A) BB operation management processing, (B) RB operation management processing, (C) waiting time waiting processing, (D) interrupt waiting processing in the said slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of RT transition processing in the said slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows each flow of (A) game mode 0 (all stops) processing, (B) game mode 1 (all stops) processing, and (C) game mode 2 (all stops) processing in the slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows each flow of (A) game mode 3 (all stops) processing, (B) game mode 4 (all stops) processing, and (C) game mode 5 (all stops) processing in the slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows each flow of (A) game mode 6 (all stop) processing, (B) game mode 7 (all stop) processing in the said slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows each flow of (A) timer interrupt processing, (B) a partial modification example of a timer interrupt processing in the said slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the output processing such as a test signal in the said slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the test signal output processing (modification example L1) in the said slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the test signal output processing (modification example L2) in the said slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows each flow of (A) program start processing, (B) sub-main loop processing, (C) power-off processing in the said slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows each flow of (A) 1 command processing and (B) processing at the start lever in the said slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows each flow of (A) processing at the time of receiving the 1st body stop, (B) processing at the time of receiving the 2nd body stop, and (C) processing at the time of receiving the 3rd body stop in the slot machine. .. It is a figure which shows (A) a part of the circuit structure of the test specification, and (B) a part of the circuit structure of the mass production specification in the control board of the slot machine according to the second embodiment of the present invention. The following shows (A) a part of the processing performed at the start of the game, (B) a part of the processing performed at the time of interrupting the timer, and (C) a part of the processing performed at the reception of the start lever operation in the slot machine according to the second embodiment. It is a flowchart. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the output processing such as a test signal in the slot machine which concerns on the 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows (A) lighting timing pattern 1 and (B) lighting timing pattern 2 of the display lamp in the slot machine which concerns on 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows (A) lighting timing pattern 3 and (B) lighting timing pattern 4 of the display lamp in the slot machine which concerns on the 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows (A) lighting timing pattern 5 and (B) lighting timing pattern 6 of the display lamp in the slot machine which concerns on the 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows (A) lighting timing pattern 7 and (B) lighting timing pattern 8 of the display lamp in the slot machine which concerns on the 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows (A) lighting timing pattern 9 and (B) lighting timing pattern 10 of the display lamp in the slot machine which concerns on the 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the arrangement of the electronic component of the main control board in the slot machine which concerns on 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the height of the electronic component arranged on the main control board in the slot machine which concerns on 4th Embodiment. In the gaming machine (slot machine) according to the fifth embodiment of the present invention, (A) the RAM area of the pattern 1, (B) the RAM area of the pattern 2, (C) the RAM area of the pattern 3, and (D) the pattern 4. It is a figure which shows the RAM area, (E) the RAM area of pattern 5, and (F) the RAM area which is continuous with ROM area. It is a figure which shows the address map of the RAM in the gaming machine (slot machine) which concerns on the said 5th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the outline of the reel control in the slot machine which concerns on 6th Embodiment of this invention. A flowchart showing a processing procedure when a reel rotation failure occurs during the (A) constant speed state of the rotating cylinder of the reel control in the slot machine according to the sixth embodiment, and (B) the rotation of the reel during the rotating cylinder acceleration state. 5 is a flowchart showing a processing procedure when a defect occurs, and (C) a flowchart showing a processing procedure when a power failure occurs during a rotating cylinder acceleration state and a reel rotation defect occurs. Flow chart showing the processing procedure when all the spinning cylinders are normally stopped after winning the winning winning combination of the reel control in the slot machine according to the sixth embodiment, (B) after receiving the third stop operation. It is a flowchart which shows the processing procedure when a power-off occurs, (C) is the flowchart which shows the processing procedure when a rotation failure occurs after receiving the third stop operation. It is a figure which shows the setting example of the winning number of the re-game combination and the payout rate in the slot machine which concerns on 7th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the (A) ball output rate simulation result, (B) winning probability and the number of payouts in the slot machine which concerns on the 7th Embodiment. In the slot machine according to the seventh embodiment, (A) the setting contents of BB1 when the number of symbols on each reel is 21, and (B) the setting contents of BB1 when the number of symbols on each reel is 20. It is a figure which shows. In the slot machine according to the seventh embodiment, (A) BB2 setting contents when the number of symbols on each reel is 21, and (B) BB2 setting contents when the number of symbols on each reel is 20. (C) It is a figure which shows the setting content of MB1. It is an overview diagram of the slot machine which concerns on other embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the display example of the caution image in the said other embodiment. In the other embodiment, (a) is a diagram showing a warning image when displayed on a small image display device, and (b) is a diagram showing a warning image when displaying on a large image display device. In the other embodiment, (a) is a diagram showing an image display timing when a game medal is awarded, and (b) is a diagram showing an image display timing when a game medal is not awarded. In the other embodiment, (a) is a display image when the cherry combination is won in the normal game, and (b) is a display image when the push order bell combination is won in the AT preparation game. In the other embodiment, (a) is a timing chart with specifications that a plurality of stop switches cannot be operated at the same time, and (b) is a timing chart with specifications that a plurality of stop switches cannot be operated at the same time. It is a timing chart which shows each operation timing within the minimum game time in the other embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the display timing of the caution image in the other embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows another example of the display timing of the caution image in the other embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the image displayed in the order of (a), (b), (c) in the other embodiment. It is a figure which shows another example of the image which is displayed in the order of (a), (b), (c) in the said other embodiment. It is a figure which shows another example of the display position of the caution image in the said other embodiment. It is a figure which shows the other example of the image displayed in the order of (a), (b), (c) in the said other embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the alert image display timing when an error occurs in the said other embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows another example of the warning image display timing when an error occurs in the other embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the warning image display timing at the time of power supply stop in the said other embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the alert image display timing at the time of operation of an effect switch in the said other embodiment. The circuit configuration between the main control board of the slot machine and the game medal payout device according to the eighth embodiment of the present invention is schematically shown, (A) is a basic mode, and (B) is a mode including a relay board. It is a figure which shows. The relationship between the payout sensor state and the sensor signal level in the slot machine according to the eighth embodiment is shown. (A) is the payout sensor state P01, (B) is the payout sensor state P02, and (C) is the payout sensor state P03. , (D) is a diagram corresponding to a non-energized state. In the slot machine according to the eighth embodiment, the figure shows the transition of the payout sensor state in the process of paying out one game medal, and the relationship between the payout sensor 1 signal and the payout sensor 2 signal in each payout sensor state. be. In the slot machine according to the eighth embodiment, the situation where a non-energization error occurs and the timing when the game is stopped are shown, (A) is a diagram corresponding to the situation Q01, and (B) is a diagram corresponding to the situation Q02. In the slot machine according to the eighth embodiment, other situations in which a non-energization error has occurred and the timing at which the game is stopped are shown, (A) is a diagram corresponding to the situation Q03, and (B) is a diagram corresponding to the situation Q04. It is a flowchart which shows each flow of (A) game progress processing, (B) error processing, (C) display determination processing, (D) interrupt processing in the slot machine which concerns on the 8th Embodiment. It is an exploded perspective view of the substrate case unit in the slot machine which concerns on 9th Embodiment of this invention. It is a perspective view of the main control board in the slot machine which concerns on 9th Embodiment. It is a perspective view of the case main body in the slot machine which concerns on the 9th Embodiment. It is a perspective view of the case lid in the slot machine which concerns on the said 9th Embodiment. It is a perspective view of the caulking member and the main body side guard member in the slot machine which concerns on 9th Embodiment. In the slot machine according to the ninth embodiment, (A) is a perspective view of the sealing cover and the cutter member, and (B) is a perspective view of the lid side guard member. It is a front view which shows the state before laser marking the substrate case unit in the slot machine which concerns on 9th Embodiment. It is sectional drawing which follows the arrow HH in FIG. 101. It is an enlarged view which shows the main body side adjacent surface part and the lid side adjacent surface part in the slot machine which concerns on 9th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the manufacturing method of the substrate case unit in the slot machine which concerns on 9th Embodiment.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the above drawings.
In the following description, the "combination determination process" is defined from a plurality of preset combination determination result numbers (composed of one or more game combinations or losses (excluding cases where no loss is set)). It means a selection act (also referred to as a combination lottery) such as a lottery executed using an electronic device or the like in order to randomly select one or a plurality of combination determination result numbers. Here, the combination determination result number is one or more game combinations that are allowed to be established in the game in which the combination determination result number is selected (hereinafter referred to as "establishment allowable combination", "winning combination", etc.). It regulates.

In addition, when describing "establishment of a game combination", "establishment of a game combination", etc., "establishment" means a game combination corresponding to the selected combination determination result number (a game combination with a payout of a game medal). The symbol combination (corresponding symbol) that constitutes (regardless of whether it is a winning combination such as a small combination) or a game combination without payout (re-game combination or special combination) is on a predetermined stop mode (for example, on the effective line described later). It is used as a concept to indicate that it is displayed in the mode (aspects lined up in). However, regarding the timing of establishment, for example, when the reel stop operation is performed at the timing when the corresponding symbol of the game combination can be stopped and displayed on the effective line, or the corresponding symbol of the game combination is stopped on the effective line. Appropriate timing can be set, such as when the slot machine identifies that the corresponding symbol of the game combination is stopped and displayed on the valid line, or when the identified result is stored in the storage area. ..

Further, in the following description, the provisions necessary for playing a game among the operation (maintenance operation) of inserting the game medal into the medal insertion slot 21 described later and the credited (stored) game medal by the player. The pressing operation of the 1-BET switch 22 or the MAX-BET switch 23 for using a number of game medals for a game is collectively referred to as a betting operation. In addition, this betting operation, the pressing operation of the clearing switch 24, the tilting operation of the start lever (also referred to as “start switch”) 25, and the pressing operation of the stop switches 26a, 26b, and 26c by the player are collectively referred to as a game. Called an operation. In general, "insertion" in a slot machine means "inserting a game medal into a slot machine" or "using a game medal for a game". There is. In the following explanation, basically, the word "input" is used in the former meaning, and the word "bet" is used in the latter meaning.

Further, in the following description, the "number of game medals to be paid out" means the number of game medals to be paid out in one game. In addition, the act of paying out the game medal includes the act of actually paying out the game medal from the slot machine (hereinafter, appropriately referred to as "actual payout") and the game medal stored in the slot machine. There is an act of increasing the numerical value stored electromagnetically (hereinafter, appropriately referred to as "storage addition and payout").

Further, in the following description, the "total number of acquired game medals" means the difference between the total number of game medals paid out and the total number of game medals bet during a predetermined period (which can be set arbitrarily). do. However, the total number of game medals paid out in a predetermined period may be the total number of medals won.

Further, in the following description, the “freeze” means a state in which the execution of a predetermined control process related to the progress of the game is delayed for a certain period of time. In the present embodiment, each time the RB operation (RB game) is completed during the BB operation described later, the waiting time at the end of the RB operation described later is set as this freeze. While the freeze is set, the game operation by the player is not effectively accepted.

<< First Embodiment >>
Hereinafter, the basic configuration of the slot machine according to the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 11.
<Appearance of slot machine>
As shown in FIG. 1, the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment includes a front door 2 that is openably and closably attached to the front surface of the main body housing, and the front door 2 is attached to the front surface of the front door 2 in order from the top. The upper panel assembly 10, the middle panel assembly 20, the lower panel assembly 30, and the saucer assembly 40 are attached.

A display screen 11a of the image display device 11 (see FIG. 2) arranged on the back surface side of the upper panel assembly 10 is arranged so as to face the front in the central portion thereof, and a first display screen 11a is arranged in the peripheral portion thereof. The effect lamp 12, the second effect lamps 13a and 13b, and the third effect lamps 14a and 14b are arranged. Further, a pair of upper speakers 15a and 15b are arranged on the lower left and right sides of the display screen 11a.

At the center of the middle panel assembly 20, a display window W facing the surfaces of the three reels 3a, 3b, and 3c arranged side by side in the main body housing is provided, and below the display window W. Is a medal slot 21 for inserting a game medal (game medium), a 1-BET switch 22 for betting one game medal within the credited range, and a maximum bet allowable number (for example, 3). MAX-BET switch 23 for betting game medals at once, clearing switch 24 for paying out bet game medals and / or credited game medals, all reels 3a, 3b, 3c are started to rotate. The start lever (start switch) 25 operated at the time, and the three stop switches 26a, 26b, 26c for individually stopping the rotation of the reels 3a, 3b, 3c (the stop switch 26a on the left side in the figure is the reel 3a). The central stop switch 26b corresponds to the reel 3b, and the right stop switch 26c corresponds to the reel 3c), and the reject switch 27 for returning the accumulated game medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 21. Etc. are provided.

The inside of the medal insertion slot 21 is a receiving passage (leading to the hopper 50 described later) through which the inserted game medal passes when the inserted game medal is effectively accepted, and when the inserted game medal is not accepted. It branches into a return passage through which the game medal passes (leading to the game medal payment exit 41 described later), and a blocker 48 (see FIG. 2) is provided at the branching portion. The blocker 48 guides the game medals inserted into the medal insertion slot 21 to the receiving passage during the period when the inserted game medals are effectively accepted, and is inserted into the medal insertion slot 21 during other periods. The receiving passage and the returning passage are selectively configured so that one can be opened and the other can be closed so as to guide the game medal to the return passage. In the following description, the ON state of the blocker 48 indicates a state in which the game medal inserted in the medal insertion slot 21 is guided to the receiving passage (game medal acceptable state), and the OFF state of the blocker 48 means that the medal is inserted. It is assumed that the game medal inserted into the mouth 21 is guided to the return passage (game medal unacceptable state).

Further, inside the medal insertion slot 21, three insertion medal sensors 28a, 28b, 28c (see FIG. 2) for detecting game medals are provided. The inserted medal sensor 28a detects that the inserted game medal has been inserted into the medal insertion slot 21, and is located on the passage where the inserted game medal flows down, on the upstream side of the position where the blocker 48 is installed. It is installed in the position. The inserted medal sensor 28b detects that the game medal inserted into the medal insertion slot 21 is guided to the receiving passage and is effectively accepted, and is downstream from the position where the blocker 48 is installed (described later). It is located near the hopper 50). The insertion medal sensor 28c detects that the game medal inserted into the medal insertion slot 21 has passed the branch portion between the receiving passage and the return passage, and is near the branch portion (position where the blocker 48 is installed). It is located at a position slightly closer to the inserted medal sensor 28b).

When both the inserted medal sensor 28a and the inserted medal sensor 28b detect a game medal, it means that the game medal has been inserted into the medal insertion slot 21 and the inserted game medal has been effectively accepted. On the other hand, if the inserted medal sensor 28a detects the game medal but the inserted medal sensor 28b does not detect the game medal, the game medal is inserted into the medal insertion slot 21, but the inserted game medal is effectively accepted. It means that it was returned without. Further, when the three inserted medal sensors 28a, 28b, 28c detect the passage of the game medal in an order different from the predetermined order (the order of 28a, 28c, 28b), or when some of the inserted medal sensors pass the game medal. If is not detected, it means that an abnormal passage such as a backflow of a game medal has occurred.

The display window W is configured so that when all the three reels 3a to 3c are stopped, three symbols for each reel, a total of nine symbols, are visually displayed by the player. The winning line 29 connecting the lower part of the reel 3a, the middle part of the reel 3b, and the upper part of the reel 3c to the upper right is a winning line that is activated by betting a specified number of game medals, and is activated. It is configured so that the presence or absence of the establishment of the game combination is determined by the symbol combination stopped and displayed on the winning line 29. Hereinafter, the activated winning line 29 will be appropriately referred to as an “valid line 29”.

Further, various display lamps composed of LED lamps and the like are arranged in the slot machine 1. In the present embodiment, as display lamps, MAX-BET switch display lamp 46a, BET number display lamp 46b, insertable display lamp 46c, game start display lamp 46d, re-game display lamp 46e, status display lamp 46f, number of times display lamp It is provided with 46 g, a storage number display lamp 46h, and a payout number display lamp 46j. These display lamps are configured to be controlled by the main control board 60 (main control means 100) described later.

The MAX-BET switch indicator lamp 46a is lit in a situation where a game medal can be bet, and is arranged inside the MAX-BET switch 23. When lit, the MAX-BET switch 23 is partially or wholly turned on. It is designed to shine. Other display lamps are arranged on the side or the lower part of the display window W in the middle panel assembly 20.

The BET number display lamp 46b (hereinafter, also referred to as "BET lamp 46b") displays the number of bet game medals, and is a 1-BET display that lights up when there is one or more bet game medals. It is composed of a lamp 46bA, a 2-BET indicator lamp 46bB that is lit when two or more lamps, and a MAX-BET indicator lamp 46bC that is lit when three or more lamps are used. The insertable indicator lamp 46c is lit in a situation where a game medal can be inserted, and the game start indicator lamp 46d is lit in a situation where the start lever 25 can be operated to start the game. Is to be done. The re-game display lamp 46e is lit when a re-game combination described later is established in any game and a game medal is automatically bet by the automatic bet process described later.

The status display lamp 46f is turned on, for example, when the AT described later is set, and is turned off when the AT is finished. The number display lamp 46g is the number of AT games described later when the AT is set. The initial value (“50”) of is displayed, and then the displayed value of each game and the number of AT games is decremented by 1 (except during BB operation described later), and when the number of additional AT games is determined, that value is displayed. The number of additions is added and displayed. The stored number display lamp 46h (hereinafter, also referred to as “CRE lamp 46h”) displays the number of stored (credited) game medals in 7 segments, and is also referred to as a payout number display lamp 46j (hereinafter, also referred to as “WIN lamp 46j”). ) Indicates the number of game medals to be paid out when the small winning combination described later is established in 7 segments.

Further, the WIN lamp 46j is also configured to display a character (alphabet) indicating the type of the error when an abnormality (error) occurs in the slot machine 1. The errors set in the present embodiment include a hopper empty error in which the game medal in the hopper 50 is emptied, a game medal payout error in which the game medal is paid out at a timing other than the original payout timing, and the inside of the medal slot 21. Game medal retention error, game medal invading from a position different from the medal insertion slot 21, game medal abnormal passage error in which the game medal advances in a direction different from the original route, game in the hopper 50 There is an auxiliary storage full error in which medals are full, a rotating cylinder stop error in which the reels 3a, 3b, and 3c do not stop at predetermined positions, a set value error in which the set value is outside the predetermined numerical range, and the like.

Further, the WIN lamp 46j also has a function of displaying a push order number, which will be described later, which indicates the operation order (push order) of the stop switches 26a to 26c. Hereinafter, the WIN lamp 46j for displaying the push order number is appropriately referred to as a "main side push order indicator".

A transparent lower panel cover 31 is attached to the central portion of the lower panel assembly 30, and decorative lamps 32a and 32b are arranged at both left and right ends thereof. A semi-transparent lower panel base and a lower panel illuminator (neither shown) provided with a predetermined pattern are attached to the back surface side of the lower panel cover 31, and the lower panel illuminator is lit. By letting it illuminate the design of the lower panel base from the rear surface side.

The saucer assembly 40 is provided with a game medal payment outlet 41 for paying out game medals, and a game medal storage plate 42 for storing game medals so as to face the game medal payment outlet 41. An ashtray 43 is provided on the left side of the game medal storage plate 42. Further, on the left and right sides of the game medal payout outlet 41, a speaker port 45a composed of a large number of small holes facing the front surface of a pair of lower speakers 44a and 44b (see FIG. 2) arranged on the back side of the saucer assembly 40. , 45b are formed.

Further, a hopper 50 (see FIG. 2) for paying out a game medal obtained when a predetermined prize mode is configured as a result of the game is provided in the main body housing, and the hopper 50 is provided. A medal detection unit 51 (see FIG. 2) for detecting a game medal is provided. Further, the hopper 50 has a function of physically accommodating a game medal that has been inserted and effectively accepted. Further, an auxiliary storage 85 (see FIG. 2) for storing game medals overflowing from the hopper 50 is provided near the hopper 50, and the auxiliary storage 85 is full (from the auxiliary storage 85). A full detection unit 86 (see FIG. 2) is provided to detect whether or not the game medals are in a state where the game medals may overflow).

<Reel>
Each reel 3a, 3b, 3c is configured to rotate by being driven by stepping motors 35a, 35b, 35c (see FIG. 2), respectively. Further, each reel 3a, 3b, 3c is composed of a translucent member, and a translucent reel tape on which a plurality of types of symbols (see FIG. 3) are displayed is displayed on the outer peripheral surface thereof. It is pasted. Further, back lamps 38a, 38b, 38c (see FIG. 2) are arranged on the inner surface side of each reel 3a, 3b, 3c, and by turning on the back lamps 38a, 38b, 38c, a display window is displayed. The area of each reel 3a, 3b, 3c facing the inside of W is illuminated as a whole from the inner surface side, or a predetermined symbol combination (for example, on the effective line 29 or on the effective line 29, which is stopped and displayed on each reel 3a, 3b, 3c, etc. It is configured to illuminate only a part of each reel 3a, 3b, 3c so as to make the corresponding symbols of the game characters lined up on the winning line different from the effective line 29 stand out.

<Basic operation for playing games>
To play a game on the slot machine 1, first bet by actually inserting a game medal into the medal insertion slot 21, or by operating either the 1-BET switch 22 or the MAX-BET switch 23, the credit range By betting a specified number of game medals within, the winning line 29 out of the plurality of winning lines is activated. In the present embodiment, the specified number of game medals required to activate the winning line 29 is set to 3 in each of the non-RT and RT1 to RT5 game states described later. However, the specified number is not limited to this, and can be changed as appropriate, such as setting the specified number to a different value according to the RT state. In addition, the winning line to be activated may be changed according to the number of bets on the game medal.

Next, when the player operates the start lever 25, the number of bets is determined (the bet game medals are used for the game), the combination determination process described later is performed, and then the minimum game time is performed. After confirming that the elapse has passed, each reel 3a to 3c starts rotating, and a plurality of types of symbols displayed on the outer peripheral surface of the reels 3a to 3c move up and down in the display window W (usually from top to bottom). It is moved and displayed. Then, when the rotation of the reels 3a to 3c reaches a predetermined speed and becomes a constant speed rotation, each of the stop switches 26a to 26c is activated (the operation of the stop switch can be effectively accepted), and the player can effectively accept the operation of the stop switch 26a. Is configured to stop the rotation of the reel 3a, the stop switch 26b to stop the rotation of the reel 3b, and the stop switch 26c to stop the rotation of the reel 3c.

Here, when the symbol combination stopped and displayed on the valid line 29 is in a predetermined winning mode (corresponding symbol of a game combination capable of winning a game medal), the number of cards corresponding to each winning mode. Game medals are paid out by the hopper 50 or added as credits.

<Connection between control board and each device>
In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 2, as a main control board for controlling the slot machine 1, three control boards of a main control board 60, a sub-main control board 70A, and a sub-sub control board 70B are provided (sub). The main control board 70A and the sub-sub control board 70B are collectively referred to as the sub control board 70). Main control related to the progress of the game (including drive control of reels 3a to 3c, combination determination processing, etc.) is performed by a control circuit arranged on the main control board 60, and illumination by lamps such as back lamps 38a to 38c. The control and the like are configured to be performed by a control circuit arranged on the sub-main control board 70A. Further, the effect image display control by the image display device 11 and the sound generation control from the speakers such as the upper speakers 15a and 15b are configured to be mainly performed by the control circuit arranged on the sub-sub control board 70B. There is. Further, information transmission between the main control board 60 and the sub control board 70 can be performed in only one direction from the main control board 60 to the sub-main control board 70A, and the sub-main control board 70A and the sub-sub Information transmission with the control board 70B can be performed in both directions.

The main control board 60 includes a main CPU 61 that performs various arithmetic processes related to the game, a ROM 62 that is a read-only storage device that stores control programs and the like, and a RAM 63 that is a storage device that can write and read information. It is arranged so that each drive circuit or the like operates according to the control program stored in the ROM 62 to control the progress of the game in the slot machine 1. The ROM 62 and the RAM 63 are non-volatile storage devices, and are configured to hold the stored information even when power is not supplied.

The main CPU 61 is used for a clock pulse generator 64 for generating a drive pulse, a frequency divider 65 for dividing the drive pulse generated by the clock pulse generator 64, a combination determination process (combination lottery), and the like. A random number generator 66 for generating random numbers and a sampling circuit 67 for sampling random numbers generated by the random number generator 66 and performing a lottery are connected. The clock pulse generator 64 and the frequency divider 65 are configured to function as an interval timer for generating an interrupt at predetermined time intervals for the main CPU 61. The main CPU 61 executes a predetermined interrupt process according to a pulse (clock signal) from the interval timer, and updates or resets the timekeeping data of various set timers. Further, the main CPU 61 transmits signals to the motor drive circuit 36a, the display lamp control circuit 47, the hopper drive circuit 52, and the sub control board 70 via the interface circuit 68, and the reel position detection circuits 37a and 37b. , 37c, is configured to receive signals from the payout detection signal circuit 53 and the stowed state signal circuit 87.

Here, the motor drive circuit 36a is a circuit for controlling the rotation / stop of the stepping motors 35a, 35b, 35c that rotationally drive the reels 3a, 3b, 3c, respectively, and the display lamp control circuit 47 is described above. It is a circuit for controlling various display lamps. Further, the reel position detection circuits 37a, 37b, 37c determine the rotation positions of the reels 3a, 3b, 3c based on the detection signals from the reel sensors (not shown) installed in each of the reels 3a, 3b, 3c. Each is a circuit for detecting (the detection circuit 37a corresponds to the reel 3a, the detection circuit 37b corresponds to the reel 3b, and the detection circuit 37c corresponds to the reel 3c). Further, the hopper drive circuit 52 is a circuit that drives the hopper 50 to pay out the game medals when a winning combination such as a small winning combination is established, and the payout detection signal circuit 53 is a circuit in which the game medals are paid out from the hopper 50. This is a circuit that transmits a payout detection signal to the main control board 60 when the medal detection unit 51 detects that the payout has been paid out. Further, the storage state signal circuit 87 is a circuit that transmits a storage state signal indicating whether or not the auxiliary storage 85 is full to the main control board 60 according to the detection result of the full detection unit 86. ..

Further, the electric power from the power supply device 80 is supplied to the slot machine 1 via the main control board 60. A power switch 81, a reset switch 82, and a setting key type switch 83 are connected to the power supply device 80, and signals from each of these switches are configured to be transmitted to the main CPU 61 via the interface circuit 68. ing. Further, the main CPU 61 is configured to receive a signal from the setting change switch 84 via the interface circuit 68.

The power switch 81 is a switch that accepts power-on and power-off operations from the power supply device 80 to the slot machine 1, and the reset switch 82 removes the cause of the error when a predetermined error occurs in the slot machine 1. This switch is operated by a game clerk when the error is resolved. By operating the reset switch 82, the error occurrence information stored in the main control board 60 and the sub control board 70 is cleared, and accordingly, the processing at the time of error resolution is performed in the main control board 60 and the sub control board 70. Will be executed. Further, the setting key type switch 83 is a switch that is operated when confirming the setting of the winning combination probability (winning probability of the game combination) and changing the setting, and the setting changing switch 84 sets the winning combination probability and the like. For example, it is a switch for changing in 6 steps.

The setting key type switch 83 is operated in the ON state when the front door 2 is open (hereinafter referred to as "door open state") and power is being supplied to the slot machine 1 (the power switch 81 is ON state). By doing so, the setting can be confirmed. Further, in the state where the door is open and the power is not supplied to the slot machine 1 (the power switch 81 is in the OFF state), the setting key type switch 83 is operated in the ON state, and the power switch 81 is turned ON in that state. The setting can be changed by being operated to the state (the power is turned on to the slot machine 1). The setting key type switch 83 can be switched between an ON state and an OFF state by inserting a predetermined key member (setting key) into a predetermined lock member provided on the main body side and rotating the switch 83. There is. In addition, setting confirmation and setting change cannot be executed while the game is being executed (when the game medal is bet (including the case where it is automatically bet) or when the reel is rotating). It is possible to execute it only while waiting for the game.

The electric power from the power supply device 80 is supplied to the sub-main control board 70A via the main control board 60, and further to the sub-sub control board 70B via the sub-main control board 70A (power supply device 80). Power may be supplied directly to the sub-main control board 70A and the sub-sub control board 70B). A supply voltage monitoring circuit that monitors the voltage supply state on the circuit that supplies power from the power supply device 80 to the main control board 60 and on the circuit that supplies power to the sub-main control board 70A via the main control board 60. (Not shown) are provided respectively. Each supply voltage monitoring circuit determines that the power supply is cut off when the supply voltage drops to a predetermined voltage value, and outputs a power supply cutoff detection signal to the main CPU 61 and the sub-main CPU 71 described later. Further, each supply voltage monitoring circuit returns when the supply voltage returns to a predetermined voltage value (a value different from the voltage value for power failure determination (for example, a high value), but may be the same value). It is determined that the power is turned on, and the power on detection signal is output to the main CPU 61 and the sub main CPU 71. The voltage value when detecting the power failure of the main control board 60 is set to a value higher than the voltage value when detecting the power failure of the sub-main control board 70A, and precedes the sub-main control board 70A. The main control board 60 is configured to perform a process programmed to be executed when the power is turned off (power off process) (the same may be applied to the power on).

Further, the main CPU 61 includes a reel stop signal circuit 91, a start lever 25, input medal sensors 28a, 28b, 28c, and a 1-BET switch 22 which are connected to the switch board 90 or mounted on the switch board 90. , Each signal from the MAX-BET switch 23 and the clearing switch 24 is input via the interface circuit 68.

Further, a blocker 48 is connected to the main CPU 61 via an interface circuit 68, and the blocker 48 is configured to be ON / OFF controlled. In the following description, the signal for ON / OFF control of the blocker 48 is appropriately referred to as a “blocker signal”. Further, although not shown, the slot machine 1 is provided with a door sensor that detects the open / closed state of the front door 2, and a signal from this door sensor is input to the main CPU 61 via the interface circuit 68. It has become so. The main CPU 61 determines whether the front door 2 is in a closed state (hereinafter referred to as a “door closed state”) or an open state (door open state) based on a signal from the door sensor.

Further, although not shown, the main CPU 61 provides an external connection terminal board or the like to a data counter, a hall computer, or the like when a predetermined gaming state (for example, an AT or a bonus gaming state described later) is reached. A predetermined signal (hereinafter, appropriately referred to as an "outer end signal") is output via the signal, and the outer end signal can be used to manage the number of times set in the predetermined gaming state and present it to the player. It is configured.

On the other hand, on the sub-main control board 70A, it is possible to write and read information from a sub-main CPU 71 that mainly performs various arithmetic processes related to production management, a ROM 72 that is a read-only storage device that stores control programs, and the like. RAM 73, which is a storage device, is arranged, and each drive circuit or the like operates according to a control program stored in the ROM 72, so that control related to management of image effect and sound effect in slot machine 1 and control related to lamp effect are performed. Etc. are to be performed. The ROM 72 and the RAM 73 are non-volatile storage devices, and are configured to hold the stored information even when power is not supplied. Further, a clock pulse generator and a frequency divider (not shown) are connected to the sub-main CPU 71, and the clock pulse generator and the frequency divider generate an interrupt to the sub-main CPU 71 at predetermined time intervals. It is configured to function as an interval timer for the clock. The sub-main CPU 71 executes a predetermined interrupt process according to a pulse (clock signal) from the interval timer, and updates or resets the timekeeping data of various set timers.

The sub-main CPU 71 is configured to receive various signals from the main control board 60 via the interface circuit 74 and transmit the signals to the lamp control circuit 18. Here, the lamp control circuit 18 is a circuit that controls the lighting of lamps such as the back lamps 38a to 38c.

Further, the sub-main CPU 71 is configured to transmit various signals to the sub-sub control board 70B via the interface circuit 74 and to receive various signals from the sub-sub control board 70B. Hereinafter, the signal transmitted from the main control board 60 to the sub-main control board 70A is referred to as a "control command", and the signal transmitted from the sub-main control board 70A to the sub-sub control board 70B is referred to as an "effect command". Further, the signal transmitted from the sub-sub control board 70B to the sub-main control board 70A is referred to as a "state command".

The sub-sub control board 70B can write and read information from a sub-sub CPU 75 that mainly performs various arithmetic processes related to control of image effect and sound effect, a ROM 76 that is a read-only storage device that stores a control program, and the like. A RAM 77, which is a storage device, is arranged, and each drive circuit or the like operates according to a control program stored in the ROM 76 to control an image effect or a sound effect. The ROM 76 and the RAM 77 are non-volatile storage devices, and are configured to hold the stored information even when power is not supplied.

The sub-sub CPU 75 receives a notification signal or an effect signal from the sub-main control board 70A via the interface circuit 78, transmits a signal to the display device control circuit 16 and the speaker control circuit 17, and also transmits the signal to the sub-main control board. It is configured to transmit a status signal to the 70A. The display device control circuit 16 is a circuit that controls the image display device 11 to display a predetermined effect image, and the speaker control circuit 17 determines the type and volume of sound or the like generated from the speakers such as the upper speakers 15a and 15b. It is a circuit to control. The image display device 11 is configured to function as a push display (hereinafter, appropriately referred to as a "sub-side push order display") that displays the operation order (push order) of the stop switches 26a to 26c. There is.

<Reel design arrangement>
In the present embodiment, the symbols displayed by the reels 3a to 3c are arranged as shown in FIG. 3 (“left reel”, “middle reel” and “right reel” in FIG. 3 are reels 3a, Represents 3b and 3c, respectively). That is, on each reel 3a to 3c, "character", "seven", "bar", "cherry", "watermelon A", "watermelon B", "bell", "replay A", "replay B" and A predetermined number of 10 types of "blank" symbols are arranged. The "blank" may indicate an arbitrary symbol that does not constitute a game combination, but in the present embodiment, these are set as symbols that constitute the game combination. Hereinafter, the reels 3a, 3b and 3c may be referred to as a left reel, a middle reel and a right reel, respectively.

<Type of game role>
In the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 4 to 7, one special combination (BB combination), 13 replay combinations of replay combinations 1 to 13, and 24 small combinations of small combinations 1 to 24. A total of 38 game combinations with the combination are set, and the combination of symbols for establishing each game combination (corresponding symbol), the number of game medals to be paid out when the game combination is established, etc. are as shown in FIGS. 4 to 7. Is set to.

For the BB combination (BB is an abbreviation for big bonus), the corresponding symbol "character character character" (the names of the symbols constituting the game combination are described in the order of reels 3a, 3b, 3c. The same shall apply hereinafter) is valid. When the stop display is displayed on the line 29, the game medal is not paid out, and from the next game, the RT state described later is set to RT5 (during BB), and the bonus game (BB game) is started there. It is a game role that shows that. The BB game started by the establishment of the BB role ends when more than 450 game medals (numerical values can be changed as appropriate) are paid out. Further, during this BB game, the RB game (RB is an abbreviation for regular bonus) is continuously executed internally (the RB game during this BB game will be described later).

In the present embodiment, only the BB role is provided as a special role, but as another special role, an RB role or an MB role (MB is an abbreviation for middle bonus) may be provided. Then, when the RB combination is established, the RB game as a bonus game (an RB game that is performed separately from the BB game unlike the RB game during the above-mentioned BB game) is set to start from the next game, and the MB combination is established. Then, the MB game as a bonus game may be set to start from the next game. The RB game in this case is terminated when, for example, a predetermined number of small wins (for example, 8 times) is established, or a predetermined number of times (for example, 12 times) of games are completed, and the MB game is, for example, completed. , It may be terminated when a predetermined number (for example, more than 200) of game medals are paid out. In addition, a plurality of special roles may be provided.

If the re-games 1 to 13 are established, the game medals will not be paid out, but the re-games are allowed to play the next game without reducing the number of game medals held by the player (re-games). It is provided as. The re-games 1 and 2 are not set as an opportunity to shift to the RT state, which will be described later, and are the most frequently established re-games (particularly the re-game 1). For this reason, the replaying roles 1 and 2 are appropriately referred to as "normal RP" (RP is an abbreviation for replay).

As shown in the symbol arrangement shown in FIG. 3, the symbol "bell / watermelon B" ("/" means "or") on the left reel and the symbol "replay A" on the middle reel, which constitute the replay combination 1. And the symbol "bell" on the right reel are arranged every 5 symbols or less on each reel. As a result, when the replay combination 1 is won, the corresponding symbol "bell / watermelon B / replay A / bell" is the execution timing (valid) of each reel rotation stop operation (each operation of the stop switches 26a, 26b, 26c). Regardless of the timing received in (the same applies hereinafter), it is possible to display the stop on the effective line 29 (hereinafter, referred to as “pulling in” as appropriate). Like this re-game combination 1, a combination that can draw the corresponding symbol (one of them in the case of a plurality of sets) onto the effective line 29 regardless of the operation timing of each stop switch is described below. For the sake of convenience, it is referred to as a "100% retractable game role".

It is a condition for transition to the RT1 state, which will be described later, that the re-game combinations 3 and 4 are established (the corresponding symbol is stopped and displayed on the effective lie 29). Further, the establishment of the re-game combination 5 is a condition for transition to the RT2 state described later, and the establishment of the re-game combination 6 is a condition for transition to the RT3 state described later. For this reason, the replaying combinations 3, 4, 5 and 6 are appropriately referred to as "RT1 transition RP", "RT2 transition RP" and "RT3 transition RP", respectively.

The fact that the re-game combinations 7 and 8 are selected as winning combinations in the game mode 0 described later (the combination determination result numbers 15 to 19 described later are selected) is set as an opportunity to execute the AT lottery described later. There is. Further, when the replay combination 7 is established, the symbol "cherry" is stopped and displayed in the display area in the middle middle stage (center of the middle stage) in the display window W (the stop switch 26a is also displayed in the display area in the lower right stage or the middle right stage). Depending on the operation timing, "cherry" is stopped and displayed), and when the replay combination 8 is established, the symbol "cherry" is stopped and displayed in the lower right display area in the display window W (middle). Even in the upper display area, "cherry" is stopped and displayed depending on the operation timing of the stop switch 26b). For this reason, the replaying roles 7 and 8 are appropriately referred to as "cherry RP".

The re-game combination 9 is selected as a winning combination in the game mode 0 described later (the combination determination result numbers 20 to 22 described later are selected), which is set as an opportunity to execute the AT lottery described later. This replaying combination 9 is appropriately referred to as "chance RP". The re-gaming combinations 10 to 13 are game combinations that may be elected as winning combinations but are not established, and are set according to control needs. Called "control RP". It should be noted that the re-gaming combinations 2 to 7 and 9 are 100% retractable gaming combinations as in the re-gaming combination 1.

The small wins 1 to 3 are winning wins configured so that 9 game medals are paid out when the small wins 1 to 3 are established, and the small wins 1 to 3 are collectively referred to as "9 small wins" as appropriate. As is clear from the symbol arrangement shown in FIG. 3, when the corresponding symbol of the small winning combination 1 is stopped and displayed on the effective line 29, the symbol "bell" is stopped side by side in each lower display area in the display window W. Is displayed. Further, when the small winning combination 2 is established, the symbol "bell" is stopped and displayed side by side in each middle display area in the display window W. Further, when the corresponding symbol of the small winning combination 3 is stopped and displayed on the effective line 29, the symbol "bell" is stopped and displayed side by side in each upper display area in the display window W. From the mode of stopping the symbol at the time of establishment, the small combinations 1, 2, and 3 are appropriately referred to as "lower bell", "middle bell", and "upper bell", respectively.

Small wins 4 to 8 are winning combinations configured so that one game medal is paid out when the winning combination is established, and small winning combinations 9 to 23 are winning combinations configured so that three game medals are paid out when the formation is established. It is a role. For this reason, the small wins 4 to 8 are collectively referred to as "one small win", and the small wins 9 to 23 are collectively referred to as "three small wins" as appropriate. In addition, the small winning combination 24 is a winning combination that is selected as a winning combination only during the BB described later (“-” in the payout number column in FIG. 7 (A) is not a winning combination (not a winning combination). ), As appropriate, referred to as a "special small role".

As is clear from the symbol arrangement shown in FIG. 3, when the corresponding symbol of the small winning combination 21 is stopped and displayed on the effective line 29, the symbol "watermelon A / B" is displayed in each middle display area in the display window W. It is displayed side by side and stopped. Further, when the small winning combination 22 is established, the symbol "watermelon A / B" is stopped and displayed side by side in the upper right corner of the display window W. Further, when the corresponding symbol of the small winning combination 23 is stopped and displayed on the effective line 29, the symbol "watermelon A / B" is stopped and displayed side by side in each lower display area in the display window W. From the mode of stopping the symbol at the time of establishment, the small combinations 21 to 23 are collectively referred to as "watermelon small combination" as appropriate. On the other hand, the small roles 1 to 20 are collectively referred to as "bell small roles" as appropriate. It should be noted that the small roles 1 to 6 are game roles that can be drawn in 100%.

Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 7B, specific symbols 01, 02, 03 are set. These are not the corresponding symbols of the game combination, but when the winning E1 to E6 described later are selected, if the predetermined small combination cannot be established due to the pressing order and operation timing of the stop switch, the predetermined small combination is missed. It is designed to be stopped and displayed on the effective line 29 as an eye. Further, it is a condition for shifting to the RT1 state described later that the specific symbols 01, 02, 03 are stopped and displayed on the effective line 29.

<Probability of selecting the combination result number>
FIGS. 8 to 11 show the correspondence between the combination determination result number selected in the combination determination process and the corresponding name, winning combination, winning probability, and the like. A plurality of selection probabilities (also referred to as "winning probabilities") are set according to the above-mentioned set values set by a game clerk or the like. The illustrated selection probability values exemplify those corresponding to a certain set value.

In FIGS. 8 to 11 (A), 52 combination determination result numbers for the winning combination / winning combination from the combination determination result numbers 0 to 51 are set, and in FIG. 11B, one is set. The combination determination result number (combination determination result number 1) for the special role of is set. Hereinafter, the former combination determination result number may be referred to as a "winning / RP combination determination result number", and the latter combination determination result number may be referred to as a "role determination result number".

As shown in the figure, each winning combination is associated with each combination determination result number as a winning combination. For example, the winning / RP combination determination result number 1 is associated with the replaying combination 1 and 2 as duplicate winning combinations, and the combination determination result number 15 is associated with the replaying combination 7 as a single winning combination. The combination determination result number 1 is associated with the BB combination as a single winning combination. It should be noted that the winning / RP combination determination result number 0 is associated with a loss (any game combination is not won). In addition, the name corresponding to each combination determination result number is given for convenience in order to make it easy to distinguish each combination determination result number.

As shown in the figure, the probability that each combination determination result number is selected is set for each RT state (non-RT, RT1 to RT5) described later. The numerical value of the selection probability indicates the ratio of the numerical range assigned to each combination determination result number to the entire numerical range (for example, 65536 in decimal) of the random number sequence generated by the random number generator 66. For example, the probability that the combination determination result number 12 (name: re-game D1, winning combination: re-game combination 1 to 4) is selected is "1 / 7.2" in RT3, and other RT states (non-RT, RT1, In RT2, RT4, RT5), it is "0" (not selected) (the probability value is an approximate value and can be changed as appropriate).

When the winning / RP combination determination result number 1 (re-game A) is selected, the reel stop control for establishing the re-game combination 1 is always performed regardless of the operation order (pushing order) of each stop switch. It has become like. For this reason, the winning / RP role determination result number 1 (replay game A) is appropriately referred to as "pushing order unquestioned RP".

The combination determination result numbers 2 to 6 (re-games B1 to B5) are selected only by RT1, and when selected, the pressing order of each stop switch is a predetermined pressing order regardless of the operation timing of the stop switch. If this is the case, the replay combination 5 which is the RT2 transition RP is always established, and if it is another push order, the reel stop control is performed so that the replay combination 1 or 2 which is the normal RP is always established. In addition, "left", "middle", and "right" described in the remarks column of the winning combination lottery table mean the stop switches 26a, 26b, 26c, and the order of arrangement is the operation order (pushing order). Means. For example, "left and right middle" represents the push order in which the stop switch is operated in the order of 26a, 26c, 26b, and "middle first" is the push order in which the stop switch 26b is operated first (the second and subsequent push orders are). It does not matter). Hereinafter, in the combination determination result numbers 2 to 6 (re-games B1 to B5), for convenience, the push order in which the re-game combination 5 (RT2 transition RP) is established is the "correct answer push order", and the re-game combinations 1 and 2 The push order in which (normal RP) is established is referred to as "incorrect answer push order".

The combination determination result numbers 7 to 11 (re-games C1 to C5) are selected only by RT2, and when selected, the pressing order of each stop switch is a predetermined pressing order regardless of the operation timing of the stop switch. If this is the case, the replay combination 6 which is the RT3 transition RP is always established, and if it is another push order, the reel stop control is performed so that the replay combination 3 or 4 which is the RT1 transition RP is always established. .. Hereinafter, in the combination determination result numbers 7 to 11 (re-games C1 to C5), for convenience, the push order in which the re-game combination 6 (RT3 transition RP) is established is the "correct answer push order", and the re-game combinations 3 and 4 The push order in which (RT1 transition RP) is established is referred to as an "incorrect push order".

The combination determination result numbers 12 to 14 (re-games D1 to D3) are selected only by RT3, and when selected, the pressing order of each stop switch is a predetermined pressing order regardless of the operation timing of the stop switch. If this is the case, the reel stop control is performed so that the replay combination 1 or 2 (normal RP), which is a normal RP, is always established, and if the other push order is used, the replay combination 3 or 4, which is an RT1 transition RP, is always established. It has become like. Hereinafter, in the combination determination result numbers 12 to 13 (re-games D1 to D3), for convenience, the push order in which the re-games 1 and 2 (normal RP) are established is the "correct push order", and the re-games 3 and 3 The push order in which 4 (RT1 transition RP) is established is referred to as "incorrect answer push order". In addition, the combination determination result numbers 2 to 14 are collectively referred to as "push order RT transition RP" as appropriate.

The combination determination result numbers 15 and 16 (replay games E and F) are selected by RT1, RT2 or RT3. When the combination determination result number 15 (re-game E) is selected, the re-game combination 7 which is a cherry RP is always established regardless of the pressing order and operation timing of each stop switch, and the combination determination result number 16 (re-game E) ( When the re-game F) is selected, the re-game combination 7 or 8 which is the cherry RP is always established regardless of the pressing order and the operation timing of each stop switch (the stop switch 26a is operated first, and the left When the symbol "cherry" is stopped and displayed in the lower display area on the reel, the replay combination 8 is established.) Reel stop control is performed. Hereinafter, the combination determination result numbers 15 and 16 are appropriately referred to as "weak cherry" and "strong cherry", respectively.

The combination determination result numbers 17 to 19 (re-games G1 to G3) are selected only by RT3, and when selected, the pressing order of each stop switch is a predetermined pressing order regardless of the operation timing of the stop switch. If this is the case, the replay combination 7 which is the cherry RP is always established, and if it is another push order, the reel stop control is performed so that the replay combination 1 or 2 which is the normal RP is always established. Hereinafter, the combination determination result numbers 17 to 19 (replay games G1 to G3) are collectively referred to as "pushing order cherry RP" as appropriate.

The combination determination result numbers 20 to 22 (re-games H1 to H3) are selected only by RT3, and when selected, the pressing order of each stop switch is a predetermined pressing order regardless of the operation timing of the stop switch. If this is the case, the replay combination 9 which is a chance RP is always established, and if it is another push order, the reel stop control is performed so that the replay combination 1 or 2 which is a normal RP is always established. Hereinafter, the combination determination result numbers 20 to 22 (replay games H1 to H3) are collectively referred to as "push order chance RP", and the combination determination result numbers 2 to 14 (push order RT transition RP) and the combination The decision result numbers 17 to 19 (push order cherry RP) and the combination decision result numbers 20 to 22 (push order chance RP) are collectively referred to as "push order RP" as appropriate. It should be noted that the combination determination result numbers 15 to 22 are set to be selected in the game mode 0 described later as an opportunity to execute the AT lottery described later, and the combination determination result numbers 17 to 22 are set to the game mode 3 described later. It is set as an opportunity to execute the AT lottery.

The combination decision result numbers 23 to 40 (winning A1 to A6, B1 to B6, C1 to C6) are selected in each RT state other than RT5, and when selected, each of them is selected regardless of the operation timing of the stop switch. If the push order of the stop switch is a predetermined push order, one of the 9 small wins 1 to 3 (included in the winning combination) must be established, and if the other push order is one small win. Reel stop control is performed so that any of the small winning combinations 4 to 8 which is a winning combination is always established. Hereinafter, in the combination determination result numbers 31 to 40, for convenience, the push order in which any of the small wins 1 to 3 (9 small wins) is established is the "correct answer push order", and the small wins 4 to 8 (1 piece). The push order in which any of the small roles) is established is called the "incorrect answer push order". In addition, the combination determination result numbers 23 to 40 are collectively referred to as "six-choice push order bell" as appropriate. It should be noted that the combination determination result numbers 23 to 28 (winning A1 to A6) are set to be selected in the game mode 3 described later as an opportunity to execute the push order guessing game lottery described later.

In the present embodiment, if the effective line is one line and the stop switch is operated in the correct pressing order when the above six-choice pressing order bell is selected, the number of payouts is the largest among the duplicate winning combinations. On the other hand, in the case of incorrect answering order, the number of payouts is small by preferentially drawing in the symbols with a larger number set as the corresponding symbols in each corresponding symbol of the duplicate winning combination. The combination is established (number of sheets priority control). On the other hand, when a plurality of effective lines are provided, for example, the symbol combination of "any, bell, any" (any indicates that any symbol may be used) is set as a small winning combination 1, and the winning combination is determined. When the result number 23 is selected, the winning combination's corresponding symbol (for example, the bell symbol of the middle reel) is drawn on multiple effective lines (overlapping positions) in the correct push order, and in the incorrect push order. By controlling the winning combination's corresponding symbol (for example, the bell symbol of the middle reel) to be drawn onto a single effective line, the number of payouts may be different.

The winning combination result number 41 (winning D) is selected in each RT state other than RT5, and when selected, the pressing order of each stop switch is 9 small winning combination regardless of the predetermined pressing order or operation timing. The reel stop control is performed so that any one of the small winning combinations 1 to 3 (usually the small winning combination 1) is always established. Hereinafter, the combination determination result number 41 (winning D) is appropriately referred to as a "common bell".

The winning combination result numbers 42 to 47 (winning E1 to E6) are selected in each RT state other than RT5, and when selected, if the pressing order of each stop switch is a predetermined pressing order, three small winning combinations (3 small winning combinations) Winners E1 and E2 must have any of the small wins 9 to 12, prizes E3 and E4 have any of the small wins 13 to 16, and prizes E5 and E6 have any of the small wins 17 to 20). If it is in order, the corresponding symbol of the predetermined three small wins (see the remarks column of FIG. 11 (A)) can be pulled into the effective line 29 according to the operation timing of the stop switch (the probability is "1 /". In 4 ”), the predetermined three small wins are established, and if it cannot be pulled in (the probability is“ 3/4 ”), any of the specific symbols 01 to 03 (remarks in FIG. 11 (A)). Reel stop control is performed to display a stop on the effective line 29 as a missed eye (see column). Hereinafter, in the combination determination result numbers 42 to 47 (winning E1 to E6), for convenience, the pressing order in which any of the three small winning combinations is always established regardless of the operation timing is the "correct answer pressing order", and the other pressing is performed. The order is called "incorrect answering order". In addition, the combination decision result numbers 42 to 47 are collectively referred to as "three-choice push order bell", and the combination decision result numbers 23 to 40 (six-choice push order bell) and the combination decision result numbers 42 to 47 ( 3 Selective push order bells) are collectively referred to as "push order bells" as appropriate.

When any of the winning combination result numbers 48 to 50 (winning F to H) is selected, the operation timing of each stop switch draws the corresponding symbol of the winning combination regardless of the pressing order of each stop. Depending on whether or not it is the timing to put in, reel control is performed so that any of the winning combinations is established or none of the winning combinations is established. Hereinafter, the combination determination result numbers 48, 49, and 50 are appropriately referred to as "weak watermelon", "strong watermelon", and "chance eye", respectively. It should be noted that the combination determination result numbers 48 to 50 are set to be selected in the game mode 0 described later as an opportunity to execute the AT lottery described later.

The winning combination result number 51 (winning I) is set to be selected only at RT5 (during BB). When the combination determination result number 51 is selected, nine small combinations (usually small combination 1) are always established regardless of the pushing order or the like.

As shown in FIG. 11 (B), the role determination result number 1 (BB01) of the accessory is set to be selected in each RT state other than RT4 (inside BB) and RT5 (inside BB). .. When the combination determination result number 1 of this accessory is selected, the operation timing of each stop switch is the corresponding symbol of the winning combination BB combination on the effective line 29 regardless of the pressing order of each stop switch. When it is the timing to pull in, the BB combination is established. Once the role determination result number 1 (BB01) of the accessory is selected, the winning of the BB role is carried over to the next game until the BB combination is established. In addition, when the winning combination of the BB role is carried over and the replaying combination or the small combination is elected as the winning combination, the corresponding symbol of the replaying combination or the small combination is preferentially drawn onto the effective line 29. Reel control is performed (priority may be given to the establishment of the BB combination).

Next, the main feature configuration of the slot machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 12 to 31.
<Functional block>
As shown in FIG. 12, the slot machine according to the present embodiment mainly describes a betting operation for betting a game medal (for example, an operation of inserting a game medal into a medal insertion slot 21) from a functional point of view. , 1-BET switch 22 or MAX-BET switch 23), reel rotation start operation to rotate each stopped reel 3a to 3c (for example, tilt operation of start lever 25), multiple types of symbols Each reel rotation stop operation (for example, pressing operation of the stop switches 26a, 26b, 26c) for stopping the rotation of the three reels 3a, 3b, 3c that variably displays, bet or stored (credited) game medal. Operation signal output that outputs a signal corresponding to each game operation performed by the player (hereinafter, appropriately referred to as "game operation signal") such as a clearing operation (for example, pressing operation of the clearing switch 24) for paying out Means 95, a main control means 100 (corresponding to the main control board 60) that performs main control related to the progress of the game, and a sub control means 200 (sub control board 70) that performs predetermined effect control according to the situation of the game. Corresponds to) and.

The main control means 100 is roughly classified into a game state management means 110 that mainly manages the game state, a game progress management means 130 that mainly manages the game progress, and a main communication that controls communication in the main control means 100. The control means 150 is provided. Of these, the game state management means 110 includes a setting change / confirmation control means 111, an RT control means 112, a re-game operation control means 113, a bonus game control means 114, a freeze control means 115, a game mode control means 116, and an AT control means. It includes 117 and test specification control means 118.

Further, the game progress management means 130 includes a reception medal management means 131, a combination determination means 132, a game progress information determination means 133, a reel control means 134, a stop display symbol determination means 135, a payout medal management means 136, and a blocker control means 137. The display lamp control means 138, the main side push order management means 139, the mask processing means 140, and the push order hitting game control means 141 are provided, and the main communication control means 150 includes a control command transmission means 151 and an outer end signal transmission means 152. And the test signal transmitting means 153 is provided. The above-mentioned means in the main control means 100 include hardware such as the main CPU 61, ROM 62, RAM 63, and electronic circuits arranged on the main control board 60 shown in FIG. 2, and a control program and the like stored in the ROM 62 and the like. It is a functional representation of what is composed of software.

(Each means constituting the game state management means 110)
The setting change / confirmation control means 111 sets a setting value such as a winning combination probability at the present time by operating the setting key type switch 83 in the ON state and operating the power switch 81 in the ON state in that state. Each time the setting change switch 84 is operated to the ON state while displaying on a predetermined display, the setting value is changed in, for example, 6 steps (setting value 1 to setting value 6), and the changed setting is performed. It is configured to display the value on the display. In the present embodiment, when the setting is changed, the information about the AT is cleared, but the information about the RT state described later is retained as it is, and after the setting is changed, the RT state before the setting change is restored. (You may clear the information about the RT status and return to the non-RT described later after changing the selection).

As shown in FIG. 13, the RT control means 112 is configured to control the setting of six RT states of non-RT, RT1, RT2, RT3, RT4 (inside the BB), and RT5 (inside the BB). There is.

The non-RT is an RT state that is a standard (normal state) in the present embodiment, and the probability that the re-game combination (type is the re-game combination 1 and 2) is won is a reference value (in this embodiment, abbreviated as "1 /". It is set to 7.33 "). In this non-RT state, the transition to RT1 is made when the condition P1 is satisfied. The condition P1 is that any of the above-mentioned specific symbols 01 to 03 is stopped and displayed on the effective line 29.

RT1 is the same standard RT state as non-RT, and the probability that the re-game combination (types 1, 2, 5, 7, 8, 10 to 13) will be won is the same as the non-RT value (type). It is set to abbreviated as "1 / 7.33"). During RT1, the transition to RT2 is made when the condition P2 is satisfied. The condition P2 is that the corresponding symbol of the re-game combination 5 (RT2 transition RP) is stopped and displayed on the effective line 29 (the re-game combination 5 is established).

RT2 is the same standard RT state as non-RT and RT1, and the probability that the re-gaming combination (types 1-3, 6 to 8, 9 to 13) will be won is the same as that of non-RT and RT1. It is set to a value (abbreviated as "1 / 7.33"). In RT2, the transition to RT3 is triggered when the condition P3 is satisfied, and the transition to RT1 is triggered when the condition P1 or the condition P4 is satisfied. The condition P3 is that the corresponding symbol of the re-game combination 6 (RT3 transition RP) is stopped and displayed on the effective line 29 (re-game combination 6 is established), and the condition P4 is the re-game combination 3 Alternatively, the corresponding symbol of 4 (RT1 transition RP) is stopped and displayed on the effective line 29 (replaying combinations 3 and 4 are established).

RT3 is set to a value (abbreviated as "1 / 1.53") in which the probability that the re-gaming combination (types 1 to 4, 7 to 11) will be won is higher than that of non-RT, RT1 and RT2. It is in the RT state. During RT3, the transition to RT1 is made when the above conditions P1 or P4 are satisfied.

RT4 shifts from each RT state of non-RT and RT1 to 3 when the condition P5 that the special combination (BB combination in this embodiment) is won and is not established (corresponding symbol is not displayed) is satisfied. It is the RT state inside the so-called bonus (while winning inside the bonus). In this RT4, the probability that the re-game combination (type is the re-game combination 1 and 2) will be won is set to a value higher than non-RT, RT1 and RT2, and lower than RT3 (abbreviated as "1 / 1.94"). There is. In addition, the transition to RT5 is made when the condition P6 is satisfied during RT4. The condition P6 is that the BB combination is established (the corresponding symbol is stopped and displayed on the effective line 29).

RT5 is an RT state (bonus game state) when the state is set to allow the BB game to be performed by the bonus game control means described later. In this RT5, the winning combination result number 51 (winning I) that all the small winning combinations (small winning combinations 1 to 24) are elected in duplicate is set to be always selected. Further, during RT5, the transition to non-RT is made when the condition P7 is satisfied. The condition P7 means that the bonus game state (BB game) has ended due to the payout of more than a predetermined number (450 medals) of game medals.

The re-game operation control means 113 is in a state in which the player is permitted to perform the next game without betting the game medal held by the player when the re-game combination is established (as appropriate, the "re-game operation state"). It is configured to be set to). When the re-game operation state is set, information indicating that the re-game operation state is set (appropriately referred to as "re-game operation state information") is stored in a predetermined storage area (described later) of the RAM 63. It has become so. Hereinafter, storing the re-game operation state information is also referred to as setting or turning on the re-game operation state flag, and clearing (erasing) the stored re-game operation state information is the re-game operation state flag. It is also called clearing or turning off.

The bonus game control means 114 is set to a state in which the BB game is permitted from the next game (appropriately referred to as "BB operating state") when the BB combination is established, and the BB game ends. It is configured to terminate the BB operating state when the condition (payment of more than 450 game medals) is satisfied. Hereinafter, the fact that the BB operating state is set is also referred to as “BB operating”. Further, the bonus game control means 114 is configured to continuously execute the RB game while the BB is operating. This RB game is internally controlled (not particularly notified to the player), the first game is started at the start of the BB game, and a small winning combination is played during the BB game (while the BB is operating). Every time it is established twice, or every time two games are completed (that is, every two games), it ends once and is restarted immediately afterwards. Further, when the BB game ends, the RB game is also controlled to end (regardless of the number of times the small winning combination is established or the number of games). In the present embodiment, the RB game during the BB game is set to end every time the small winning combination is established twice or every time the two games are completed, but every time the small winning combination is established eight times, Alternatively, it may be set to end every time 12 games are completed.

Hereinafter, the state in which the RB game is executed is referred to as "RB operating state", and the state during the RB game is also referred to as "RB operating". When the BB operating state or the RB operating state is set, information indicating that the BB operating state is set (appropriately referred to as "BB operating state information") or information indicating that the BB operating state is set in a predetermined storage area (described later) of the RAM 63 Information indicating that the RB is in the operating state (appropriately referred to as "RB operating state information") is stored. Hereinafter, storing the BB operating state information [RB operating state information] is also referred to as setting or turning on the BB operating state flag [RB operating state flag], and the stored BB operating state flag [RB operating state flag]. ] Is also referred to as clearing the BB operating state flag [RB operating state flag] or turning it off. Further, the above-mentioned re-game operation state flag, BB operation state flag, and RB operation state flag are collectively referred to as "operation state flag".

The freeze control means 115 executes a control process related to the progress of the game (for example, a process of accepting a bet operation, a reel rotation start operation, a reel rotation stop operation, etc.) when a predetermined condition is satisfied (satisfaction of the condition). It is configured to set a freeze that delays for a predetermined amount of time. In the present embodiment, each time each RB game performed during the above-mentioned BB game is completed, a waiting time at the end of the RB operation as the freeze (details will be described later) is set.

As shown in FIG. 14, the game mode control means 116 has game mode 0 (normal time), game mode 1 (precursor), game mode 2 (AT preparation), game mode 3 (AT), and game mode 4 (BB). To control the settings of seven game modes (words in parentheses are convenient names) of game mode 5 (preparation), game mode 5 (BB), game mode 6 (additional specialization preparation), and game mode 7 (additional specialization). It is configured.

The game mode 0 is a non-AT mode (normal mode) that is set before winning the AT lottery described later. When the game mode 0 is set, if the condition Q1 is satisfied, the game mode 1 is shifted to, and if the condition Q4 is satisfied, the game mode 4 is shifted. Condition Q1 is to win the AT lottery described later, and condition Q4 is to win the BB combination (corresponding symbol is not displayed).

The game mode 1 is a mode during non-AT that is set when the AT lottery described later is won (hereinafter referred to as "AT winning"). In this game mode 1, the sub-control means 200 mainly performs an effect (precursor effect) that suggests that the AT has been won (it is confirmed that the AT is set). ing. When the condition Q2 is satisfied when the game mode 1 is set, the game mode 2 is shifted to, and when the above condition Q4 is satisfied, the game mode 6 is shifted. Condition Q2 means that in the game mode 1, the number of games determined by the AT precursor G number lottery (“G number” means “game number”) (hereinafter, appropriately referred to as “precursor G number”) is exhausted. To be done.

The game mode 2 is a mode in which AT is being prepared, which is set when the precursor G number is exhausted in the above-mentioned game mode 1. When the game mode 2 is set, notification of the correct push order when the above-mentioned push order RT transition RP is selected (hereinafter, appropriately referred to as "replay navigation") or when the above-mentioned push order bell is selected. The correct answer is notified of the push order (hereinafter, appropriately referred to as "bell navigation", and the replay navigation and the bell navigation are collectively referred to as "push order navigation"). When the condition Q3 is satisfied in the game mode 2, the mode shifts to the game mode 3, and when the condition Q4 is satisfied, the mode shifts to the game mode 6. The condition Q3 is that the stop switch is set to RT3 or the stop switch is operated in a pressing order different from the correct pressing order notified by the pressing order navigation.

The game mode 3 is a mode during AT. When the game mode 3 is set, the number of games managed (counted) by the AT counter described later (hereinafter, appropriately referred to as "the number of AT games") is set, and the push order navigation is executed. When the condition Q8 that the game for the number of AT games is consumed (the value of the AT counter becomes "0") is satisfied while the game mode 3 is set, the game mode 0 or the game mode 1 (game mode 1) is satisfied. When the number of AT games is exhausted, if the number of AT stocks described later is "0", the game mode is changed to 0, and if the number of AT stocks is "1" or more, the game mode is changed to 1), and the above condition Q4 is satisfied. Then, the game mode 6 is set.

The game mode 4 is a mode in which the BB is being prepared, which is set by satisfying the above condition Q4 (BB winning combination) in the game mode 0 (hence, in a state where no AT is won). If the condition Q5 is satisfied while the game mode 4 is set, the game mode 5 is set. The condition Q5 is that the BB combination is established (the corresponding symbol of the BB combination is stopped and displayed on the effective line 29).

The game mode 5 is a mode in the BB that is shifted from the game mode 4 (hence, the state without AT winning) when the BB combination is established. When the condition Q6 is satisfied when the game mode 5 is set, the game mode is changed to the game mode 0, and when the condition Q7 is satisfied, the game mode 2 is changed. Condition Q6 means that the BB game ends in a state where there is no AT winning (each game AT lottery is performed in game mode 5 as described later) (AT stock number = 0), and condition Q7 is AT. The BB game ends when there is a win (AT stock number> 0).

The game mode 6 is a mode of additional special preparation set by satisfying the above condition Q4 (BB winning combination) in the game mode 1, the game mode 2, and the game mode 3 (hence, in the state where the AT is won). be. If the above condition Q5 (establishment of the BB combination) is satisfied while the game mode 6 is set, the mode shifts to the game mode 7. In the present embodiment, when the game mode is changed to 6 (when the game is changed to the inside of the BB (RT4) with the AT winning state), the correct answer pressing order is basically notified (pushing order navigation). No (However, if an internal middle counter is set up separately and a special role (BB role) is won but it is not established, the internal middle counter is set and several games until the internal middle counter becomes 0 are pushed in order. It may be difficult to make the player aware that the game mode 6 has been entered.) The reason why the push order is not notified in the game mode 6 is to reduce the ball ejection rate inside the BB. On the other hand, if it is not necessary to reduce the ball ejection rate inside the BB, the push order may be notified even in the game mode 6.

The game mode 7 is an additional specialization (expected to increase the number of AT stocks) mode which is shifted from the game mode 6 (hence, the state where the AT is won) when the BB combination is established. When the above condition Q7 (BB game ends with AT winning) is satisfied while the game mode 7 is set, the game mode 2 is shifted to. The number of AT stocks is added by "1" when shifting from the game mode 6 to the game mode 7, and the number of AT stocks is subtracted by "1" when the BB game ends and the game mode 7 ends. It has become.

The AT control means 117 is different from the correct push order notified by the push order navigation that the condition Q3 is satisfied (set to RT3) when the game mode 2 is set. The AT setting condition is that the stop switch is operated in the pressing order), and the AT counter that manages the above-mentioned number of AT games is set by satisfying the AT setting condition (initial value "50" in this embodiment). However, the numerical value can be changed arbitrarily) (at this time, the game mode control means is also used to shift to the game mode 3). The fact that the AT is set to RT3 has the meaning of starting the AT at RT3, which is advantageous for the player and has a high probability of winning the re-game combination.

On the other hand, the AT setting condition is that the stop switch is operated in a pressing order different from the correct pressing order notified by the pressing order navigation for the following reasons. That is, in the game mode 2, the AT counter is not set, but the push order navigation is executed. Therefore, if only the transition to RT3 is set as the AT setting condition (the AT counter is not set even if the push order different from the push order notified in the game mode 2 is executed), the replay navigation is performed. As long as the player executes a push order different from the notified push order at the time of being broken, the RT3 is not shifted to, so that the game mode 2 remains set. Since the bell navigation is also performed when the game mode 2 is set, the period in which the game medals are permanently increased can be maintained by following the bell navigation instead of following the replay navigation. Therefore, when a push order different from the notified push order is executed in the game mode 2, the AT counter is set (the transition to the game mode 3 is also performed) to start the AT. .. In this case, AT is started at non-RT, RT1, 2 where the winning probability of the re-game combination is lower than that of RT3. Further, if the BB combination is won while the game mode 2 is set, the game mode 6 (or game mode 7 if the BB combination is established) is entered, so that the player intentionally follows the push order navigation. If it is allowed to maintain the game mode 2 by not doing so, a situation may occur in which the number of AT stocks increases without starting AT, and there is also a meaning to avoid it.

Further, in the present embodiment, the set AT counter value is subtracted by "1" for each game (except in game modes 6 and 7), and the AT is terminated when the AT counter reaches "0". ing. That is, in the present embodiment, the end condition of AT is that the games for the number of AT games (50 games) have been digested. As a change mode, a predetermined number of game medals were paid out during the AT period, a predetermined number of acquisitions (total number of differences between the number of payouts and the number of bets) was obtained, and a predetermined number. The execution of the bell navigation of the above may be used as the termination condition of the AT.

In the present embodiment, when the BB combination is won or established and the game modes 6 and 7 are set in the state where the AT counter is set, the AT counter is not subtracted (to be subtracted) as described above. It is also possible to do). By doing so, even if the BB combination is won or established when the AT is set, there is no loss for the player (after the end of the BB game, the AT is set from the state before the BB combination is won. Can be resumed). Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, even if the AT is set (the AT counter is set) by executing the push order different from the push order notified in the game mode 2, after that. Although the push order is notified, the push order may not be notified (the period during which the push order is not notified may be limited to only a few games).

The test specification control means 118 determines whether the slot machine 1 has test specifications or mass production specifications (the specific determination method will be described later), and a predetermined determination result is determined according to the determination result. Execute control processing (for example, set a winning information output period timer described later, etc., output the test signal described later when it is determined to be the test specification, but output it when it is determined to be the mass production specification. (Not) (details will be described later). Here, the test specifications refer to, for example, specifications for taking a type test for determining whether or not a newly developed gaming machine (slot machine) conforms to a predetermined standard, and mass production specifications are sold. (For setting up a game store). The control programs and the like written in the ROM 62 have the same contents regardless of whether they have test specifications or mass production specifications.

(Each means constituting the game progress management means 130)
The acceptance medal management means 131 is guided to the acceptance passage of the actually accepted game medals (hereinafter, appropriately referred to as “insertion game medals”) inserted from the medal insertion slot 21. The game medal detected by the inserted medal sensor 28b; hereinafter, appropriately referred to as “accepted medal”) is controlled so as to be a directly bet game medal or a credited game medal. It is configured. In the present embodiment, if the number of bets (number of BETs) does not reach the maximum number of bets allowed (in the embodiment, the number of bets required to execute the game (specified number "3"), the accepted game medal Is a game medal to be bet directly, and if the number of bets has reached the maximum bet allowable number and the number of credits has not reached the maximum credit allowable number (“50” in this embodiment), the accepted game medal is credited. It is configured to be a game medal to be played.

In addition, the receptive medal management means 131 automatically bets processing (the same number of game medals as the number of bets in the previous game is obtained without reducing the number of game medals held by the player) in the game set to the re-game operation state. It is configured to perform the process of setting the bet state). If the number of bets has reached the maximum permissible number of bets and the number of credits has reached the maximum permissible number of credits, the inserted game medals are not accepted and are returned.

A plurality of combination determination means 132 are used based on preset combination determination probabilities (selection probability, winning probability) triggered by the operation of the start lever 25 (the operation of the start lever 25 is effectively accepted). It is configured to perform a combination determination process for selecting at least one combination determination result number from the combination determination result numbers. This combination determination process is performed by a random number lottery using the random number generator 66 and the sampling circuit 67 shown in FIG. Specifically, after acquiring (latching and reading) one random number (number) from the random number sequence generated by the random number generator 66 by the sampling circuit 67, the acquired random number is a plurality of combination determination result numbers. It is configured to determine which of the winning combination determination results corresponds to and select the winning combination determination result number.

When one combination determination result number is selected in the combination determination process, the game combination corresponding to the selected combination determination result number becomes the establishment allowable combination in the game. Further, the information of the selected combination determination result number is stored in a predetermined storage area (which will be described later) of the RAM 63. The area in which the information on the winning combination result number of the winning combination is stored is set separately from the area in which the information on the winning / winning combination determination result number is stored. In the following, storing the information of the winning / RP role determination result number [role determination result number] is set or turned on by setting or turning on the winning / RP combination determination result flag [role determination result flag]. Clearing the information of the winning / RP role determination result number [role determination result number] that has been memorized is cleared by clearing the winning / RP combination determination result flag [role determination result flag] or OFF. It is called as.

The information of the winning / RP combination determination result number stored in one game is the end point of the game regardless of whether or not a small role or a re-game combination is established (in this embodiment, the game end check described later). Cleared in (Processing) (As another aspect, it is cleared at the start of the next game (for example, when the start lever operation is accepted), or the information of the combination determination result number selected in the next game is overwritten without clearing. It is also possible to do it). On the other hand, once the information of the role determination result number of the character is stored, it is carried over to the next game as it is stored until the special role (BB role) is established. In the present specification, the state in which the information of the winning combination result number of the accessory is carried over while being stored is referred to as being carried over to the winning combination of the BB role or being referred to as being inside the BB.

The game progress information determining means 133 is mainly configured to execute various lottery for determining information necessary for advancing the game. In the present embodiment, as such a lottery, an AT lottery, an AT precursor G number lottery, and a push order guessing game lottery are performed.

The AT lottery is a lottery for determining whether or not to set the AT, and when the above-mentioned game mode 0 or 3 is set, a predetermined combination determination result number (in the present embodiment, the combination during the game mode 0). It is performed when the determination result numbers 15 to 22, 48 to 50 and the combination determination result numbers 17 to 22) are selected in the game mode 3, and each game is performed when the game mode 5 or 7 is set. .. The selection items and selection probabilities in the AT lottery are as shown in FIG. 15 (A). When the AT is won, the number of AT stocks for identifying the number of AT stocks that can be set is added by "1" (the value of the counter set to count the number of AT stocks (initial value "0") is "+1". Will be done). As another aspect, the selection probability of AT winning may be set to a different value depending on the game mode, or the lottery for determining the selection probability of AT winning may be performed separately.

The AT precursor G number lottery is a lottery for determining the number of games (precursor G number) up to the AT setting, which is performed when the AT is won in the AT lottery in the above-mentioned game mode 0. The selection items and selection probabilities in the AT precursor G number lottery are as shown in FIG. 15 (B). When the precursor G number is determined, a counter for counting it (hereinafter referred to as "precursor counter") is set (the initial value is the value selected in the AT precursor G number lottery), and every game from the next game, precursor G The number is subtracted by "1" (the value of the precursor counter is "-1"). As another aspect, the precursor G number may be set uniformly without the AT precursor G number lottery, or the precursor G number may not be set.

In the push order guessing game lottery, when the combination determination result numbers 23 to 28 (6 selection push order bells) are selected when the game mode 3 is set, the push order guess game described later is executed. It is a lottery to decide whether or not. The selection items and selection probabilities in the push order guessing game lottery are as shown in FIG. 15 (C).

The reel control means 134 confirms that the minimum game time has elapsed when the start lever 25 is operated (the operation of the start lever 25 is effectively accepted), and then the reels 3a to After 3c was started to rotate and all the reels that started to rotate were in a constant speed rotation state, the stop switches 26a, 26b, and 26c were sequentially operated (each operation of the stop switches 26a to 26c was effectively accepted. That) is used as an opportunity to sequentially stop the rotation of the corresponding reels 3a to 3c.

The rotation stop control of the reels 3a to 3c is an operation mode of the stop switches 26a to 26c based on each stop table (not shown) set (set) according to the combination determination result number selected by the combination determination process. It is performed according to (pushing order, operation timing, etc.). Each reel 3a to 3c is set so that each reel 3a to 3c stops within a predetermined stop allowable time (for example, 190 milliseconds) from the timing when the stop switches 26a, 26b, 26c are operated (in the present embodiment). It is performed within the range of the maximum number of sliding frames of 5 frames.

That is, when a predetermined game combination is selected as a winning combination as a result of the combination determination process, the corresponding symbol of the selected gaming combination is placed on the valid line 29 as much as possible within the range of the above-mentioned allowable stop time. In the case of a loss, the reels 3a to 3c are stopped and controlled so that the corresponding symbols of any of the game combinations are not stopped and displayed on the effective line 29. In the present embodiment, when a replaying role or a small role is won while the winning of the BB role is carried over, the replaying role and the small role are prioritized (the priority is higher for the replaying role, but it is changed). Possible) The reel rotation stop control of the re-game combination priority or the small combination priority to be established is performed.

The stop display symbol determination means 135 determines which symbol is the symbol that is stopped and displayed by the reels 3a to 3c, and the game combination is established from the combination of the symbols that are stopped and displayed on the effective line 29. It is configured to determine if it is present.

When the re-game combination is established, information indicating that the corresponding symbol of the re-game combination (hereinafter, also referred to as "re-game operation symbol") is stopped and displayed on the effective line (as appropriate, "re-game operation symbol display information"". However, when a special combination (BB combination) is established, information indicating that the corresponding symbol of the BB combination (hereinafter, also referred to as "BB operation symbol") is stopped and displayed on the effective line (as appropriate). (Referred to as "BB operation symbol display information") is configured to be stored in a predetermined storage area (described later) of the RAM 63. Hereinafter, storing the re-game operation symbol display information is referred to as setting or turning on the re-game operation symbol display flag, and clearing the stored re-game operation symbol display information information is referred to as clearing the re-game operation symbol display information. It is called clearing the display flag or turning it off. Similarly, storing the BB operation symbol display information is referred to as setting or turning on the BB operation symbol display flag, and clearing the stored BB operation symbol display information clears the BB operation symbol display flag. It is called turning it off. Further, the re-game operation symbol display flag and the BB operation symbol display flag are collectively referred to as an "operation symbol display flag". The data of the operation symbol display flag is used for data generation of the above-mentioned operation state flags (re-game operation state flag, BB operation state flag, and RB operation state flag) (details will be described later), and at the start of the game of the next game. It is designed to be cleared (when the operation of the start lever 25 is accepted).

The payout medal management means 136 adds the number of game medals corresponding to the small winning combination established when the small winning combination is established to the number of credits when the number of credits does not reach the maximum credit allowance. When the number of credits has reached the maximum allowable number of credits due to the payout, the payout is made by the actual payout that drives the hopper 50 via the hopper drive circuit 52. Further, when the clearing operation (pressing operation of the clearing switch 24) is effectively accepted, the payout medal management means 136 transfers the bet number of game medals or the credited number of game medals to the hopper 50. It is designed to be driven and refunded.

The blocker control means 137 outputs a blocker signal for controlling the blocker 48, and switches the blocker 48 between an ON state (game medal acceptance state) and an OFF state (game medal acceptance state). It is configured as follows. When the blocker 48 is turned off, the game medals inserted into the medal insertion slot 21 are guided to the return passage and returned. However, the fact that the game medal has been inserted is detected by the inserted medal sensor 28a.

The display lamp control means 138 includes various display lamps (MAX-BET display lamp 46a, BET lamp 46b, insertable display lamp 46c, game start display lamp 46d, re-game display lamp 46e, status display lamp 46f, etc. The number-of-times display lamp 46g, the CRE lamp 46h, and the WIN lamp 46j) are controlled to be turned on and off via the display lamp control circuit 47. When the WIN lamp 46j is to function as the main push order notification device, the WIN lamp 46j is controlled by the main push order management means 139.

The main side push order management means 139 is a push order instruction number (any of A0 to A9. In addition to this, the sub control means 200 side) set in advance according to the combination determination result number selected by the combination determination process. There is A10 as the push order instruction number determined by). In the present embodiment, each push order instruction number is set as shown in the push order instruction number-corresponding push order-display content correspondence table of FIG.

The push order instruction number A0 is selected when the push order is not notified, and the corresponding push order is "unknown". The push order instruction numbers A1 to A6 are selected when it is desired to notify the first push order to the third push order, and the corresponding push order is set as shown in the table of FIG. For example, the corresponding push order of the push order instruction number A2 is "left and right middle", and the corresponding push order of the push order instruction number A5 is "right and left middle". Further, the push order instruction numbers A7 to A9 are selected when the push order guessing game described later is performed, and the corresponding push orders are "left ??" (the first push order is "left", respectively. (The rest is unknown), "Middle ??" (the first push order is "Middle" and the rest is unknown), and "Right ??" (The first push order is "Right" and the rest is unknown). The push order instruction number A10 is not selected by the main push order management means 139, and is a sub when it is desired to notify the symbol "character" to be aimed at by pushing the inside of the BB (there is no corresponding push order). (Sub-control means 200) is determined on the side.

The correspondence between the combination determination result number selected by the combination determination process and the push order instruction number selected by the main side push order management means 139 is shown in the combination determination result number-push order instruction number correspondence table of FIG. That's right. As shown in the figure, the selected push order instruction numbers differ depending on the combination determination result numbers selected by the combination determination process in the above-mentioned game modes 2 and 3. For example, when the combination decision result number 7 is selected, the push order instruction number A1 is selected, and when the combination decision result number 32 is selected, the push order instruction number A4 is selected, and the combination decision result number 1, When 15 to 22, 48 to 51 (corresponding to "others" in the table) are selected, the push order instruction number A0 is selected, and so on.

Two push order instruction numbers (one of which is shown in parentheses) are described for the combination determination result numbers 6, 11 to 14, but in this embodiment, the push order instruction of the one shown without parentheses is described. The number is selected, but as another aspect, it means that the push order instruction number shown in parentheses may be selected. Further, regarding the combination determination result numbers 23 to 28, in addition to the push order instruction number selected when the push order guessing game described later is not performed, the push order instruction selected when the push order guessing game is played is performed. The numbers are listed in parentheses. For example, when the combination determination result number 25 is selected, only the push order instruction number A3 is selected when the push order guessing game is not played, and when the push order guessing game is played, the push order instruction number A3 is selected. In addition, it indicates that the push order instruction number A8 is selected. On the other hand, in the above-mentioned game modes 0, 4 to 7, the push order instruction number A0 is selected regardless of the combination determination result number selected by the combination determination process.

Further, the main side push order management means 139 causes the WIN lamp 46j to function as a main side push order notification device, and notifies the selected push order instruction number. Specifically, two 7-segment lamps (hereinafter, may be abbreviated as "7-segment") provided on the WIN lamp 46j are used to notify the push order instruction number. FIG. 18 shows an example of the notification mode. FIG. 18A shows a mode in which the push order instruction number A2 is displayed, and “=” is displayed on the left 7-segment display and “2” is displayed on the right 7-segment display. FIG. 18C shows a mode in which the push order instruction number A8 is displayed, and “=” is displayed on the left 7-segment display and “8” is displayed on the right 7-segment display. The "=" displayed on the left 7-segment is for distinguishing from the case where the number of payouts is displayed on the WIN lamp 46j. In addition, when displaying the push order instruction number, when displaying the push order instruction number selected corresponding to the push order bell (in the case of Bell Navi), and when displaying the push order instruction number selected corresponding to the push order RT transition RP. The display mode may be changed so that it is possible to distinguish which case is the same push order instruction number when displaying the order instruction number (in the case of replay navigation). For example, it is conceivable that the position of "=" displayed on the left 7-segment display is higher in the case of the bell navigation system. When the push order instruction number A0 is selected, the display is not performed by the WIN lamp 46j (see FIG. 16 for the correspondence between each push order instruction number and the display content by the WIN lamp 46j).

Further, as another aspect, the push order instruction number may be displayed by the WIN lamp 46j in binary. For example, as shown on the right side of FIG. 18 (F), the push order number and the like are displayed by associating the lamps at each position of the 7-segment display with bits 0 to 6 when displaying in binary numbers. .. FIG. 18F is a mode in which "0001001" (corresponding to the push order instruction number A9) is displayed in binary in the left or right 7-segment display, and the lamp at the corresponding bit position is lit. .. As a change example, the winning combination result number may be displayed by the WIN lamp 46j.

In the present embodiment, switching between when the WIN lamp 46j is used as the main push order notification device and when it is used as the display of the number of game medals paid out is performed at the following timing. That is, after displaying the number of payouts in one game, the WIN lamp 46j is temporarily turned off when the betting operation is performed in the next game. Then, the push order instruction number is displayed at an arbitrary timing from the time when the start lever 25 is operated until each reel is in the constant speed rotation state. Further, when all the reels are stopped, the WIN lamp 46j displaying the push order instruction number is turned off, and then the number of payouts is displayed according to the game medal payout process. When the bet operation is performed, the WIN lamp 46j is not turned off, the display is switched to "00" or the like, and when the start lever 25 is operated, the push order instruction number is displayed from that state. You may do so. Similarly, when switching from the display of the push order instruction number to the display of the number of payouts, the WIN lamp 46j is not turned off, the display of the push order instruction number is switched to the display such as "00", and the number of payouts is changed from that state. The number of payouts may be displayed directly from the state in which the push order instruction number is displayed.

The mask processing means 140 is adapted to perform mask processing that replaces the information of the winning / RP combination determination result number selected by the combination determination process with the information of the effect group number (another aspect, the role of the accessory). The determination result number may also be masked). This production group number classifies the winning / RP winning combination result numbers selected by the winning combination process into a plurality of groups (classified according to the type of winning combination), and is assigned to each group. .. The correspondence between the production group number and the winning / RP combination determination result number is as shown in the production group number-combination determination result number correspondence table in FIG. As shown in the figure, in the present embodiment, the effect group numbers 0 to 21 are set as the effect group numbers. Each production group number is associated with each type of winning / RP combination determination result number selected by the combination determination process. For example, the production group number 2 is associated with the combination determination result numbers 2 to 6 (replay games B1 to B6) in the RT transition RP, and the production group number 11 is the combination determination result number 21 (in the push order chance). It is associated with the replay game H2), and the effect group number 15 is associated with the combination determination result numbers 35 to 40 (winning C1 to C6) among the 6-choice push order bells.

In this way, mask processing is performed to replace the winning / RP combination determination result numbers selected by the combination determination process with the effect group number, and the information of the effect group number is transmitted to the sub-control means 200 as follows. There are advantages. That is, the sub-control means 200 may change the color and content of the background of the image production according to the type of the gaming combination that has become the winning combination (establishment allowable combination) by the combination determination process. Therefore, by associating the effect group numbers with the types of the winning / RP combination determination result numbers selected by the combination determination process, the sub-control means 200 that has received the information of the effect group number can be used. It is possible to determine the content of the image effect or the like according to the number information. For example, when the information of the production group number 19 is received, the production (strong production) is performed so as to give the player a sense of expectation, and when the information of the production group number 18 is received, the player is expected. It is possible to decide to perform a production (weak production) that does not give a feeling.

In addition, performing such mask processing also has the following advantages. The production group number is one effect for a plurality of combination determination result numbers for the combination determination result number (push order RT transition RP or push order bell) that is advantageous or disadvantageous to the player depending on the push order. Since the group numbers are associated with each other, for example, even if it is possible to specify whether the push order RT transition RP was won or the push order bell was won, the winning combination determination result number corresponding to which correct push order was won. It is not possible to identify whether it was done. That is, despite the fact that the push order is not notified during non-AT, the information transmission path from the main control means to the sub control means is illegally accessed and the information of the combination determination result number (correct answer based on it). There is an advantage that it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts that attempt to illegally obtain information on the push order). In this way, in the mask processing, it is difficult to specify the correct answer pressing order, which is advantageous for the player, by removing the information on the operation mode (pressing order) of the stop switch from the information on the winning / RP combination determination result number selected. It has the significance of making it. In the present embodiment, when the push order is not notified, the information of the push order instruction number A0 (push order unknown) is transmitted, which is effective in preventing fraudulent acts as described above. It is possible to increase.

In the mask processing in the present embodiment, the information itself of the winning / RP winning combination result number, which is selected by the combination determination process and stored in the predetermined storage area, is rewritten (overwritten) with the effect group number. Instead, when transmitting the combination determination result number information to the sub-control means 200, the winning / RP combination determination result number information stored in the predetermined storage area is read out, and the read combination determination result number information is used. Based on this, information on the effect group number (effect group number command described later) is generated, and the effect group number command is transmitted to the sub-control means 200 (hereinafter, may be referred to as "CB". CB is an abbreviation for command buffer). It is set to. By performing the mask processing when the command is transmitted in this way, it is not necessary to provide an area for storing the effect group number in the RAM or the like, so that it is possible to suppress an increase in the storage area. Of course, the information of the effect group number to be transmitted may be generated and stored in advance.

As an example of changing the mask processing, the combination determination result number for the mask processing may be used instead of the above-mentioned effect group number. The combination determination result number for mask processing is not selected by the combination determination process, and the combination determination result number (any of 0 to 51) selected by the combination determination process is used as the combination determination result for mask processing. It is set to be used in place of a number. The correspondence between the combination determination result number selected by the combination determination process and the combination determination result number for mask processing can be set as shown in FIG. 20, for example. In the illustrated example, the combination determination result numbers 52 to 73 are set as the combination determination result numbers for mask processing (the winning names in the figure are for making it easy to distinguish each combination determination result number for mask processing. Is attached for convenience). The combination determination result numbers for each mask processing are associated with each type of combination determination result number selected by the combination determination process. For example, the combination determination result number 55 (pushing order RT transition RP2 (mask)) is associated with the combination determination result numbers 7 to 11, and the combination determination result number 65 (6 selection pressing order bell 1 (mask)) is the combination determination result. It is associated with numbers 23 to 28, and so on. In the case of this modification, not the information of the combination determination result number selected by the combination determination process, but the information of the combination determination result number for mask processing associated with the combination determination result number is transmitted to the sub-control means 200. Will be done. Even when such a combination determination result number for mask processing is used, the same effect as when the above-mentioned effect group number is used can be obtained.

When performing mask processing, it is not necessary to associate one effect group number with a plurality of combination determination result numbers for the following winning / RP combination determination result numbers.
(1) The combination determination result number (for example, combination determination result numbers 1, 15 to 22) of the re-game combination that does not affect the advantage or disadvantage in the game (there is no effect on the ball output) due to the difference in the pushing order.
(2) The winning combination combination determination result numbers (for example, combination determination result numbers 41 and 51) in which the number of game medals won does not differ due to the difference in the pushing order.
(3) The winning combination combination result number (for example, combination determination result number 48 to 50) in which the number of game medals that can be obtained is small (for example, less than or equal to the specified number of bets).
(4) The winning combination result number of (2) and (3) above.

Further, in the present embodiment, the mask processing is performed regardless of the game mode or the RT state (this can simplify the control program), but it is not necessary to notify the pressing order (for example,). In game modes 0, 1, 4, 5, 6, 7), mask processing is performed, and in situations where it is necessary to notify the push order (for example, game modes 2, 3), mask processing is not performed to determine the winning combination. The information of the result number may be transmitted to the sub-control means as it is.

The push order hitting game control means 141 is configured to control the push order hitting game. In the push order guessing game, a part or all of the push order that is the correct push order is hidden and notified, and when the player can execute the correct push order, a predetermined profit (of the game medium) is given to the player. In addition, the setting of AT, the addition of the number of AT games, etc., and the addition of the number of AT stocks in this embodiment) are added. In the present embodiment, when the winning combination decision result numbers 23 to 28 (6 selection push order bells) are selected in the above-mentioned game mode 3 and the push order hit game lottery is won, the push order hit The game is set up. When the push order guessing game is set, the push order instruction number (any of A7 to A9) for the push order guessing game corresponding to the correct push order is determined, and the push order according to the push order instruction number is determined. Notification (notification with at least a part of the pushing order turned down) is performed. The sub (sub-control means 200) side recognizes that the push order hit game has been set by receiving the push order number for the push order hit game.

Further, in the push order guessing game, each time the player operates the stop switch, it is determined whether or not the correct answer is in the push order, and if the correct answer is in the push order, the success information indicating that is the secondary means. Will be sent to. On the other hand, if the answer is not in the correct push order, failure information indicating that is transmitted. The sub-control means 200 that has received this information determines whether or not the push order hitting game has succeeded based on the information, and executes the corresponding effect (push order hitting game success effect or failure effect). It has become. It should be noted that the timing for determining whether or not the correct answer is in the pressing order and transmitting the success information or the failure information corresponds to the stopped switch that has been operated after the information indicating that the stop switch has been operated has been transmitted. It can be any timing before transmitting the information indicating that the reel to be stopped is stopped. On the other hand, the timing may be after transmitting the information indicating that the reel corresponding to the operated stop switch has stopped and before transmitting the information indicating that the other stop switch has been operated.

(Each means constituting the main communication control means 150)
The control command transmitting means 151 is configured to transmit a control command including various information related to the game at a predetermined timing. For example, as a control command to be transmitted when the start lever is operated, a control command including information indicating which of the game modes 1 to 7 is set (hereinafter, "game mode" as appropriate). Command "), non-RT, control command including information indicating which RT state of RT1 to RT5 is set (hereinafter, appropriately referred to as" RT command "), and information on the push order instruction number. Control command including information (hereinafter, appropriately referred to as "push order instruction number command"), production group number (masked winning / RP combination determination result number), control command (hereinafter, appropriately "effect group number command") ”), A control command containing information on the role determination result number of the accessory (hereinafter, appropriately referred to as a“ accessory combination determination result number command ”. Further, an effect group number command and a role determination result number command of the accessory”. Are collectively referred to as "role determination result command"). In addition to this, a control command including information on the set value, a control command including information on the value of the AT counter, a control command including information on the number of AT stocks, and a control command including information indicating the effect content to be executed by the sub-control means. Etc. may be transmitted when the start lever is operated.

Further, the control command transmitting means 151 receives the first stop operation (operation of the stop switch for stopping the first reel), and the control includes information indicating that the first stop operation has been accepted. A command (hereinafter, appropriately referred to as a "first stop reception command") is transmitted, and information on the first cylinder stop is included in the wake of the first cylinder stop (stopping the reel corresponding to the first stop operation). A control command (hereinafter, appropriately referred to as a "first stop command") is transmitted. Similarly, when the second stop operation (operation of the stop switch for stopping the second reel) is accepted, a control command including information indicating that the second stop operation is accepted (hereinafter, appropriately " A control command (hereinafter, appropriately referred to as appropriate) that includes information on the second cylinder stop, triggered by the second cylinder stop (stopping the reel corresponding to the second stop operation) while transmitting the "second stop reception command"). Send a "second stop command"). Similarly, when the third stop operation (operation of the stop switch for stopping the third reel) is accepted, a control command including information indicating that the third stop operation has been accepted (hereinafter, appropriately "No. 3") A control command (hereinafter, appropriately referred to as "three stop reception command") including information on the third body stop is transmitted and triggered by the third body stop (stopping the reel corresponding to the third stop operation). (Called the third stop command) is sent. Further, after determining the stop symbol, a control command including information on the stop display symbol (hereinafter, referred to as a "total stop command" as appropriate because it is used as a command indicating that the full rotation body has stopped), a game medal A control command containing information on the number of payouts (hereinafter, appropriately referred to as a "number of payout commands") is transmitted.

In the present embodiment, the combination determination process is performed when the start lever is operated, the combination determination result number is selected, and the push order instruction number is determined based on the selected combination determination result number. It has become like. However, the command transmission to the sub-control means is performed before the push order instruction number command (effect group number command and role determination result number command of the character). .. That is, the combination determination result number is stored before the push order instruction number in the storage of the information in the predetermined storage area of the RAM, but the information set in the transmission buffer (CB) is the push order instruction. The number command is executed before the combination result command.

Further, in the present embodiment, the combination determination result number command of the accessory is used as a command indicating that the start lever has been operated, and the sub-control means has received the combination determination result number command of the accessory. As an opportunity, the effect to be executed when the start lever is operated is started. As a result, it is not necessary to send a command indicating that the start lever has been operated as a separate command, so that the processing load on the main control means can be reduced. Further, as described above, the sub-control means that receives the control commands in this order by transmitting the push order instruction number command before the combination determination result command precedes the effect processing based on the combination determination result command. , It is possible to start the push order navigation effect and the like described later as the effect process based on the push order instruction number command, and to start the push order navigation effect and the like during the effect process based on the combination determination result command. Communication between the main control means 100 and the sub control means 200 (sub-main control means 200A) is possible only in one direction from the main control means 100 to the sub-control means 200 (sub-main control means 200A). There is.

The outer end signal transmitting means 152 is configured to transmit an outer end signal to a data counter, a hall computer, or the like when a predetermined gaming state is reached. In the present embodiment, the BB signal and the RB signal are transmitted as the outer end signal. The BB signal is turned on when the condition for shifting to the game mode 3 (AT) is satisfied, and when the end condition for the game mode 3 (condition for shifting from the game mode 3 to another game mode) is satisfied. Is turned off. On the other hand, the RB signal is turned on when the BB combination is established, and turned off when the BB game is completed. However, when the game mode 3 is entered via the game modes 0 and 1 (non-AT state), the RB signal is turned on together with the BB signal. Further, when the BB signal is ON, the BB signal is not turned OFF even if the BB combination is won, and when the BB combination is established, the BB signal is turned OFF and the RB signal is turned ON. This is because if the BB signal is turned off by winning the BB role, the BB signal is turned off even though the end condition of the game mode 3 is not satisfied, and the player knows that the BB role has been won. Because it will end up. In addition, a display lamp (referred to as a "bonus lamp") for notifying that the BB combination has been won is provided, which is managed by the main control means, and if the notification has already been performed, the BB combination is established. The BB signal may be turned off even before. However, when it is notified that the BB combination has been won by the liquid crystal display device managed by the sub-control means instead of such a bonus lamp, the BB signal is not turned off.

When the slot machine 1 has test specifications, the test signal transmitting means 153 is a signal for transmitting various information for testing to a test device connected to the slot machine 1 (collectively, each signal). , Appropriately referred to as "test signal") is configured to be output (transmitted). Examples of the test signal output in the present embodiment include a symbol stop test signal, an operating state test signal, and a winning information test signal. The symbol stop test signal is a signal for transmitting information (information on the push order and push position) regarding the optimum operation mode of each stop switch, and is a predetermined output port for serial communication (as appropriate, "test output port SO0". Is output as a serial signal. The operation state test signal is a signal for transmitting the presence / absence of the re-game operation state, the presence / absence of the BB operation state, and the presence / absence of the RB operation state, and is a predetermined output port for parallel communication (appropriately "test output port PO8"). Is output as a parallel signal. Winning information The test signal is composed of the winning information of the winning character (consisting of the information of the winning combination result number of the accessory and the information of the identifier for causing the test device to identify the information of the winning combination result number of the accessory), Alternatively, the winning / RP winning information (consisting of the information of the winning / RP winning combination result number and the information of the identifier for making the test device identify the information of the winning / RP winning combination result number) is transmitted. This is a signal for parallel communication, and is output as a parallel signal from a predetermined output port for parallel communication (appropriately referred to as "test output port PO7").

The symbol stop test signal is output only once in the symbol stop test signal output process described later, which is executed when the start lever operation is accepted (the same signal is output a plurality of times (for example, twice) in succession). You may do so). On the other hand, the operation state test signal is output every time the timer interrupt process is executed in the timer interrupt process described later. Further, the above-mentioned winning information test signal is also output every time the timer interrupt processing is executed, but the winning is in a state where the actual winning information (information of the winning combination result number) is set (supported). The information test signal is output only for a predetermined period after receiving the start lever operation (appropriately referred to as "winning information output period"), and during the other period, the winning information test in a state where the actual winning information is not set. A signal is output (details will be described later).

In the present embodiment, test signals other than the above test signals will not be described in detail, but other test signals include signals for transmitting the RT setting state (appropriately referred to as "RT information test signals", which will be described later. (Explained in the second embodiment), a signal for transmitting the lighting state of various display lamps, a signal for transmitting the rotation state of each reel, a signal for transmitting the payout state of the game medal, and a set value. A signal for transmitting the information of the above can be mentioned. From the test device, a command signal for betting a game medal, a command signal for starting rotation of all reels, a command signal for stopping rotation of each reel, a command signal for changing a set value, etc. Each command signal for executing the game is output, and each control process (similar to the process performed in the mass production specification) for executing the game by the main control means 100 and the sub control means 200 according to each command signal. Processing) is to be executed.

On the other hand, the sub-control means 200 includes a sub-main control means (also referred to as "first sub-control means") 200A that mainly manages (instructs) lamp effect, image effect, and sound effect, and mainly image effect and sound. It is provided with a sub-sub control means (also referred to as a "second sub-control means") 200B that controls (executes) the effect.

The sub-main control means 200A is roughly classified into the effect management means 210 and the sub-main communication control means 230. The effect management means 210 includes a sub-side push order management means 211, a game effect management means 212, a notification effect management means 213, and a lamp effect control means 214, and the sub-main communication control means 230 includes control command receiving means 231 and The effect command transmitting means 232 and the state command receiving means 233 are provided. The above-mentioned means in the sub-main control means 200A are hardware such as the sub-main CPU 71, ROM 72, RAM 73, and electronic circuits arranged on the sub-main control board 70A shown in FIG. 2, and a control program stored in the ROM 72. It is a functional representation of what is composed of software such as.

(Each means constituting the production management means 210)
When the sub-side push order management means 211 is set to any of the game modes 2, 3, 4, and 6, the main control means 100 gives a predetermined combination determination result command and a predetermined push order instruction number. When a command is received, the push order instruction number different from the content of the received push order instruction number can be independently determined. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 21, a combination determination result command (effect group number command) including any information of the effect group numbers 1 and 7 to 12 and a push order instruction including the information of the push order instruction number A0. When the number command is received, it is possible to determine any of the push order instruction numbers A1 to A6 instead of the push order instruction number A0. In addition, when the combination determination result command (the combination determination result number command of the accessory) including the information of the combination determination result number 1 of the accessory and the push order instruction number command including the information of the push order instruction number A0 are received, , It is possible to determine the push order instruction number A10 instead of the push order instruction number A0.

As shown in FIG. 19, the production group number 1 corresponds to the winning / RP combination determination result number 1 which is a normal RP, and the production group numbers 7 to 9 are the combination determination result numbers 17 which are push order cherry RPs. It corresponds to ~ 19, and the production group number 12 corresponds to the combination decision result numbers 20 to 22 which are push order chance RPs. The winning / RP combination determination result numbers are the combination determination result numbers in which the profit obtained by the player's push order does not change (does not become advantageous or disadvantageous). Whether or not to determine another push order instruction number instead of the push order instruction number A0 is left to the judgment of the sub-side push order management means 211 (the main control means 100 may instruct. ). For example, in the game mode 6 (preparation for additional specialization), on the condition that the BB role is not established for several games, the symbol "character" to be aimed at in the game in which the result of the lost role is determined is notified. As an example, the push order instruction number A10 is determined in order to make the push order instruction number A10.

The game effect management means 212 sets the execution time of the image or sound effect (hereinafter referred to as “game effect”) executed by the sub-sub control means 200B mainly for the purpose of improving the interest of the game and the playability. It is configured to manage based on a control command from the main control means 100. The game production includes, for example, continuous production, single-shot production, assist production, and the like.

The continuous effect is an effect that is continuous over a plurality of game periods, and mainly uses the image display device 11 to display an image that becomes a continuous story over a plurality of game periods. Examples include those that display a production image or the like that symbolizes the fact that the AT is in progress. In addition, when performing a continuous effect or a single-shot effect described below, the effect lamps 12, 13a, 13b, 14a, 14b and the decorative lamps 32a, 32b are used, or the speakers 15a, 15b, 44a, 44b are used. You may combine the effects that you have had.

The single-shot effect is an effect that is executed in a single-shot manner when a specific situation occurs in the progress of the game. For example, there is an effect that the image display device 11 displays an image that implies the winning expectation of the game combination when each reel is rotated. In addition, the value of the added AT stock number (for example, a character such as "+1") is set when the AT is won (the number of AT stocks is added) in the above-mentioned AT lottery performed by the main control means 100. An effect displayed on the display screen 11a of the image display device 11 is also given as an example of a one-shot effect.

The assist effect is an effect mainly for assisting the player during the AT setting, and in the present embodiment, the information of the push order instruction number transmitted by the push order instruction number command from the main control means 100 is mainly used. Correspondingly, the push order navigation effect (meaning that the push order navigation described above is performed on the sub-control means side) is performed. This push order navigation effect is a one-shot effect in which the liquid crystal display device 11 is used as a sub-side push order display to display the push order according to the push order instruction number on the display screen 11a to the player. (The replay navigation effect as the above-mentioned replay navigation and the bell navigation effect as the bell navigation may be set, and the production modes of both may be changed). When the push order instruction number is independently determined by the sub control means (sub-side push order management means 211), the push order navigation effect is performed according to the push order instruction number determined by the sub control means.

As a specific mode of the push order navigation effect, for example, when the push order instruction number A2 (corresponding push order “left and right middle”) is determined, the corresponding push order is set as shown in FIG. 18 (B). When the numbers shown are displayed side by side in the order of "1, 3, 2" from the left side and the push order instruction number A8 for the push order game (corresponding push order "middle ??") is determined, FIG. 18 ( As shown in D), a number indicating the first push order to be notified and a "?" Symbol indicating the second and third push orders not to be notified are displayed side by side in the order of "?, 1,?" From the left side. Is given as an example. Further, when the push order instruction number A10 (target symbol "character") is determined, as shown in FIG. 18 (E), a mode of displaying the character information "Aim at the character !!" is also given as an example. (See FIG. 16 for an example of display mode when other push order instruction numbers are determined).

Further, when displaying from the first push order to the third push order, as shown in FIG. 18 (G), when the player operates the first stop switch according to the displayed first push order, the first stop switch is displayed. The display of the first push order is turned off, the display of the second push order is turned off when the player operates the second stop switch according to the displayed second push order, and the player is the third according to the displayed third push order. The display of the third pressing order may be turned off when the stop switch is operated. Further, when the player operates the stop switch in an order different from the displayed push order, the push order navigation effect may be terminated immediately. Further, when displaying the pressing order, the voice "Naka", the voice "Hidari", and the voice "Migi" are output from the speakers 15a, 15b, etc. so as to match the operation timing of each stop switch. You may do so.

The notification effect management means 213 sets the execution time of the image or sound effect (hereinafter referred to as “notification effect”) executed by the sub-sub control means 200B, mainly for the purpose of notifying the player of information about the game. It is configured to manage based on a control command from the main control means 100. Examples of the notification effect include an error notification effect that notifies the occurrence of an error with text information such as "error occurrence", and "image preparation" that an image is being prepared when the power is turned off and restored. Examples include the production of notifying with text information.

The lamp effect control means 214 is configured to control various lighting effects using the effect lamps 12, 13a, 13b, 14a, 14b, the decorative lamps 32a, 32b, and the back lamps 38a to 38d.

(Each means constituting the sub-main communication control means 230)
The control command receiving means 231 is configured to receive a control command from the main control means 100 and store it in a predetermined storage area such as a RAM 73 (for example, a command buffer for the received control command).

Based on the control command from the main control means 100, the effect command transmitting means 232 sub-sub-controls an effect command including various information related to the effect (for example, an effect command including information on a push order instruction number (push order)). It is configured to transmit to means 200B.

The state command receiving means 233 receives a state command (for example, a state command including information that a reception error of an effect command has occurred) from the sub-sub control means 200B, and receives a predetermined storage area such as a RAM 73 (for example, receiving). It is configured to be stored in the command buffer for the state command.

The sub-sub control means 200B is roughly classified into the effect execution control means 250 and the sub-sub communication control means 270 with respect to the sub-main control means 200A configured as described above. The effect execution control means 250 includes a game effect execution control means 251 and a notification effect execution control means 252, and the sub-sub communication control means 270 includes an effect command receiving means 271 and a state command transmitting means 272. The above-mentioned means in the sub-sub control means 200B are hardware such as the sub-sub CPU 75, ROM 76, RAM 77, and electronic circuits arranged on the sub-sub control board 70B shown in FIG. 2, and software such as a control program stored in the ROM 76. It is a functional representation of what is composed of hardware.

(Each means constituting the effect execution control means 250)
The game effect execution control means 251 is configured to control the image display device 11, the speakers 15a, 15b, and the like based on the effect command from the sub-main control means 200A to execute the game effect.

The notification effect execution control means 252 is configured to control the image display device 11, the speakers 15a, 15b, etc. based on the effect command from the sub-main control means 200A, and execute the notification effect.

(Each means constituting the sub-sub communication control means 270)
The effect command receiving means 271 is configured to receive an effect command from the sub-main control means 200A and store it in a predetermined storage area such as a RAM 77 (for example, a command buffer for the received effect command).

The state command transmitting means 272 is configured to transmit the state command to the sub-main control means 200A.

The transmission of the control command from the control command transmission means 151, the transmission of the effect command from the effect command transmission means 232, and the transmission of the state command from the state command transmission means 272 are all performed by the serial communication method (parallel). It may be done by the communication method). Further, each of the transmission means 151, 232, and 272 has the same configuration, and performs processing such as a command buffer (CB) as a storage area for temporarily storing a command to be transmitted, and writing and reading of a command to be transmitted. It is provided with a command processing unit for performing commands and a command transmitting unit for transmitting commands by serial communication.

The CB has a plurality of storage areas distinguished by each address, and is configured to be able to store 1 byte of command data in each storage area. The command processing unit generates command data to be transmitted, writes it in the address area indicated by the CB write pointer, reads previously written command data from the address area indicated by the CB read pointer, and commands it. It is configured to write to the TDR (transmission data register) of the transmission unit. The command transmission unit is configured to move the command data written in the TDR to a TSR (transmission shift register), serially convert the command data there, and transmit the command data.

One command in this embodiment usually has a 2-byte structure (the checksum has a 1-byte structure). Further, the communication method is a pace synchronous type (asynchronous type) and has a 1-bit stop bit and a 1-bit parity bit (even parity) (the communication method and command configuration can be changed as appropriate).

<Notification timing of push order>
Next, the timing of push order notification (push order navigation) in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 22 and 23. As described above, in the slot machine 1, the push order to be notified is mainly determined by the main control means 100 (some are also determined by the sub control means 200), and the push order is notified by the main control means and the sub control means. It is designed to be done in both. FIG. 22 shows the timing of basic push order notification. In addition, "main" and "sub" in the figure and in the following description mean a main control means and a sub control means, respectively.

As shown in FIG. 22, when the start lever is operated, the game mode command (one of the game modes 1 to 7) and the RT command (non-RT, any of RT 1 to 5) are changed from the main to the sub. (RT state command), push order instruction number command (command of push order instruction number A1 to A9 when notifying push order, command of push order instruction number A0 when not notifying), production group A number command (a command of any of the effect group numbers 0 to 21), a role determination result number command of the accessory (command of the accessory combination determination result number 0 or 1), and the like are transmitted.

The above-mentioned game mode command, RT command, and push order instruction number command are within the range indicated by both arrow lines in the figure (the push order instruction number command is notified of the push order by the main push order indicator. In the case of (later), the transmission order is arbitrary, but these commands transmit the effect group number command and the role determination result number command of the accessory (as mentioned above, both are collectively referred to as the combination determination result command). It is transmitted before the reel reaches the constant speed rotation (in the present embodiment, the combination determination result command is transmitted so that the reel is surely transmitted before reaching the constant speed rotation). Is sent before the start of rotation.).

In addition, the first stop reception command, the second stop reception command, and the third stop reception command are transmitted from the main to the sub, triggered by the reception of the first stop operation, the second stop operation, and the third stop operation, respectively. Then, the first stop command, the second stop command, and the third stop command are transmitted from the main to the sub, triggered by the first stop, the second stop, and the third stop, respectively. Further, after the stop symbol is determined, the all stop command is transmitted from the main to the sub.

In the case of notifying the push order, in the main, for example, the push order notification is started before the push order instruction number command is transmitted (see FIG. 23 (A)), and after the all-round body stop command is transmitted, the above-mentioned is performed. The push order notification is completed before the payout number command is transmitted (see FIG. 22). On the other hand, in the sub, for example, after receiving the push order instruction number command, the push order notification is started until the reel reaches a constant speed rotation (see FIG. 23 (A)), and the third stop reception command is issued. After receiving the command, the push order notification is terminated before the third stop command is received (see FIG. 22). As described above, in the present embodiment, the push order notification period by the main is set to be longer than the push order notification period by the sub. By starting the push order notification by the main first, even if the push order number transmitted to the sub is not correctly transmitted and the push order notification by the sub is incorrect, the player is correct by the push order notification by the main. Since the push order can be known, it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged.

Note that the push order notification by the sub is designed to end in the middle when the push order by the player is different from the notified push order (it may not end). That is, when the push order of the second stop operation is different from the notification push order, the push order notification is terminated between the time when the second stop reception command is received and the time when the second stop command is received. If the push order of the one-stop operation is different from the notification push order, the push order notification ends after the first stop reception command is received and before the first stop command is received. By ending in the middle, it is also possible to perform an effect of notifying that the push order is different after that. In the present embodiment, the push order notification by the main does not end in the middle even if the push order by the player is different from the notified push order (by doing so, the player carefully confirms the notified push order. Can be done), but may be terminated. In this case, it is preferable to end the push order notification by the main after or at the same time as the push order notification by the sub is completed. After the push order notification by the main is completed, the push order notification by the sub may be ended. Further, the start timing of the push order notification by the main can be arbitrarily set as long as it is between the time when the start lever is operated and the time when the reel rotates at a constant speed.

In the present embodiment, the push order notification by the main is basically started by operating the start lever, but for example, the reel has started to rotate and the reel has reached a constant speed rotation. As an opportunity, the push order notification can be started. In addition, if the player does not notify the first push order but notifies the second and third push orders when the player answers correctly in the first push order, the first stop operation is accepted. May be used as an opportunity to start push order notification. In addition, when it is determined in the middle that the push order by the main player is different from the push order notified by the player, another push order is newly determined and the push order is switched to the notification. Alternatively, when the push order notification by the main is switched, the push order notification by the sub may also be switched.

As an example of changing the start timing of the push order notification, as shown in FIG. 23 (B), the push order notification by the main and the push order notification by the sub may be started at the same time. Further, as another example of changing the start timing of the push order notification, as shown in FIG. 23C, the push order notification by the sub may be started earlier than the push order notification by the main. In the present embodiment, as described above, when the push order instruction number A0 (the push order is not notified) is determined on the main side, the push order instruction number may be determined independently on the sub side. .. In that case, the push order notification by the main is not performed, and only the push order notification by the sub is executed. However, the start timing and end timing of the push order notification by the sub may be the same as the above-mentioned contents. can.

<Circuit configuration of main control board (difference between test specifications and mass production specifications)>
Next, there are cases where the slot machine 1 is manufactured as test specifications (specifications for taking a predetermined test) and cases where it is manufactured as mass production specifications (specifications for setting up a game store). Differences in the circuit configuration of the main control board will be described. The main IC shown in FIG. 24 is a one-chip microcomputer equipped with predetermined circuit components (main CPU 61, ROM 62, RAM 63, interface circuit, etc.) arranged on the main control board 60 (see FIG. 2) described above. , Terminals D0 to D7 for parallel signal output, terminals TX0 to TX3 for serial signals (there are terminals dedicated to output and terminals that can switch input / output), terminals PI0 to PI7 for parallel signal input, etc. (Although it has various other terminals, only some of them are shown in the figure).

Inside the main IC, output ports for a plurality of parallel signals (two of which are set as the test output ports PO7 and PO8 described above) are provided, and signal data from each output port can be obtained. , It is designed to be output from the terminals D0 to D7. Further, inside the main IC, output ports for a plurality of serial signals (one of which is set as the test output port SO0 described above) are provided, and a test signal from the test output port SO0 is provided. Is output from the terminal XO0 (in this embodiment, it is a terminal dedicated to output, but it may be a terminal capable of input / output switching). Further, inside the main IC, input ports for a plurality of parallel signals are provided, and signal data is input to each input port via the terminals PI0 to PI7.

Further, the test ICs 1 and IC 2 and the connectors CN1 and CN2 shown in FIG. 24 are mounted in the case of the test specifications, but are not mounted in the case of the mass production specifications. In the case of the test specifications, the input terminals D0 to D7 of the test ICs 1 and IC2 are connected to the terminals D0 to D7 of the main IC, and the output terminals Q0 to Q7 of the test IC1 and each of the test IC2. The output terminals Q0 to Q7 are connected to the signal input units 1 to 8 and 9 to 10 of the connector CN1, respectively. Further, the signal input unit 2 of the connector CN2 is connected to the terminal TX0 of the main IC. Then, the test signals (the above-mentioned operating state test signal and the winning information test signal) output from the test output ports PO7 and PO8 pass through the test ICs 1 and IC 2, the connector CN1 and a predetermined relay device (not shown). Then, it is transmitted to a test device (not shown). Further, the test signal (the above-mentioned symbol stop test signal) output from the test output port SO0 is transmitted to the test device via the connector CN2 and the relay device.

Further, the resistor R1 (for example, a resistance value of 4.7 kΩ) shown in FIG. 24 is mounted between the power supply voltage VCS (for example, the voltage value of 12.5 V) and the terminal PI0 in the case of the test specification (in the case of the mass production specification). Is a pull-up resistor (not mounted), and the resistor R2 (for example, resistance value 0 kΩ) is mounted between the reference potential (0V) and the terminal PI0 in the case of mass production specifications (not mounted in the case of test specifications). ) It is a pull-down resistor. In this way, by changing the mounting resistance (and mounting position) between the test specifications and the mass production specifications, the potential of the terminal PI0 becomes high level (hereinafter referred to as "H level") in the case of the test specifications. In the case of mass production specifications, it is configured to be at a low level (hereinafter referred to as "L level"). In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is determined whether the potential of the terminal PI0 is H level or L level, and based on the determination result, if it is H level, it is a test specification, and if it is L level, it is a mass production specification. It is designed to be identified as.

The resistance value of the resistor R2 can be set to an arbitrary value (for example, a resistance value of 4.7 kΩ) as long as the potential of the terminal PI0 becomes the L level when mounted. However, when considering that there is a risk of fraudulent acts such as short-circuiting the power supply VCS and terminal PI0 in order to misidentify that it is a test specification even though it is actually a mass production specification. , It is preferable to set the resistance value of the resistor R2 to a value as low as possible. If the resistance value of the resistor R2 is low, when the power supply VCS and the terminal PI0 are short-circuited, the current value flowing in the main IC becomes excessive and the main CPU 61 stops, so that the game is prevented from being performed illegally. This is because it is possible to do so. Contrary to the above, in the case of mass production specifications, the resistor R1 is mounted between the power supply voltage VCS and the terminal PI0, and in the case of the test specifications, the resistor R2 is mounted between the reference potential and the terminal PI0. You may do so. In this case, if the potential of the terminal PI0 is L level, it may be identified as a test specification, and if it is H level, it may be identified as a mass production specification.

Further, instead of changing the mounted resistors R1 and R2 between the test specifications and the mass-produced specifications, as shown in the modified example M1 shown in FIG. 25 (A), the resistors are used regardless of the specifications. R1 and R2 are left mounted together, and the open / closed state of the switch provided between the terminal PI0 and the resistor R2 is switched between the test specification and the mass production specification to identify which specification is used. It may be configured to do so. Specifically, the above switch is in the open state in the case of the test specification (at this time, the terminal PI0 is in the pulled-up state and the potential is at the H level), and in the case of the mass production specification, it is in the closed state (at this time, the terminal PI0 is in the closed state). When the voltage dividing circuit with resistors R1 and R2 is connected and the potential is L level), the potential of the terminal PI0 is the test specification when it is H level, and the mass production specification when it is L level. May be identified as. Alternatively, conversely, the above switch is closed (at this time, the potential of terminal PI0 is L level) in the case of test specifications, and in the open state (at this time, the potential of terminal PI0 is H level) in the case of mass production specifications. If the potential of the terminal PI0 is L level, it may be identified as a test specification, and if it is H level, it may be identified as a mass production specification. When adopting such a modification example M1, a configuration that regulates the operation of the switch (for example, a thickness is provided at a position corresponding to the switch on the board case) so that the switch cannot be operated illegally. It is preferable to provide the switch so that it cannot be opened when it is housed in the board case).

Further, as the circuit configuration connected to the terminal PI0, the aspect of the modified example M2 shown in FIG. 25B may be adopted. In this modification M2, four resistors R4 (for example, resistance value 13 kΩ), R5 (for example, resistance value 0 kΩ), R6 (for example, resistance value 62 kΩ), and R7 (for example, resistance value 39 kΩ) arranged as shown in the drawing. ) Is connected to the terminal PI0. Of these four resistors, resistors R4, R6, and R7 are left mounted in both test specifications and mass production specifications, and resistor R5 is mounted in the case of test specifications and is mass-produced. In the case of (that is, the voltage dividing circuit connected to the terminal PI0 is switched between the test specification and the mass production specification). In this example, the potential of the terminal PI0 is L level in the case of the test specification in which the resistor R5 is mounted, and is the H level in the case of the mass production specification in which the resistor R5 is not mounted. If it is a level, it is identified as a test specification, and if it is an H level, it is identified as a mass production specification. Alternatively, on the contrary, the resistor R5 is not mounted in the case of the test specification, but is mounted in the case of the mass production specification, and when the potential of the terminal PI0 is the H level, the test specification, L. If it is a level, it may be identified as a mass production specification.

In this modification M2, the potential of terminal PI0 (= potential at point B in the figure) can be calculated as follows.
・ In the case of a voltage divider circuit that mounts a resistor R5, the potential at point A = ((R5 (R6 + R7) / (R5 + R6 + R7)) / (R4 + ((R5 (R6 + R7))) / (R5 + R6) + R7))) × 12.5 = 0 (V)
Potential at point B = Potential at point A = 0 (V)
-In the case of a voltage divider circuit that does not mount a resistor R5 Potential at point A = ((R6 + R7) / (R4 + R6 + R7)) x 12.5 ≒ 11 (V)
Potential at point B = (R7 / (R4 + R6 + R7)) × 12.5 ≒ 4.3 (V))

Further, as the circuit configuration connected to the terminal PI0, the aspect of the modified example M3 shown in FIG. 25C may be adopted. In this modification M3, a voltage divider circuit having three resistors R8 (for example, resistance value 1.5 kΩ), R9 (for example, resistance value 1 kΩ), and R10 (for example, resistance value 0 kΩ) arranged as shown in the drawing is provided. Connect to terminal PI0. Of these three resistors, the resistors R8 and R9 are left mounted in both the test specifications and the mass production specifications, and the resistor R10 is mounted in the case of the test specifications and in the case of the mass production specifications. (That is, the voltage divider circuit connected to the terminal PI0 is switched between the test specification and the mass production specification). In this example, the potential of the terminal PI0 is L level in the case of the test specification in which the resistor R10 is mounted, and is the H level in the case of the mass production specification in which the resistor R10 is not mounted. Therefore, the potential of the terminal PI0 is L. If it is a level, it is identified as a test specification, and if it is an H level, it is identified as a mass production specification. Alternatively, on the contrary, the resistor R10 is not mounted in the case of the test specification, but is mounted in the case of the mass production specification, and when the potential of the terminal PI0 is the H level, the test specification, L. If it is a level, it may be identified as a mass production specification.

In this modification M3, the potential of terminal PI0 (= potential at point C in the figure) can be calculated as follows.
・ In the case of a voltage divider circuit that mounts a resistor R10, the potential at point C = ((R9 ・ R10) / (R9 + R10)) / (R8 + (R9 ・ R10) / (R9 + R10))) × 12.5 = 0 ( V)
-In the case of a voltage divider circuit that does not mount the resistor R10, the potential at point C = (R9 / (R8 + R9)) x 12.5 = 5 (V)

In the case of a configuration in which a pull-up resistor or a pull-down resistor is connected to the terminal PI0, it is necessary to replace the resistor mounted on the board depending on whether it is a test specification or a mass production specification. On the other hand, in the case of the modified examples M2 and M3, it is only necessary not to mount a part of the plurality of resistors mounted in the test specifications in the mass production specifications, so that the manufacturing process is simplified. There is an advantage such as getting. Of course, in the case of modification examples M2 and M3, the resistor mounted on the board is configured to be replaced depending on whether it is a test specification or a mass production specification, thereby changing the voltage dividing circuit connected to the terminal PI0. It may be. Further, as the specific configuration of the voltage dividing circuit, any embodiment can be adopted.

<Information storage area>
Next, the information storage area in the main control means of the present embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 26, a first PRG area and a second PRG area are set in the ROM (ROM 62 in FIG. 2) (PRG is an abbreviation for a program). In the first PRG area, a control program related to the progress of a normal game (a program for determining a combination or reel control, etc.) and data used in the control program (a combination lottery table, a symbol stop table, etc.) are stored. The area. The second PRG area includes a control program for preventing fraudulent activity, a control program for testing (a program for transmitting a test signal, etc.), and data used in the control program (a stop reception designation table, etc. described later). Is the area where is stored. Of course, even if it is a control program for preventing fraudulent activity or a control program for testing, there is no problem in storing these in the first PRG area.

On the other hand, in the RAM (RAM 63 in FIG. 2), a first PRG area corresponding area and a second PRG area corresponding area are set. The first PRG area corresponding area is a storage area mainly used by the control program stored in the first PRG area, and the second PRG area corresponding area is mainly used by the control program stored in the second PRG area. Storage area. The control program stored in the first PRG area is permitted to write (including change) and read data to the area corresponding to the first PRG area, but to write data to the area corresponding to the second PRG area. Is not allowed and only read is allowed. Similarly, the control program stored in the second PRG area is permitted to write and read data to the area corresponding to the second PRG area, but is permitted to write data to the area corresponding to the first PRG area. Only read is allowed without it. When shifting from the processing by the control program stored in the first PRG area to the processing by the control program stored in the second PRG area, interrupts are prohibited and stored in the first PRG area in the timer interrupt processing. (Except when shifting from the processing by the control program to the processing by the control program stored in the second PRG area), the information stored in each register before the migration is protected (saved). Further, when returning from the processing by the control program stored in the second PRG area to the processing by the control program stored in the first PRG area, an interrupt is permitted and (stored in the second PRG area in the timer interrupt processing). (Except when shifting from the processing by the control program to the processing by the control program stored in the first PRG area), the information of each protected register is restored.

In the present embodiment, each storage area (address area) shown in FIG. 27 is set in the area corresponding to the first PRG area. The operating state flag storage area (address number "F01CH" (the "H" at the end is a hexadecimal number) in the RAM) shown in the figure (A) corresponds to the above-mentioned operating state flag. , It is set as an area for storing each information of whether or not it is in the re-game operating state, whether or not it is in the BB operating state, and whether or not it is in the RB operating state. Bit 0 of this operation state flag storage area corresponds to the above-mentioned re-game operation state flag. Then, storing the information of "1" in this bit 0 corresponds to setting (ON) the above-mentioned re-game operation state flag, and storing the information of "0" sets the re-game operation state flag. Corresponds to clearing (OFF). Further, bit 3 of the operating state flag storage area corresponds to the above-mentioned BB operating state flag. Then, storing the information of "1" in the bit 3 corresponds to setting (ON) the above-mentioned BB operating state flag, and storing the information of "0" clears the BB operating state flag (the BB operating state flag is cleared (ON). It corresponds to turning off). Further, bit 4 of the operating state flag storage area corresponds to the RB operating state flag described above. Then, storing the information of "1" in the bit 4 corresponds to setting (ON) the above-mentioned RB operating state flag, and storing the information of "0" clears the RB operating state flag (the RB operating state flag is cleared (ON). It corresponds to turning off). In the present embodiment, the bits 7 to 5, 2 and 1 of the operating state flag storage area are unused areas, and the information of "0" is always stored (cleared state).

The operation symbol display flag storage area (address number “F043H” in the RAM) shown in FIG. 27 (B) corresponds to the above-mentioned operation symbol display flag, and whether or not the re-game operation symbol is displayed. Or, it is set as an area for storing each information of whether or not the BB operation symbol is displayed. Bit 0 of this operation symbol display flag storage area corresponds to the above-mentioned re-game operation symbol display flag. Then, storing the information of "1" in this bit 0 corresponds to setting (ON) the re-game operation symbol display flag, and storing the information of "0" sets the re-game operation symbol display flag. Corresponds to clearing (OFF). Further, the bit 3 of the operation symbol display flag storage area corresponds to the above-mentioned BB operation symbol display flag. Then, storing the information of "1" in the bit 3 corresponds to setting (ON) the BB operation symbol display flag, and storing the information of "0" clears the BB operation symbol display flag (the BB operation symbol display flag is cleared (ON). It corresponds to turning off). In the present embodiment, the bits 7 to 4, 2, and 1 of the operating state flag storage area are unused areas, and the information of "0" is always stored (cleared state).

The winning / RP combination determination result number storage area (referred to as the address number “F048H” in the RAM) shown in FIG. 27 (C) is an area in which the above-mentioned information on the winning / RP combination determination result number is stored. .. Bits 5 to 0 of the winning / RP combination determination result number storage area correspond to the above-mentioned winning / RP combination determination result flag. Then, in these bits 5 to 0, the numerical data of the winning / RP winning combination result number (binary numerical data. For example, if the winning combination result number 17 is selected, "17" = "010001B". (B means a binary number)) is equivalent to setting (ON) the winning / RP combination determination result number flag, and storing the information of "0" in all bits 5 to 0. Is equivalent to clearing (OFF) the winning / RP combination determination result number flag. In the present embodiment, the bits 7 and 6 of the winning / RP combination determination result number storage area are unused areas, and the information of "0" is always stored (cleared state).

The accessory / combination determination result number storage area (referred to as the address number “F049H” in the RAM) shown in FIG. 27 (D) is an area in which the information of the above-mentioned accessory / combination determination result number is stored. Bit 0 of the accessory combination determination result number storage area corresponds to the above-mentioned accessory combination determination result flag. Then, storing the information of "1" in this bit 0 corresponds to setting (ON) the character role determination result number flag, and storing the information of "0" is the character role determination result. Corresponds to clearing (OFF) the number flag. In the present embodiment, the bits 7-1 of the accessory / combination determination result number storage area are unused areas, and the information of "0" is always stored (cleared state).

The push order instruction number storage area (referred to as the address number “F0B8H” in the RAM) shown in FIG. 27 (E) is an area in which the information of the selected push order instruction numbers A0 to A9 is stored. In the push order instruction number storage area, the numerical data of the push order instruction numbers A to A9 (binary numerical data. For example, in the case of the push order instruction number A3, "3" = "0011B"" in bits 3 to 0. If the push order instruction number A6, "6" = "0110B") is stored, which corresponds to storing the information of the push order instruction number. In the case of the push order instruction number A0, the numerical data "0" = "0000B" is stored in the bits 3 to 0, which is the same as the state in which the bits 3 to 0 are cleared. Since the numerical data stored in the push order instruction number storage area is cleared at the end of the game, in the present embodiment, when the push order instruction number A0 is selected (push order instruction numbers A1 to A9). Is not selected), the process of storing the numerical data "0" is not performed (may be performed). Further, in the present embodiment, the bits 7 to 4 of the push order instruction number storage area are unused areas, and the information of "0" is always stored (cleared state).

Although not particularly shown, in order to correspond to the case where the push order instruction numbers A7 to A9 are selected, in addition to the push order instruction number storage area, the information of the push order instruction numbers A1 to A6 is stored. A storage area (hereinafter referred to as a “pushing order determination storage area”) is set. The push order instruction numbers A7 to A9 are won in the above-mentioned push order guessing game performed when any of the combination determination result numbers 23 to 28 is selected by the combination determination process when the game mode 3 is set. However, if any of the combination determination result numbers 23 to 28 is selected regardless of whether or not the push order guessing game is won, any of the push order instruction numbers A1 to A6 is selected. Is to be elected first. Therefore, two pushes, a normal push order instruction number (any of the push order instruction numbers A1 to A6) and a push order instruction number for the push order guessing game (any of the push order instruction numbers A7 to A9). A state in which the forward instruction number is selected occurs.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the normal push order instruction number (any of A1 to A6) can be stored not only in the above-mentioned push order instruction number storage area but also in the push order hit determination storage area. , When the push order instruction number (any of A7 to A9) for the push order guessing game is selected, the information of the normal push order instruction number stored in the push order instruction number storage area before that. Is rewritten to the information of the push order instruction number for the push order guess game, while the information of the normal push order instruction number stored in the push order determination storage area is retained as it is. Then, the information of the push order instruction number stored in the push order instruction number storage area is used when notifying the push order (in particular, the push order instruction number for the push order guess game is when notifying the push order in the push order guess game). ), And the information of the push order instruction number stored in the push order hit determination storage area is used when judging whether or not the correct answer is given to the push order hit game. As for the information storage timing, when the information of the normal push order instruction number is stored in the push order instruction number storage area, the same information is also stored in the push order guess determination storage area. Can be done. On the other hand, when a normal push order instruction number is selected, the information is stored only in the push order instruction number storage area, and when the push order instruction number for the push order guessing game is selected, the push order instruction number is selected. The information of the normal push order instruction number stored in the storage area is moved to the storage area for push order determination, and the information of the push order instruction number for the push order guess game is stored in the push order instruction number storage area. You may.

The winning information output period timer storage area (referred to as the address number “F030H” in the RAM) shown in FIG. 27 (F) is the winning information test signal (actual winning) described above when the slot machine 1 has test specifications. Of the timer value of the timer (referred to as "winning information output period timer") set to identify whether or not it is the period for outputting the information (the one in which the information is set) (the above-mentioned winning information output period). This is the area where information is stored. In the winning information output period timer storage area, the timer value (binary number value) information (information of "25" at the time of timer setting is stored in bits 4 to 0, and the timer allocation described later is performed. Each time the inclusion process is executed, the values "24" to "0" obtained by sequentially subtracting "1") are stored. In the present embodiment, the bits 7 to 5 of the winning information output period timer storage area are unused areas, and the information of "0" is always stored (cleared state). Further, the winning information output period corresponds to a period (= 2,235ms × 24 = 53.64ms) in which the timer interrupt processing described later is executed 24 times.

When the slot machine 1 is a test specification, the information of the winning / RP winning combination result number stored in the above-mentioned winning / RP combination determination result number storage area is the information of the winning / RP combination determination result number in the test device. The information of the identifier (appropriately referred to as "winning / RP identifier") for identifying the existence is added and configured as the above-mentioned winning / RP winning information, and the above-mentioned winning information test is performed from the above-mentioned test output port PO7. It is output to the test equipment as a signal. Specifically, the winning / RP winning information consists of 8-bit data, the upper 2 bits are the above-mentioned winning / RP identifier data, and the lower 6 bits are the winning / RP combination result number data. NS. When the winning / RP winning information is output as the winning information test signal, as shown in FIG. 28 (A), each bit D7 to D0 of the test output port PO7 (terminal D7 of the main IC shown in FIG. 24). Of the bits D5 to D0 (corresponding to each of ~ D0), the winning / RP combination determination result number data (“0”) stored in the bits 5 to 0 of the winning / RP combination determination result number storage area is stored in the bits D5 to D0. (Data from any of up to "51") is set, and the winning / RP identifier data (data of "0" in bit D7 and "1" in bit D6) is set in bits D7 and D6. ..

Similarly, the information of the role determination result number of the accessory stored in the above-mentioned accessory combination determination result number storage area is an identifier (appropriately) for causing the test apparatus to identify that it is the information of the role determination result number of the accessory. Information of (referred to as "identifier of the accessory") is added to be configured as the above-mentioned accessory winning information, and the winning information test signal is output to the test apparatus from the test output port PO7. Specifically, the accessory winning information is composed of 8-bit data, the upper 2 bits are the data of the identifier of the accessory, and the lower 6 bits are the data of the outcome determination result number of the accessory. Then, when the accessory winning information is output as the winning information test signal, as shown in FIG. 28 (B), among the bits D7 to D0 of the test output port PO7, the above-mentioned bits D5 to D0 are described. The data of bits 5 to 0 of the accessory combination determination result number storage area is set (bit D0 is the data of the accessory combination determination result number ("1" or "0"), and the bits D5 to D1 are "0". (Data is set), and the data of the identifier of the accessory (data of "1" in bit D7 and "0" in bit D6) are set in bits D7 and D6.

Further, when the slot machine 1 has a test specification, whether or not it is in the re-game operation state stored in the above-mentioned operation state flag storage area (whether the above-mentioned re-game operation state flag is ON or OFF) and the BB operation state. (Whether the above-mentioned BB operating state flag is ON or OFF) and whether or not it is in the RB operating state (whether the above-mentioned RB operating state flag is ON or OFF) (appropriately "operating state flag" Information (referred to as "information") is output to the test apparatus as the above-mentioned operating state test signal from the test output port PO8 described above. Specifically, the operation state flag information consists of 8-bit data, and the lowest bit is ON / OFF data (“1” or “0”) of the re-game operation state flag, from the lower level. The 4th bit is the ON / OFF data ("1" or "0") of the BB operating state flag, and the 5th bit is the ON / OFF data ("1" or "0") of the RB operating state flag. ). Then, when the operating state flag information is output as the operating state test signal, as shown in FIG. 28C, the bits of the operating state flag storage area are set for each of the bits D7 to D0 of the test output port PO8. Data from 7 to 0 is set (bit D4 is ON / OFF data of the RB operation state flag, bit D3 is ON / OFF data of the BB operation state flag, and bit D0 is the re-game operation state flag. ON / OFF data, "0" data is set in bits D7 to D5, D2, D1).

As described above, in the present embodiment, the winning / RP winning information is added to the information of the winning / RP winning / winning result number stored in the winning / RP winning / winning result number storage area. It is configured, and it is output to the test device as a winning information test signal from the test output port PO7 (the same applies to the winning information for the winning item), but the area for storing the winning / RP winning information and the winning information for the winning item Is not provided in particular. This is effective in that it is possible to suppress an increase in the storage area used when the storage capacity of the RAM is small. On the other hand, as a modification example, an area for storing winning / RP winning information and accessory winning information may be provided in the RAM. FIG. 29 (A) shows an example in which the winning / RP winning information storage area (referred to as the address number “F04CH” in the RAM) for storing the winning / RP winning information is set in the RAM, FIG. 29 (B). Shows an example in which a character winning information storage area (referred to as an address number “F04DH” in the RAM) for storing the character winning information is set in the RAM.

Further, in the present embodiment, the area is set when the stop reception designation table T1 shown in FIG. 30A and the stop reception designation table T2 shown in FIG. 30B are stored in the second PRG area of the ROM. Has been done. As shown in FIG. 30, the stop reception designation table T1 has 24 consecutive address areas (address numbers “** 00H” to “** 27H” (* in the ROM) in the second PRG area of the ROM. (Any numerical value from 0H to "FH")), the stop reception designation table T2 has four consecutive address areas (address numbers "** in ROM" in the second PRG area of ROM). It is stored in "30H" to "** 33H").

The stop reception designation table T1 outputs the above-mentioned symbol stop test signal (signal for transmitting information on the optimum push order and push position) to the test device in a state where the BB is not in the operating state (BB is not operating). The table referenced for. In this stop reception designation table T1, the four storage areas from the address numbers "** 00H" to "** 03H" have the optimum push order and push position corresponding to the push order instruction number A0 (push order unknown). Information is stored. Specifically, in the storage area of the address number "** 00H", the data of "0" corresponding to the numerical value of the push order instruction number A0 (optimal push order) is stored, and the data of the address number "** 01H" is stored. The storage area stores data on the left reel stop reception position (optimal push position on the left reel). Similarly, the data of the middle reel stop reception position (optimal push position in the middle reel) is stored in the storage area of the address number "** 02H", and the right reel stop is stored in the storage area of the address number "** 03H". The data of the reception position (optimal push position on the right reel) is stored. The data of the left reel stop reception position is the data of the symbol number (“3” in the present embodiment) on the left reel. This is stopped when the symbol of symbol number 3 on the left reel is in a predetermined position (the upper position in the display window W) when the push order instruction number A0 is selected while the BB is not operating. It means that it is optimal to perform the operation (the probability that the game combination is established is the highest) (the same applies to the data of the middle reel stop reception position and the data of the right reel stop reception position).

Further, in the four storage areas (address numbers "** 04H" to "** 07H") following the four storage areas corresponding to the push order instruction number A0, the push order instruction number A1 ("left middle right") Information on the optimum push order and push position corresponding to is stored, and the push order instruction number A2 (“left and right middle”) is stored in the following four storage areas (address numbers “** 08H” to “** 0BH”). In the stop reception designation table T1, the information of the optimum push order and the push position corresponding to each of the push order instruction numbers A to A9 is stored so that the information of the optimum push order and the push position corresponding to the above is stored. It is stored in each of four consecutive storage areas. The stored data "127" in the stop reception designation table T1 means that the optimum push position is an arbitrary position (there is no difference in advantage or disadvantage depending on the push position).

On the other hand, the stop reception designation table T2 is a table referred to for outputting the symbol stop test signal to the test apparatus during BB operation. In this stop reception designation table T2, the four storage areas from the address numbers "** 30H" to "** 33H" have the optimum push order and push position corresponding to the push order instruction number A0 (push order unknown). Information is stored. Specifically, in the storage area of the address number "** 30H", the data of "0" corresponding to the numerical value of the push order instruction number A0 is stored, and the address numbers "** 31H" to "** 33H" are stored. Data of the left reel stop reception position, the middle reel stop reception position, and the right reel stop reception position (all "127") are stored in the storage areas up to.

<Test signal output timing>
Next, the output timing of the test signal described above will be described. As abbreviated above, the winning information test signal is executed in the timer interrupt processing described later, which is executed at predetermined fixed time (for example, 2.235 milliseconds). Although it is output every time, the winning information test signal in the state where the actual winning information is set is output only during the above-mentioned winning information output period. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 31 (A), the above-mentioned winning information output period timer is set for the accessory winning information, and the timer value is only during the period from "24" to "13". In each timer interrupt process executed in the above, the timer is set in the test output port PO7 and output to the test apparatus as a winning information test signal 12 times in total. On the other hand, the winning / RP winning information is set in the test output port PO7 only during the period when the timer value of the winning information output period timer is from "12" to "1" in each timer interrupt process executed during that period. Similarly, it is output to the test apparatus as a winning information test signal 12 times in total. That is, the winning information output period is the period in which the timer value of the winning information output period timer is from "24" to "1", and the winning information in the other period is the state in which the actual winning information is not set. A test signal (for example, a signal of "00000000B") is output.

The winning information output period timer must be secured at the minimum game time (from the start of rotation of the reel in one game to the start of rotation of the reel in the next game) in the reel rotation start preparation process described later. It is set after confirming that the required time (for example, 4.1 seconds) has passed. Therefore, in one winning information output period, from the time when the winning information test signal in which the winning information is set is first output, in the next winning information output period, the winning information in which the winning information is set is set. The time until the test signal is first output is naturally equal to or longer than the minimum game time. Therefore, in the test device, it is possible to confirm that the minimum game time is secured by checking at what timing the winning information test signal in which the accessory winning information is set is started to be output. Become. Therefore, it is not necessary to output another signal indicating that the minimum game time is secured to the test device (this makes it possible to reduce the burden on the control process).

Further, the operation state test signal is also output every time the timer interrupt process is executed, like the winning information test signal, but the replay operation state flag, BB, which is set in the operation state test signal. The operating state flag and the RB operating state flag are turned on and off at the following timings. That is, as shown in FIG. 31 (B), the re-game operation state flag is set from OFF to ON in the game start process described later in the game after the re-game operation symbol is displayed, and at the end of the game (described later). It is turned off in the game end check process). On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 31 (C), the BB operation state flag is set from OFF to ON in the game start process in the game after the BB operation symbol is displayed, and at the same time, the RB operation state flag is also changed from OFF to ON. Set.

The BB operating state flag once set to ON is continuously turned ON until the end condition of the BB game (payment of more than 450 game medals) is satisfied. On the other hand, the RB operating state flag is set to ON together with the BB operating state flag, and then is once switched to OFF and set to ON again every two games (every time the end condition of the RB game is satisfied). .. The waiting time (freeze) at the end of RB operation, which is abbreviated above, is set between the time when the RB operation state flag is switched to OFF and the time when it is set to ON again. In the form, it is set as a period (= 2.235 ms × 5 ≒ 11 ms) in which the timer interrupt process described later is executed five times. That is, within the waiting time at the end of RB operation, the BB operation state flag is set to ON, the RB operation state flag is set to OFF, and in each timer interrupt process executed during that time, the above-mentioned operation state flag is set. The operating state test signal carrying the information is output from the test output port PO8 five times in total. On the other hand, during that time, the game progress control process described later is not executed, and the game operation is not accepted.

The waiting time at the end of the RB operation is an arbitrary time for the test device to identify that the RB game is continuously (intermittently) operating while being temporarily inactive during the BB operation. Can be set to. However, the waiting time at the end of RB operation is set even in the case of mass production specifications (it may not be set in the case of mass production specifications), and the freeze during the waiting time at the end of RB operation is It is different from the general freeze that is set to be recognized by the player in order to obtain the effect on the production, so it is a short time that the player does not feel uncomfortable (cannot be recognized as being frozen). (For example, it is preferable to set it to 2.235 × 2 to 25 ≒ 4.5 to 56 ms). The above-mentioned waiting time at the end of RB operation (≈11 ms) is a short time in which the player does not feel uncomfortable in the mass production specifications, and in the test specifications, the test device correctly recognizes the OFF period of the RB operation state flag. It is set as a sufficient time to get.

Further, the symbol stop test signal is output in the symbol stop test signal output process described later. In the present embodiment, this symbol stop test signal output process is performed after receiving the start lever operation (actually, after receiving the signal (game start command signal) indicating that the start lever has been operated, which is transmitted from the test device). ), It is performed before executing the process of determining whether or not the minimum game time has elapsed (which is performed in the reel rotation start preparation process described later). This has the following advantages. That is, in a test such as a type test, the symbol stop test signal may be required to be output within a predetermined time after receiving the game start command signal, but the predetermined time is set shorter than the minimum game time. (For example, 2 seconds). On the other hand, in the test, when the game is played in the shortest time, the time from receiving the game start command signal to receiving the next game start command signal is, for example, about 1 second, which is considerably shorter than the minimum game time. there is a possibility. In that case, if the symbol stop test signal output process is executed after the process of determining whether or not the minimum game time has elapsed, there is a possibility that the request for the output timing of the symbol stop test signal cannot be met. On the other hand, by performing the process before the process of determining whether or not the minimum game time has elapsed, it is possible to sufficiently meet such a request. Further, while it is necessary to execute various control processes after the process of determining whether or not the minimum game time has elapsed, in the test, the next game start command is received after the game start command signal is received. Since the time until the signal is received is shortened, there is a time margin between the reception of the game start command signal and the elapse of the minimum game time. Therefore, even if the symbol stop test signal output process is performed before the process of determining whether or not the minimum game time has elapsed, the processing load can be reduced.

[Main control processing]
Hereinafter, the main control processes performed in the slot machine 1 described above will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 32 to 52. In the following, first, among the control processes performed by the main control means 100, the test specification determination preparation process, the game progress control process, and the timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIGS. 32 to 49. Next, among the various control processes performed by the sub-main control means 200A, the program start process, the sub-main loop process, and the power off process will be described with reference to FIGS. 50 to 52.

<Test specification judgment preparation process>
The test specification determination preparatory process is a process performed when the power is turned on, and as shown in FIG. 32 (A), first, the input port is read (step R11). In this input port reading, in particular, each potential level of the terminals PI0 to PI7 described above is read. Next, it is determined whether or not the potential of the terminal PI0 is at the test level (step R12). The test level means a level (H level or L level) set as the potential level of the terminal PI0 when the slot machine 1 has the test specifications. That is, in the test specification, if the terminal PI0 is set to the H level, the test level is the H level, and conversely, in the test specification, if the terminal PI0 is set to the L level, the test level is. It will be L level. In the determination of step R12, when the potential of terminal PI0 is at the test time level, the test in-test flag (flag for identifying whether or not the potential of terminal PI0 at power-on was at the test time level) is turned ON. Is set to (step R13) and returns, and if it is not at the test time level, the test-in-test flag is not set and the return is performed.

As in the modified example J1 shown in FIG. 32 (B), in the test specification determination preparation process, a process for confirming the potential level of the terminal PI0 may be included and no particular process may be performed. Further, as in the modified example J2 shown in FIG. 32 (C), the potential level (H level or L level) of the terminal PI0 is stored in a predetermined storage area such as RAM (RAM 63) without setting the flag during the test. (Step R14A) may be performed.

<Game progress control processing>
The game progress control process described below is a basic process that is repeatedly executed during the game, and as shown in FIG. 33, first, the game start process is performed (step S1). In this game start process, as shown in FIG. 34, first, the information of the symbol combination display flag is acquired (step S31). Specifically, the data value (data value of the operation symbol display flag) stored in the operation symbol display flag storage area (see FIG. 27 (B)) is stored in the A register (register included in the main CPU 61. Each of the following registers). The process of storing in (same as above) is performed. Next, it is determined whether or not the BB operation symbol is displayed in the previous game (step S32). Here, if the BB operation symbol is displayed, the data of the number of game medals that can be acquired (“450”) at the time of BB operation (at the start of operation) is saved in a predetermined storage area (step S33) and in step S34. If the BB operation symbol is not displayed, the process proceeds to step S34 without performing the process of step S33.

In this step S34, data of the operating state flag is generated. Specifically, the following processes (1) to (5) are performed.
(1) The data of the address of the operation state flag storage area (see FIG. 27 (A)) is stored in the HL register. Specifically, since the address of the operation symbol display flag storage area is "F01CH", the H register value = "F0H" and the L register value = "1CH".
(2) The data value stored in the A register (= data value of the operation symbol display flag) and the data value stored in the storage area of the address stored in the HL register (= operation state flag storage area) (= operation state flag storage area). (= Data value of operating state flag) is OR-calculated, and the calculation result is stored in the A register.
(3) The data value stored in the A register (= the data value obtained by the above OR operation) is stored in the C register.
(4) The data value of bit 3 (= BB) in the data value stored in the A register (= data value obtained by the above OR operation) and the data value of the operation symbol display flag (= 8-bit data value). AND operation is performed with the 8-bit data value (= "00001000B") in which the data value corresponding to the operation symbol display flag is set to "1" and the data value of the other bit is set to "0", and the calculation result is A. Store in the register.
(5) The data value stored in the A register (= the data value obtained by the above AND operation) is shifted left by 1 bit, and the operation result is stored in the A register.

After the process of step S34, the operating state flag is updated (step S35). Specifically, after the process of (5) in step S34, the data value stored in the A register and the data value stored in the C register are OR-operated and stored in the A register. .. Next, the updated operating state flag is saved (step S36). Specifically, a process of storing the data value stored in the A register is performed in the storage area (= operating state flag storage area) of the address stored in the HL register. As a result, the information on the operating status flag up to that point is replaced with the updated operating status flag information.

As a specific example of the processes (2) to (5) in step S34 and the processes of steps S35 and S36, when the BB operation symbol is displayed in the previous game (hereinafter referred to as "specific example 1"). When the BB operating symbol is already displayed and the BB and RB are operating (hereinafter referred to as "Specific Example 2"), when the BB operating symbol is already displayed and the BB is operating but the RB is not operating (hereinafter referred to as "Specific Example 2"). Hereinafter, referred to as “Specific Example 3”) will show how the value of each register changes.
[Specific example 1]
(Step S34)
(2) A register value: "00001000B"
Data value at the address stored in the HL register: "00000000B"
A register value after OR operation: "00001000B"
(3) A register value: "00001000B"
C register value: "00001000B"
(4) A register value: "00001000B"
Data value with bit 3 set to "1" and other bits set to "0": "00001000B"
A register value after AND operation: "00001000B"
(5) A register value (before left shift): "00001000B"
A register value (after left shift): "00010000B"
(Step S35)
A register value: "00010000B"
C register value: "00001000B"
A register value (after OR calculation): "00011000B"
(Step S36)
Data value at the address stored in the HL register: "00011000B"
[Specific example 2]
(Step S34)
(2) A register value: "00000000B"
Data value at the address stored in the HL register: "00011000B"
A register value after OR operation: "00011000B"
(3) A register value: "00011000B"
C register value: "00011000B"
(4) A register value: "00011000B"
Data value with bit 3 set to "1" and other bits set to "0": "00001000B"
A register value after AND operation: "00001000B"
(5) A register value (before left shift): "00001000B"
A register value (after left shift): "00010000B"
(Step S35)
A register value: "00010000B"
C register value: "00011000B"
A register value (after OR calculation): "00011000B"
(Step S36)
Data value at the address stored in the HL register: "00011000B"
[Specific example 3]
(Step S34)
(2) A register value: "00000000B"
Data value at the address stored in the HL register: "00001000B"
A register value after OR operation: "00001000B"
(3) A register value: "00001000B"
C register value: "00001000B"
(4) A register value: "00001000B"
Data value with bit 3 set to "1" and other bits set to "0": "00001000B"
A register value after AND operation: "00001000B"
(5) A register value (before left shift): "00001000B"
A register value (after left shift): "00010000B"
(Step S35)
A register value: "00010000B"
C register value: "00001000B"
A register value (after OR calculation): "00011000B"
(Step S36)
Data value at the address stored in the HL register: "00011000B"

Next, it is determined whether or not the RB operation has been started (step S37). Specifically, the data value stored in the A register and the data value stored in the C register are XOR-operated, and the zero flag (set to a specific bit in the F register is set, and the result of the operation is "0". If so, the data of "1" is stored), but it is determined whether or not it is "1". Here, if the zero flag ≠ "1", it is determined that the RB operation has been started, and the process proceeds to step S38. If the zero flag = "1", the process does not proceed to step S38 and returns. In this step S38, information on the number of times the game can be played (twice) and the number of times the prize can be won (two times) when the RB is activated is saved. Specifically, the data of "2" is stored in the RB game possible number counter and the RB winning number counter respectively set in the predetermined storage area of the RAM 63.

With the return from the game start process, the process proceeds to step S2 of FIG. 33 to manage the game medals. Specifically, when a game medal is inserted (maintained) or a bet switch is operated by a player, the number of bets and credits (storage) is managed, and when the clearing switch is operated, the number of bets and credits (storage) are managed. , Performs a clearing process to refund the bet game medals and the stored game medals. Further, when the re-game is in the operating state, an automatic bet process is performed in which the same number of game medals as the number of bets in the previous game are set in the bet state.

After managing the game medals, the process proceeds to step S3. Therefore, it is determined whether or not the number of bets matches the specified number and the operation of the start lever is accepted. If the determination here is correct, the process proceeds to step S4, and if the determination is negative, the process returns to step S2. In step S4, the blocker is turned off and the process proceeds to step S5.

In this step S5, the combination determination process is performed. Specifically, first, a random number latch is performed to select one random number from a random number sequence generated by a random number generator 66 or the like. Next, the latched random number (hereinafter, appropriately referred to as “latch random number”) is read, and one combination determination result number is selected based on the read latch random number and the combination lottery table. Next, the information of the selected winning combination determination result number is stored in the above-mentioned winning / RP combination determination result number storage area or the accessory combination determination result number storage area.

After performing the above-mentioned combination determination process, it is determined which of the game modes 0 to 7 is set (step S6). Then, according to the set game mode, the game mode 0 (lever) process (step S7), the game mode 1 (lever) process (step S8), the game mode 2 (lever) process (step S9), and the game mode 3 (lever) processing (step S10), game mode 4 (lever) processing (step S11), game mode 5 (lever) processing (step S12), game mode 6 (lever) processing (step S13), game mode 7 (step S13) Any of the lever) processes (step S14) is performed.

In the game mode 0 (lever) processing, as shown in FIG. 35 (A), first, it is determined whether or not any one of the combination determination result numbers 15 to 22, 48 to 50 is selected in the combination determination process. Determine (step S41). Here, if any of the combination determination result numbers has been selected, the above-mentioned AT lottery is performed (step S42), and it is determined whether or not the AT has been won (step S43). Here, if the AT has been won, the number of AT stocks is added by "1" (step S44). Specifically, the process of "+1" the value (initial value "0") of the AT stock number counter set in the predetermined storage area of the RAM 63 is performed. Then, the above-mentioned precursor G number lottery is performed (step S45), and the player returns. On the other hand, if the combination determination result numbers 15 to 22, 48 to 50 are not selected in the determination in step S41, the processes in steps S42 to S45 return to the process, and in the determination in step S43, AT If no winner is found, the processes of steps S44 and S45 are returned to the process.

In the game mode 1 (lever) process, as shown in FIG. 35 (B), the game returns without any particular process. In the game mode 2 (lever) process, as shown in FIG. 35 (C), the push order instruction number setting process is performed (step S51). In this push order instruction number setting process, as shown in FIG. 35 (D), it is determined which combination determination result number (winning / RP combination determination result number) has been selected (step S52). Then, when any of the combination determination result numbers 2, 7, 12, 23, 29, 35, and 42 is selected, the push order instruction number A1 is selected (step S53), and the combination determination result numbers 3, 8 and are selected. If any of 24, 30, 36, and 43 is selected, the push order instruction number A2 is selected (step S54), and any of the combination determination result numbers 4, 9, 13, 25, 31, 37, 44 is selected. If is selected, the push order instruction number A3 is selected (step S55). Similarly, if any of the combination determination result numbers 5, 10, 26, 32, 38, and 45 is selected, the push order instruction number A4 is selected (step S56), and the combination determination result numbers 6, 11, 27 are selected. , 33, 39, 46 is selected, the push order instruction number A5 is selected (step S57), and if any of the combination determination result numbers 28, 34, 40, 47 is selected, The push order instruction number A6 is selected (step S58). Although not shown, the selected push order instruction number information is stored in the above-mentioned push order instruction number storage area (see FIG. 27 (E)) and returned. If a combination determination result number other than the above is selected, a return is made without selecting any push order instruction number, but this is the case when the push order instruction number A0 is selected and the information is stored. This is the same (because the information of the push order instruction number is cleared at the end of the game, but the cleared state is the same as the state in which the information of the push order instruction number A0 (“00000000B”) is stored).

In the game mode 3 (lever) process, as shown in FIG. 36 (A), first, the push order instruction number setting process is performed (step S61). Next, it is determined whether or not any of the combination determination result numbers 23 to 28 has been selected (step S62), and if it has been selected, the above-mentioned push order guessing game lottery is performed (step S63), and the push order is won. It is determined whether or not the game lottery has been won (step S64). Here, in the case of winning, it is determined which of the combination determination result numbers 23 to 28 has been selected (step S65), and the combination determination result number 23 or 24 has been selected. Selects the push order instruction number A7 (step S66), selects the push order instruction number A8 if the combination determination result number 25 or 26 is selected (step S67), and selects the combination determination result number 27 or 28. If so, the push order instruction number A9 is selected, and the process proceeds to step S69. On the other hand, if the combination determination result numbers 23 to 28 are not selected in the determination in step S62, the game directly proceeds to step S69, and if the push order game lottery is not won in the determination in step S64. , Proceed directly to step S69 from there.

In this way, in the game mode 3 (lever) processing, when any of the combination determination result numbers 23 to 28 is selected by the combination determination process, the normal push order instruction number (any of A1 to A6) is used. In addition to being selected, if the push order guessing game lottery is won, the push order instruction number (any of A7 to A9) for the push order guessing game is also selected. As mentioned above, the push order instruction number for the push order guessing game is used for notifying the push order in the push order guessing game, and the normal push order instruction number is used when determining whether or not the correct answer is given to the push order guessing game. It is used for.

In step S69, it is determined whether or not any of the combination determination result numbers 17 to 22 is selected in the combination determination process. Here, if any of the combination determination result numbers is selected, the above-mentioned AT lottery is performed (step S70), and it is determined whether or not the AT has been won (step S71). Here, if the AT has been won, the number of AT stocks is added by "1" (step S72), and the result is returned. On the other hand, if the combination determination result numbers 17 to 22 are not selected in the determination in step S69, the process returns without performing the processing in steps S70 to S72, and if the AT is not elected in the determination in step S71. , Return without performing the process of step S72. The combination determination result numbers 17 to 22, which trigger the execution of the AT lottery, are selected only in the RT3 state. Therefore, although it is set to the game mode 3, it is not set to RT3 (for example, if the push order navigation is not followed in the game mode 2, the game state shifts to a game state other than RT3, and the game mode 3 is set. The AT lottery is not performed and the number of AT stocks is not added.

In the game mode 4 (lever) process, as shown in FIG. 36 (B), the game returns without any particular process. In the game mode 5 (lever) process, as shown in FIG. 36 (C), an AT lottery is performed (step S81), and it is determined whether or not the AT has been won (step S82). Here, if the AT has been won, the number of AT stocks is added by "1" (step S83), and the result is returned. On the other hand, if the AT is not won, the process returns without performing the process of step S83. In the game mode 6 (lever) process, as shown in FIG. 36 (D), the player returns without performing any particular process. In the game mode 7 (lever) process, as shown in FIG. 36 (E), an AT lottery is performed (step S91), and it is determined whether or not the AT has been won (step S92). Here, if the AT has been won, the number of AT stocks is added by "1" (step S93), and the result is returned. On the other hand, if the AT is not won, the process returns without performing the process of step S93. When the game modes 5 and 7 are set in this way, the AT lottery for each game is performed.

With the return from the game mode 0 (lever) process or the game mode 7 (lever) process described above, the process proceeds to step S15 of FIG. 33, and the push order instruction display process is performed. Specifically, the WIN lamp indicates the push order (see FIG. 16) according to the push order instruction number (any of A1 to A9) selected in the game mode 2 (lever) process or the game mode 3 (lever) process. The process of displaying on 46j (the process of setting the data of the push order instruction number in the A register and the process of setting the data of the push order instruction number set in the A register in the predetermined output port) is performed. If none of the push order instruction numbers A1 to A9 is selected, the push order is not notified by the WIN lamp 46j. Further, in the game modes other than the game modes 2 and 3, the push order instruction number is not selected, and the push order is not notified by the WIN lamp 46j.

After performing the push order instruction display process, it is determined whether or not the slot machine 1 has test specifications (step S16). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the above-mentioned test flag is set to ON, if it is set to ON, it is determined that it is a test specification, and if it is not set to ON, it is a mass production specification. judge. In addition to this, as a method for determining whether or not the specifications are test specifications, in various methods described later (for example, the reel rotation start preparation process shown in FIGS. 38 and 39 and each modification example thereof, the winning information output timer is used. Method to determine whether or not to set) can be adopted. If it is determined in step S16 that the test specifications are met, interrupts (for example, execution of timer interrupt processing described later) are prohibited (step S17), and the symbol stop test signal output processing described below is performed (step S18). ..

This symbol stop test signal output process is executed by the control program stored in the above-mentioned second PRG region (see FIG. 26), and as shown in FIG. 37 (A), first, a preparatory process is performed. (Step S1801). Specifically, the stack pointer in the first PRG area is saved, the stack pointer is set in the second PRG area, the data stored in each register is saved, and the like. Next, the stop reception designation table T2 (see FIG. 30B) described above is set (step S1802). Specifically, the start address (“** 30H”) of the stop reception designation table T2 is set in the HL register. Then, it is determined whether or not the BB is in operation (step S1803). Specifically, the data of the operating state flag stored in the above-mentioned operating state flag storage area (see FIG. 27 (A)) is set in the A register, and the value set in the A register is shifted to the right by one bit. do. For example, when the BB and RB are in operation, the A register value is initially "00011000B" and after the right shift is "00001100B" (at this time, the zero flag = "0"). Further, it is determined whether or not the cellophane flag = "1", and when it is "1", it is determined that the BB is not in operation, and when it is "0", it is determined that the BB is in operation. The right shift is not performed, and it is determined whether or not the value of bit 3 of the A register value is "1". If it is "1", it is determined that the BB is operating, and if it is "0", it is determined that the BB is operating. It may be determined that the BB is not in operation.

If it is determined in step S1803 that the BB is not in operation, the process proceeds to step S1804, and the stop reception designation table T1 (see FIG. 30A) described above is set. Specifically, the start address (“** 00H”) of the stop reception designation table T1 is set in the HL register (when it is determined that the BB is not operating, the stop reception designation table T2 remains set. ). Then, the designated table address corresponding to the previously selected push order instruction number is set (step S1805). Specifically, when the numerical value of the push order instruction number (for example, "3" for A3, "6" for A6, and the stop reception designation table T2 is set (BB is operating), the push order instruction is always given. Since the number is A0, the data of "0") is set in the A register, the value set in the A register is added to the A register, and the value of the added A register is added to the A register again. This corresponds to quadrupling the value initially set in the A register. Further, the value of the A register is added to the value of the HL register. That is, a new address corresponding to the push order instruction number is set in the HL register by adding a value obtained by multiplying the value of the push order instruction number by 4 to the start address of the stop reception designation table T1 or T2.

Next, the process proceeds to step S1806, and a push order designation command output request is set. Specifically, a higher value (“71H”) of a predetermined value (“7100H”) for identifying the data of the push order instruction number is set in the D register, and further, the HL register is set. The value stored in the (matching) address indicated by the value obtained by adding "0" to the value stored in is set in the E register ("0" is added to the value of the HL register. No, the value of the HL register has not been updated). Next, the process proceeds to step S1807, and the symbol stop test signal is output.

In this symbol stop test signal output, as shown in FIG. 37 (B), first, the address data is saved (step S1821). Specifically, the address data stored in the HL register is saved in the stack area. Next, the address of the data register of the serial communication test output port (the test output port SO0) is set (step S1822). Specifically, the address of the data register of the test output port SO0 (referred to as "FE53H") is set in the HL register. Next, the first command is written (step S1823). Specifically, the value of the D register is set to the address indicated by the value of the HL register. Subsequently, the second command is written (step S1824). Specifically, the value of the E register (the above "71H") is set to the address indicated by the value of the HL register. Next, the SUM command is calculated (step S1825). Specifically, the value of the D register is set in the A register, the value of the E register is added to the value of the A register, and "2" is added to the value of the A register. Then, the value of the A register and "10000000B" are OR-operated.

Next, the SUM command is written (step S1826). Specifically, the A register value is set to the address indicated by the value of the HL register (data register of test output port SO0). Then, the address data is restored (step S1827) and returned. Specifically, the return of the address data is a process of setting the data of the address saved in the stack area in the HL register. The following effects can be obtained by using the above SUM command as follows. That is, as described above, the test signal is output to the test device via the relay device. Therefore, in this relay device, the correctness of the first and second commands is determined based on the SUM command. If it is determined that the command is correct, the first and second commands can be output to the test device, and if it is determined that the command is incorrect, the command can be omitted. As a result, it is possible to prevent the symbol stop test signal carrying erroneous information from being output to the test apparatus. It should be noted that the relay device determines whether it is the first or second command or the SUM command as the data value of bit 7 ("0" in the case of the first and second commands and "1" in the case of the SUM command. It is possible to judge by.

After executing the symbol stop test signal output, the process proceeds to step S1809, and the left reel stop reception position designation command output request is set. Specifically, the value of the D register is incremented by "1". That is, the value of the D register changes from "71H" to "72H". The value "72H" is a higher value than the value ("7200H") set for identifying the data at the left reel stop reception position. Further, the value stored in the address indicated by the value obtained by adding "1" to the value of the HL register is set in the E register (instead of adding "1" to the value of the HL register, the HL register is used. The value of is not updated). Next, the process proceeds to step S1810, and the above-mentioned symbol stop test signal output is performed.

After executing the symbol stop test signal output, the process proceeds to step S1811, and the middle reel stop reception position designation command output request is set. Specifically, the value of the D register is incremented by "1". That is, the value of the D register changes from "72H" to "73H". The value "73H" is a higher value than the value ("7300H") set for identifying the data at the middle reel stop reception position. Further, the value stored in the address indicated by the value obtained by adding "2" to the value of the HL register is set in the E register (instead of adding "2" to the value of the HL register, the HL register is used. The value of is not updated). Next, the process proceeds to step S1812, and the above-mentioned symbol stop test signal output is performed.

After executing the symbol stop test signal output, the process proceeds to step S1813, and the right reel stop reception position designation command output request is set. Specifically, the value of the D register is incremented by "1". That is, the value of the D register changes from "73H" to "74H". The value "74H" is a higher value than the value ("7400H") set for identifying the data at the right reel stop reception position. Further, the value stored in the address indicated by the value obtained by adding "3" to the value of the HL register is set in the E register (instead of adding "3" to the value of the HL register, the HL register is used. The value of is not updated). Next, the process proceeds to step S1814, and the above-mentioned symbol stop test signal output is performed.

After executing the symbol stop test signal output, the end process (step S1815) is performed to return. In this end process, the data stored in each register, which was saved in the preparatory process of step S1801, is restored, the stack pointer in the first PRG area is restored, and the like are restored. As described above, in the present embodiment, the symbol stop test signal output process is performed after the process of selecting the push order instruction number and further displaying the push order instruction number (push order instruction display process) is executed. By doing so, it is possible to continuously perform the process of storing the selected push order instruction number information in the push order instruction number storage area and the process of reading and displaying the information of the push order instruction number stored there. Since it is possible, the processing flow becomes smooth. On the other hand, it is conceivable to execute the symbol stop test signal output process after selecting the push order instruction number, and then perform the symbol stop test signal output process. In this case, the information of the selected push order instruction number is considered. The process of storing the push order instruction number in the push order instruction number storage area and the process of reading and displaying the information of the push order instruction number stored there are performed with the symbol stop test signal output process in between, so that the processing flow is It becomes complicated and the display starts late.

With the return from the symbol stop test signal output processing described above, the process proceeds to step S19 of FIG. 33, interrupts are permitted, and the process proceeds to step S20. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S16 that the specifications are not the test specifications, the process directly proceeds to step S20. In this step S20, the data of the push order instruction number is stored in the transmission buffer (CB above) to the sub control means (sub). By saving the data in the transmission buffer, the data of the push order instruction number is transmitted to the sub.

Next, mask processing is performed on the winning / RP push order instruction number (step S21), and the data of the effect group number (see FIG. 19) determined by the mask processing is saved in the transmission buffer (step S22). By saving the data in the transmission buffer, the data of the effect group number is transmitted to the sub. Further, the data of the push order instruction number of the accessory is saved in the transmission buffer (step S23). By storing the data in the transmission buffer, the data of the push order instruction number of the accessory is transmitted to the sub.

Next, a reel rotation start preparation process is performed (step S24). In this reel rotation start preparation process, as shown in FIG. 38 (A), it is determined whether or not the minimum game time has elapsed (step S101). Specifically, the value of the minimum game time timer described below is set. Read, determine whether it is "0", if it is "0", it is determined that the minimum game time has elapsed, and the process proceeds to the next step. If it is not "0", the minimum game time has elapsed. It is determined that the determination is not performed, and a process of repeating this determination is performed. As described above, the minimum game time is the time that must be secured from the start of rotation of all reels in one game to the start of rotation of all reels in the next game (for example,). 4.1 seconds). Next, the minimum game time is newly set (step S102). Specifically, the value of "1836" (1836 × 2.235ms ≈ 4100ms) is set in the minimum game time timer set in the predetermined storage area of the RAM. The set timer value is subtracted by "1" each time the timer interrupt process described later is executed, and remains "0" after becoming "0".

Next, it is determined whether or not the testing flag is ON (step S103). Here, if the testing flag is ON, the process proceeds to step S103, and the above-mentioned winning information output period timer is set (set value is “25”) and returned. The set timer value is subtracted by "1" each time the timer interrupt process described later is executed, and remains "0" after becoming "0". On the other hand, if the flag during the test is not ON, the winning information output period timer is not set and returns. As described above, in the reel rotation start preparation process in the present embodiment, when it is determined that the power is not in the test specification (mass production specification) and the test in-test flag is set to OFF, the winning information output period timer is set. Will not be done. As will be described later, if the winning information output period timer is not set, the test signal carrying the actual winning information will not be output, so that it is possible to prevent illegal acquisition of the winning information from the test signal. ..

As a change example (for example, an example corresponding to the change example J1 (see FIG. 32 (B)) of the test specification determination preparation process described above), the reel rotation start preparation process (change example K1) shown in FIG. 38 (B) is shown. ) May be performed. In this reel rotation start preparation process (change example K1), after setting a new minimum game time (step S102A) by confirming the progress of the minimum game time (step S101A), the input port is read (specifically, terminal PI0). -Reading each potential level of PI7) is performed (step S1021A), and it is determined whether or not the potential of the terminal PI0 is at the test level (step S1022A). Here, if the potential of the terminal PI0 is at the test time level, the winning information output period timer is set (step S104A) and returned, but if it is not at the test time level, the winning information output period timer is not set. Return to. In the case of this modification example K1, whether or not it is a test specification is determined for each game in the reel rotation start preparation process. If it is determined that the game does not have the test specifications in one game, the winning information output period timer is not set and the test signal carrying the actual winning information is not output, but in the subsequent games, the test specifications are used (PI0). Is determined to be the test time level), the winning information output period timer is set, and the test signal carrying the actual winning information is output. Therefore, there is an advantage that the control process at the time of power-on can be simplified because it is not necessary to perform the process for determining whether or not the power is on, but PI0 is artificially set to the test level. If fraudulent acts are committed, there is a risk that winning information will be fraudulently obtained from the test signal.

As another change example (for example, an example corresponding to the change example J2 (see FIG. 32 (C)) of the test specification determination preparation process described above), the reel rotation start preparation process (change example K2) shown in FIG. 38 (C) is shown. ) May be performed. In this reel rotation start preparation process (change example K2), after setting a new minimum game time (step S102B) by confirming the progress of the minimum game time (step S101B), each potential level of terminals PI0 to PI7 is read. This is performed (step S1021B), and it is determined whether or not the potential of the terminal PI0 (acquired this time) this time is at the test level (step S1023B). Here, when the potential of the terminal PI0 this time is the test time level, the potential of the terminal PI0 stored at the time of turning on the power is also the level at the time of the test (the potential of the terminal PI0 this time and the potential of PI0 at the time of turning on the power are It is determined whether or not (both match at the test level) (step S1024B). Then, when the potential of the terminal PI0 stored at the time of turning on the power is also at the test time level, the winning information output period timer is set (step S104B) and returned. On the other hand, if the potential of the terminal PI0 this time is not at the test time level, or if the potential of PI0 at the time of turning on the power is not at the test time level, the winning information output period timer is not set and returns. In the case of this modification K2, if the potential of PI0 at the time of turning on the power is not at the test time level, then even if the potential of PI0 is at the test time level, the winning information output period timer is not set. Therefore, even if a fraudulent act of artificially setting PI0 to the test time level is performed, it is possible to prevent the winning information from being fraudulently acquired from the test signal.

As yet another modification example (for example, another example corresponding to the modification J2 of the test specification determination preparation process), the reel rotation start preparation process (modification example K3) shown in FIG. 38 (D) may be performed. .. In this reel rotation start preparation process (change example K3), after setting a new minimum game time (step S102C) by confirming the progress of the minimum game time (step S101C), each potential level of terminals PI0 to PI7 is read. This is performed (step S1021C), and it is determined whether or not the potential of the terminal PI0 (acquired this time) this time is at the test level (step S1023C). Here, when the potential of the terminal PI0 this time is the test time level, the potential of the terminal PI0 stored at the time of turning on the power is also the level at the time of the test (the potential of the terminal PI0 this time and the potential of PI0 at the time of turning on the power are It is determined whether or not (both match at the test level) (step S1024C). Then, when the potential of the terminal PI0 stored at the time of turning on the power is also at the test time level, the winning information output period timer is set (step S104C) and returned. On the other hand, the potential of terminal PI0 this time is the test level, but if the potential of PI0 at power-on is not the test level, the potential of terminal PI0 stored at power-on is changed to the test level ( Step S1025C) Return.

Then, in the timer rotation start preparation process (change example K3) in the next game, when the potential of the terminal PI0 this time is the test time level and the changed power-on PI0 potential is also the test time level. Is set to the winning information output period timer. In this way, in the case of the modified example K3, even if the potential of PI0 at the time of power-on is not at the test time level, if the potential of PI0 is at the test time level after that, the potential of PI0 at the time of power-on is also at the time of test. It may be rewritten to the level, and the winning information output period timer may be set in the subsequent game. Therefore, even if the potential of PI0 at the time of turning on the power is erroneously stored due to the influence of noise or the like, it is possible to correct it and output a test signal carrying the actual winning information. In addition, in mass production specifications, there is a possibility that a fraudulent act of artificially setting PI0 to the test time level may be performed, but at the stage where the potential of the terminal PI0 this time and the potential of PI0 at the time of turning on the power do not match, By setting to perform error notification, it is possible to alert the game clerk, etc., and then monitor whether or not fraudulent activity has been performed, so that winning information can be illegally acquired from the test signal. Can be prevented.

Further, as another modification example (for example, another example corresponding to the modification example J2 of the test specification determination preparation process), the reel rotation start preparation process (modification example K4) shown in FIG. 39 (A) is performed. May be good. In this reel rotation start preparation process (change example K4), after setting a new minimum game time (step S102D) by confirming the progress of the minimum game time (step S101D), each potential level of terminals PI0 to PI7 is read. This is performed (step S1021D), and it is determined whether or not the potential level of the terminal PI0 (acquired this time) this time and the potential level of the terminal PI0 stored at the time of turning on the power match (step S1026D). Here, if both match, it is determined whether or not the potential of the terminal PI0 this time is at the test level (step S1027D). Then, when the potential of the terminal PI0 this time is at the test time level, the winning information output period timer is set (step S104D) and returned, and when it is not at the test time level, the winning information output period timer is not set. Return. On the other hand, in step S1026D, if the potential level of the terminal PI0 this time and the potential level of the terminal PI0 at the time of turning on the power do not match, the potential of the terminal PI0 stored at the time of turning on the power is changed to the level at the time of mass production (step). S1028D) Return.

In this way, in the case of the change example K4, if the potential level of the terminal PI0 this time and the potential level of the terminal PI0 at the time of turning on the power do not match, the potential of the terminal PI0 stored at the time of turning on the power is changed to the level at the time of mass production. .. Then, even if the potential level of the terminal PI0 read out in the reel rotation start preparation process (modification example K4) in the subsequent game is the test time level, the potential level of the terminal PI0 at the time of turning on the power (mass production level). Since it does not match with, the winning information output period timer is not set. Further, when the potential level of the terminal PI0 acquired after the next game is the level at the time of mass production, it will match the potential level of the terminal PI0 at the time of turning on the power, but the potential level of the terminal PI0 is the level at the time of the test. Therefore, the winning information output period timer is not set. That is, if the potential level of the terminal PI0 at the time of turning on the power and the potential level of the newly acquired terminal PI0 do not match even once, the winning information output period timer is not set after that, and the test signal is displayed. It is possible to prevent the winning information from being illegally obtained from.

As another change example (for example, an example corresponding to the change example L1 and L2 of the test signal output processing described later), the reel rotation start preparation process (change example K5) shown in FIG. 39 (B) may be performed. good. In this reel rotation start preparation process (change example K5), a new minimum game time is set (step S102E) by checking the progress of the minimum game time (step S101E), and then a winning information output period timer is set (step S104E). And return. As described above, in the case of the modification example K5, in the reel rotation start preparation process, the process for determining whether or not the specifications are the test specifications is not performed (performed in the timer interrupt process described later).

Further, as another modification example (for example, another example corresponding to modification L1 and L2 of the test signal output processing described later), the reel rotation start preparation process (modification example K6) shown in FIG. 39 (C) is performed. It may be. In this reel rotation start preparation process (change example K6), after setting a new minimum game time by checking the progress of the minimum game time (step S101F) (step S102F), the process proceeds to step S1031F and is selected by the combination determination process. Acquire the information of the winning combination result number. Specifically, the data value stored in the above-mentioned accessory combination determination result number storage area (see FIG. 27 (D)) is set in the H register, and the above-mentioned winning / RP combination determination result is set in the L register. A process of setting the data value stored in the number storage area (see FIG. 27C) is performed. Next, the identifier data is set (step S1032F). Specifically, the process of setting the bit 7 of the H register to "1" and setting the bit 6 of the L register to "1" is performed. Next, the combination determination result information is saved (step S1033F). Specifically, the H register value is stored in the above-mentioned accessory winning information storage area (see FIG. 29 (B)), and the L register value is stored in the above-mentioned winning / RP winning information storage area (FIG. 29 (A)). ) Is saved in). Then, the winning information output period timer is set (step S104F) and returned. As described above, also in the case of the modification example K6, in the reel rotation start preparation process, the process for determining whether or not the specifications are the test specifications is not performed (performed in the timer interrupt process described later).

With the return from the reel rotation start preparation process, the process proceeds to step S25 of FIG. 33, where the reel stop management process is performed. In this reel stop management process, the rotation state from the start of rotation of each reel to the constant speed state is managed, and when the operation of the stop switch is accepted, the accepted timing and the result of the combination determination process are used. The stoptable position is determined accordingly, and the process of managing the rotational state from the deceleration of the reel to the stop is performed.

Next, a display determination process for confirming the stop display symbol on each reel is performed (step S26), and a payout process is further performed (step S27). In this payout process, the game medal is paid out when the stop-displayed symbol combination is the corresponding symbol of the winning combination (small combination) for which the game medal is to be paid out. This game medal is paid out by adding to the number of stored games when it can be stored, and when the number of stored games reaches the upper limit, the game medal is actually paid out from the hopper.

Next, the game end check process is performed (step S28). In this game end check process, as shown in FIG. 40, first, the data of the combination determination result number is cleared (step S111). Specifically, the winning / RP combination determination result number data (winning / RP combination determination result number flag) stored in the above-mentioned winning / RP combination determination result number storage area (see FIG. 27 (C)). Performs the process of clearing. Further, in the game in which the BB operation symbol is stopped and displayed, the data of the role determination result number of the accessory stored in the above-mentioned accessory combination determination result number storage area (see FIG. 27 (D)) (accessory). The process of clearing the combination determination result number flag) is also performed. Subsequently, the re-game operation status flag is cleared (step S112). Specifically, the process of setting bit 0 of the above-mentioned operation state flag storage area (see FIG. 27A) to “0” (clearing the re-game operation state flag) is performed.

Next, the BB operation management process is performed (step S113). In this BB operation management process, as shown in FIG. 41 (A), first, the operation state flag is checked (step S131). Specifically, the process of setting the data value stored in the operating state flag storage area in the A register is performed. Further, a process of shifting the A register value to the right by 1 bit is performed. For example, when BB and RB are operating, the A register value when set = "00011000B", and the A register value after right shift = "00001100B". At this time, the cellophane flag = "0". Next, it is determined whether or not the BB is in operation (step S114). Specifically, it is determined whether the zero flag is "0" or "1", and if it is "0", it is determined that the BB is operating, and if it is "1", it is determined that the BB is not operating. It should be noted that the above right shift is not performed, and it is determined whether the bit 3 of the A register value when set is "1" (BB is operating) or "0" (BB is not operating). good.

Here, when it is determined that the BB is in operation, the data of the number of medals that can be acquired (remaining number) in the BB is acquired (step S133). Specifically, the process of setting the data of the number of game medals that can be acquired (remaining number) stored in the predetermined storage area of the RAM in the A register is performed. Next, it is determined whether or not the BB operation is completed (step S134). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value set in the A register is "0" (= the number of medals paid out in BB exceeds "450") (or whether or not the zero flag is "1"). , If it is "0", it is determined that the BB operation is completed, and if it is not "0", it is determined that the BB operation is continued. Here, when it is determined that the BB operation is completed, the BB operation state flag and the RB operation state flag are cleared (step S134). Specifically, the process of saving the A register value (which is "00000000B" at this time) in the operating state flag storage area is performed. On the other hand, in step S132, if it is determined that the BB is not activated, the process returns without performing the processes of steps S133 to S135, and if it is determined in step S134 that the BB is not activated, the process of step S135 is not performed. Return to.

With the return from the BB operation management process, the process proceeds to step S114 of FIG. 40, and it is determined whether or not the RB is in operation. Specifically, it is determined whether the bit 4 of the data value stored in the operation state flag storage area is "1" or "0", and if it is "1", it is "0" during RB operation. If so, the process of determining that the RB is not activated is performed. Here, if it is determined that the RB is in operation, the RB operation management process is performed (step S115).

In this RB operation management process, as shown in FIG. 41 (B), first, the number of playable times in the RB is decremented by "1" (step S141). Specifically, the process of subtracting "1" from the value of the above-mentioned RB game possible number counter and updating it is performed. Next, it is determined whether or not the number of playable times in the RB is "0" (step S142). Specifically, a process of determining whether or not the value of the updated RB playable number counter is "0" (or whether or not the zero flag is "1" as a result of the operation of updating the counter value). I do. Here, if the number of possible games in RB is not "0", it is determined whether or not the number of game medals paid out in this game is "0" (= whether or not a small winning combination has been established) (step). S143). Here, when the number of medals paid out is not "0" (= when a small winning combination is established), the number of possible winnings in the RB is decremented by "1" (step S144). Specifically, the process of subtracting "1" from the value of the above-mentioned RB winning count counter and updating it is performed.

Next, it is determined whether or not the RB operation is completed (step S145). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the updated RB winning count counter is "0", and if it is "0", it is determined that the RB operation is completed, and if it is not "0", it is determined that the RB operation is continued. Perform processing. Here, if it is determined that the RB operation has ended, or if it is determined in step S142 that the number of games that can be played during the RB is "0", the RB operation state flag is cleared (step S146). Specifically, the process of updating bit 4 of the operating state flag storage area to "0" is performed. Next, the waiting time at the end of RB operation is set (step S147). Specifically, the process of setting "0" = "00000000B" in the B register and "5" = "00000101B" in the C register is performed. Next, the waiting time waiting process described below is performed (step S148), and the process returns. If it is determined in step S143 that the number of medals paid out is "0", the product returns without performing the processes of steps S144 to S148, and if it is determined in step S145 that the RB operation is continued, the RB operation is continued. The process returns without performing the processes of steps S146 to S148.

In the waiting time waiting process, as shown in FIG. 41 (C), first, it is determined whether or not the waiting time has elapsed (step S151). Specifically, the value of the BC register is determined, and when the B register value = "0" and the C register value = "0", it is determined that the waiting time has elapsed, and in other cases, the waiting time has elapsed. Judge that it is not done. Here, if the waiting time has not elapsed, interrupt waiting processing is performed (step S152). In this interrupt waiting process, as shown in FIG. 41 (D), an interrupt counter value is acquired (step S161). Specifically, among the 16-bit counter values in the interrupt counter set in the predetermined storage area of the RAM 63 (here, two address areas of "F02BH" and "F02CH"), the lower 8 bits The process of setting the counter value data (value stored in "F02CH") in the A register is performed. Then, it waits in that state until the interrupt counter value changes (the interrupt counter value is updated in step MT13 of the timer interrupt process described later) (step S162). Specifically, the operation process of subtracting the counter value stored in "F02C" from the A register value is executed, and if the operation result is "0" (zero flag = "1"), the interrupt counter value changes. It is determined that there is none, and if the operation result is not "0" (if the zero flag = "0"), it is determined that the interrupt counter value has changed. After executing this interrupt wait process, the wait time is updated (the value of the C register is subtracted by "1") (step S153), and the process returns to step S151.

With the return from the RB operation management process, the process proceeds to step S116 of FIG. 40, and the RT transition process is executed. In this RT transition process, as shown in FIG. 42, it is determined whether or not it is set to non-RT (step S171), and if it is not set to non-RT, it is determined whether or not it is set to RT1. (Step S172). Here, if it is set to RT1, it is determined whether or not the replay combination 5 (RT2 transition RP) is established (step S173), and if it is established, it is set to RT2 (step S174). Return. On the other hand, in the determination in step S172, if it is not set in RT1, it is determined whether or not it is set in RT2 (step S175). Here, if it is set to RT2, it is determined whether or not the replay combination 6 (RT3 transition RP) is established (step S176), and if it is established, it is set to RT3 (step S177). Return. Further, in the determination of step S176, if the re-game combination 6 is not established, it is determined whether or not the re-game combination 3 or 4 (RT1 transition RP) is established (step S178), and the re-game combination 6 is established. If so, set to RT1 (step S179) and return.

Further, in the determination in step S175, if it is not set to RT2, it is determined whether or not it is set to RT3 (step S180). Here, if it is set to RT3, it is determined whether or not the replay combination 3 or 4 (RT1 transition RP) is established (step S178), and if it is established, it is set to RT1 (step S179). ), Return. On the other hand, in the determination of step S180, if it is not set to RT3, it is determined whether or not it is set to RT4 (step S181). Here, if it is set to RT4, it is determined whether or not the BB combination is established (step S182), and if it is established, it is set to RT5 (step S183) and returns, and it is not established. If so, the RT4 setting is maintained and the product returns. Further, in the determination in step S181, if it is not set to RT4 (in this case, it is set to RT5), it is determined whether or not the number of game medals paid out during BB exceeds "450" (in this case, it is set to RT5). Step S184), if it exceeds, it is set to non-RT and returns (step S185), and if it does not exceed, the setting of RT5 is maintained and returned.

Further, if it is set to non-RT in the determination in step S171, or if the replay combination 3 or 4 is not established in the determination in step S178, it is determined whether or not the specific symbol is stopped and displayed. Then (step S186), if the stop display is displayed, set to RT1 and return. On the other hand, if the specific symbol is not stopped and displayed, or if the re-game combination 5 is not established in the determination in step S173, whether or not the BB combination is won in the game (determination of the role of the accessory). Whether or not the result number 1 has been selected) is determined (step S188). Here, if the BB combination is won, it is determined whether or not the BB combination is established (step S189), and if it is not established, it is set to RT4 (step S190) and the return is established. If so, it is set to RT5 (step S191) and returns. If the BB combination has not been won, the RT state setting is maintained and the game returns.

With the return from the RT transition process, the process proceeds to step S117 of FIG. 40, and it is determined which of the game modes 0 to 7 is set. Then, according to the set game mode, the game mode 0 (all stops) process (step S118), the game mode 1 (all stops) process (step S119), and the game mode 2 (all stops) process (step S120). , Game mode 3 (all stops) processing (step S121), game mode 4 (all stops) processing (step S122), game mode 5 (all stops) processing (step S123), game mode 6 (all stops) processing (step) S124), game mode 7 (all stops) processing (step S125) is performed.

In the game mode 0 (all stops) process, as shown in FIG. 43 (A), first, it is determined whether or not the BB combination has been won in the game (step S201). Here, if the BB combination is won, it is determined whether or not the BB combination is established (step S202), and if it is established, the game mode is set to 5 (step S203) and the return is established. If not, the game mode is set to 4 (step S204) and the game returns. On the other hand, if the BB combination is not won, it is determined whether or not the number of AT stocks is larger than "0" (step S205). Here, when the number of AT stocks is larger than "0", the number of AT stocks is subtracted by "1" (step S206), and the precursor counter (RAM 63 for managing the precursor G number selected in the AT precursor G number lottery). The counter G number selected in the AT precursor G number lottery is set in the counter) set in the predetermined storage area of the above (step S207), set to the game mode 1 (step S208), and returned. On the other hand, in the determination of step S205, when the number of AT stocks is "0", the processing of steps S206 to S208 returns to the process.

In the game mode 1 (all stop) process, as shown in FIG. 43 (B), first, it is determined whether or not the BB combination has been won in the game (step S211). Here, if the BB combination is won, it is determined whether or not the BB combination is established (step S212), and if it is established, the game mode is set to 7 (step S213), and the number of AT stocks is further increased. Is added by "1" (step S214) and returned, and if it is not established, the game mode is set to 6 (step S215) and returned. On the other hand, if the BB combination is not won, the value of the precursor counter is subtracted by "1" (step S216), and it is determined whether or not the value of the precursor counter is "0" (step S217). Here, if the value of the precursor counter is "0", it is set to the game mode 2 (step S218) and returns, and if the value of the precursor counter is not "0", the setting of the game mode 1 is maintained. And return.

In the game mode 2 (all stop) process, as shown in FIG. 43 (C), first, it is determined whether or not the BB combination has been won in the game (step S221). Here, if the BB combination is won, it is determined whether or not the BB combination is established (step S222), and if it is established, the game mode is set to 7 (step S223), and the number of AT stocks is further increased. Is added by "1" (step S224) and returned, and if it is not established, the game mode is set to 6 (step S225) and returned. On the other hand, if the BB combination has not been won, it is determined whether or not it is set to RT3 (step S226). Here, if it is set to RT3, it is set to game mode 3 (step S228), further, the value of the AT counter is set to "50" (step S229), and it returns. If it is not set to RT3, it returns. It is determined whether or not the push order by the player matches the push order of the notified push order instruction number (step S227). Here, if they do not match, the game mode is set to 3 (step S228), the AT counter value is set to "50" (step S229), and a return is made. If they match, the game mode is set. It returns without changing the setting and without setting the AT counter.

In the game mode 3 (all stop) process, as shown in FIG. 44 (A), first, it is determined whether or not the BB combination has been won in the game (step S231). Here, if the BB combination is won, it is determined whether or not the BB combination is established (step S232), and if it is established, the game mode is set to 7 (step S223), and the number of AT stocks is further increased. Is added by "1" (step S234) and returned, and if it is not established, the game mode is set to 6 (step S235) and returned. On the other hand, if the BB combination has not been won, it is determined whether or not the BB combination has been won in the push order guessing game lottery (step S236). Here, if the player has won, the push order by the player is not the selected push order instruction number (push order instruction number for the push order guessing game (A7 to A9)), but is normally stored for judgment. It is determined whether or not the push order of the push order instruction numbers (A1 to A6) of (A1 to A6) is matched (step S237), and if they are the same, the number of AT stocks is added by "1" (step S238). The process proceeds to S239, and if they do not match, the process proceeds to step S239 as it is. In this step S239, the value of the AT counter is subtracted by "1". Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the AT counter is "0" (step S240), and when the value of the AT counter is "0", it is determined whether or not the number of AT stocks is larger than "0". (Step S241). Here, if the number of AT stocks is larger than "0", the number of AT stocks is subtracted by "1" (step S242), the precursor counter is set to "1" (step S243), and the game mode is set to 1. (Step S244) Return. On the other hand, in the determination of step S241, if the number of AT stocks is "0", the processing of steps S242 to S244 is not performed, the game mode is set to 0 (step S245), the game returns, and the determination of step S240 is performed. If the value of the AT counter is not "0", the processes of steps S241 to S245 are not performed, and the game mode 3 setting is maintained and the game returns.

In the game mode 4 (all stop) process, as shown in FIG. 44 (B), first, it is determined whether or not the BB combination is established in the game (step S251), and if it is established, the game mode is established. It is set to 5 (step S252) and returns, and if it is not established, the processes of steps S251 and S252 are not performed, and the setting of the game mode 4 is maintained and returned.

In the game mode 5 (all stops) process, as shown in FIG. 44 (C), first, it is determined whether or not the number of game medals paid out in the BB exceeds "450" (step S261), and the number is exceeded. In this case, it is determined whether or not the number of AT stocks is larger than "0" (step S262). Here, if the number of AT stocks is larger than "0", the number of AT stocks is subtracted by "1" (step S263), the game mode is set to 2 (step S264), and the game returns, and the number of AT stocks is "0". In the case of, the process of steps S263 and S264 is not performed, the game mode is set to 0 (step S265), and the game returns. Further, in the determination of step S261, if the number of game medals paid out does not exceed "450", the processing of steps S262 to S265 is not performed, and the setting of the game mode 5 is maintained and the game returns.

In the game mode 6 (all stop) process, as shown in FIG. 45 (A), first, it is determined whether or not the BB combination is established in the game (step S271), and if it is established, the game mode is established. It is set to 7 (step S272), the number of AT stocks is further added by "1" (step S273), and the return is made. Maintain and return.

In the game mode 7 (all stop) process, as shown in FIG. 45 (B), first, it is determined whether or not the number of game medals paid out in the BB exceeds "450" (step S281), and the number is exceeded. In that case, the number of AT stocks is subtracted by "1" (step S282), the game mode is set to 2 (step S283), and the game returns. Maintain the setting of and return.

With the return from the game mode 0 (all stops) process to the game mode 7 (all stops) process described above, the game end check process shown in FIG. 40 is also completed and returned. The return from the game end check process returns to step S1 of FIG. 33, and the game progress control process is repeated.

<Timer interrupt processing>
In the present embodiment, processing such as reading each game operation signal output in response to a game operation such as a bet operation performed by the player, detecting (confirming) the signal level, transmitting each control command, and reel drive control. However, it is performed by a timer interrupt process that is executed every predetermined fixed time (for example, 2.235 milliseconds). In this timer interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 46 (A), first, interrupt initial processing (register save, interrupt prohibition, etc.) is performed (step MT11), and then whether or not a power failure is detected. (Step MT12). Here, if a power off is detected, a power off process is performed (step MT24). In the power off processing, registers are saved, stack pointers are saved, interrupt states are saved, and the like. In addition, processing such as holding information on the combination determination result and RT state stored in a predetermined storage area, calculating a checksum, and storing the checksum is also performed.

On the other hand, if the power failure is not detected, the interrupt counter value is updated (subtracted by "1") (step MT13), and the timer is further measured (step MT14). This timer measurement performs subtraction and addition processing of the timer value of an arbitrary timer (the above-mentioned minimum game time timer, winning information output period timer, etc.) set in the above-mentioned game progress control process. Next, the input port is read (step MT15). In reading the input port, the signal level of each game operation signal and the like input to the input port is read and stored, and the signal level is determined.

Next, a reel drive control process for controlling the drive of the reels 3a to 3c (acceleration of rotation, deceleration, maintenance of constant speed, maintenance of stop, etc.) is performed (step MT16). In this reel drive control process, a reel drive pulse output indicating the timing of switching the output phase (excitation phase) of the stepping motor according to the reel drive state (stop, reel rotation standby, acceleration, constant speed, deceleration, etc.) Processing such as updating the counter value and acquiring, updating, and outputting the reel drive pulse data for driving the stepping motor is performed. In the next step MT17, it is determined whether or not the reel drive control process has been executed for all reels, and if not, the process returns to step MT16 and the reel drive control process is performed again. On the other hand, when executed on all reels, a port output process for exciting output of the reel, hopper, blocker, etc. is performed (step MT18), and a control command for transmitting a control command stored in the command buffer (CB) is transmitted. The transmission process is performed (step MT19).

Next, the process proceeds to step MT20, the outer end signal (external signal) data stored in the predetermined storage area is read out, and the outer end signal is output. Next, the test signal output processing described below is executed (step MT21), and after the execution, the random number used for the winning combination lottery or the like is updated (step MT22), and the interrupt end processing (register return, interrupt) is performed. Permission, etc.) is performed (step MT23), and an interrupt return is performed. As a change example (for example, an example corresponding to the above-mentioned change examples K5 and K6 (see FIGS. 39 (B) and (C)) of the reel rotation start preparation process), as shown in FIG. 46 (B). After processing the outer end signal output of step MT20, it is determined whether or not the slot machine 1 has the test specifications (step MT201), and if it is determined that the slot machine 1 does not have the test specifications (mass production specifications), the test signal or the like is output. The process may not be executed (the test signal is not output). Whether or not it is a test specification can be determined based on the ON / OFF state of the flag during the test, but in addition to this, various methods described above can be adopted.

In the test signal output processing, as shown in FIG. 47, the output data of the operating state test signal is set (step MT31). Specifically, the process of setting the data of the operating state flag stored in the operating state flag storage area (see FIG. 27A) in the A register is performed. Next, the operating state test signal is output (step MT32). Specifically, the process of outputting (setting) the data of the operating state flag set in the A register to the test output port PO8 is performed. As a result, the operating state test signal carrying the operating state flag information is output (transmitted) from the test output port PO8 to the test apparatus. As a change example, it does not have an address area for collectively storing data of each operation state flag (re-game operation state flag, BB operation state flag, and RB operation state flag) such as an operation state flag storage area. , The data of each operating state flag is stored in a separate address area, and those data are combined with the data of one operating state flag by arithmetic processing using a register and output from the test output port PO8. May be good.

Next, the value of the winning information output period timer is acquired (step MT33). Specifically, the process of setting the timer value data of the winning information output period timer stored in the winning information output period timer storage area (see FIG. 27 (F)) in the A register is performed. Since the timer value of the winning information output period timer is subtracted by "1" in the above-mentioned step MT14, in the processing of the above-mentioned step MT33 in the first timer interrupt processing after the timer value is set to "25". , The timer value is "24". Next, it is determined whether or not it is the output timing of the winning information (step MT34). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the timer value set in the A register is "0" (zero flag = "1"), and if it is "0", it is determined that it is not the output timing of the winning information, and " If it is not "0", it is determined that it is the output timing of the winning information.

Here, when it is determined that it is the output timing of the winning information, it is determined whether or not it is the output timing of the accessory winning information (step MT35). Specifically, when "12.5" is subtracted from the timer value set in the A register in step MT33 and the calculation result is larger than "0" (the timer value of the winning information output period timer is "24 to". When it is "13" (the carry flag (set to a specific bit in the F register so that the data of "1" is stored when the result of the operation is carried or carried) is "0". (When there is)) is determined to be the output timing of the winning information, and when the calculation result is smaller than "0" (when the timer value of the winning information output period timer is "12 to 1" (the carry flag is "1"). ”)) Is not the output timing of the winning information for the accessory.

Here, when it is determined that it is the output timing of the accessory winning information, the address of the accessory combination determination result number storage area (see FIG. 27 (D)) is set (step MT36). Specifically, the upper value "F0H" of the address value "F049H" of the accessory combination determination result number storage area is set in the H register, and the lower value "49H" of the address value "F049H" is set in the L register. Perform the processing to be performed. Next, the output data of the accessory winning information is set (step MT37). Specifically, the process of setting the data of the role determination result number of the accessory stored in the accessory combination determination result number storage area in the A register is performed. Further, the data of the identifier of the accessory is set (step MT38). Specifically, the process of setting bit 6 of the A register to "0" and bit 7 to "1" is performed. Then, the winning information test signal is output (step MT42). Specifically, the data set in the A register is output (set) to the test output port PO7. As a result, the winning information test signal carrying the actual winning information (here, the accessory winning information) is output (transmitted) from the test output port PO7 to the test device.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step MT35 that it is not the output timing of the winning information, the process proceeds to step MT39, and the address of the winning / RP winning combination result number storage area (see FIG. 27C) is set. .. Specifically, the upper value "F0H" of the address value "F048H" of the winning / RP combination determination result number storage area is set in the H register, and the lower value "48H" of the address value "F048H" is set in the L register. Perform the setting process. Next, the output data of the winning / RP winning information is set (step MT40). Specifically, the process of setting the data of the winning / RP winning combination decision result number stored in the winning / RP winning combination determination result number storage area in the A register is performed. Further, the winning / RP identifier data is set (step MT41). Specifically, the process of setting bit 6 of the A register to "1" and bit 7 to "0" is performed. Then, the winning information test signal is output (step MT42). Specifically, the data set in the A register is output (set) to the test output port PO7. As a result, the winning information test signal carrying the actual winning information (here, the winning / RP winning information) is output (transmitted) from the test output port PO7 to the test device.

If it is determined in step MT34 that it is not the timing to output the winning information, the process proceeds to step MT42 without performing the processing of steps MT35 to MT41, and the winning information test signal is output. In this case, the winning information test signal (signal of "00000000B") on which the actual winning information is not supported is output (transmitted) from the test output port PO7 to the test apparatus. As a modification example, if it is determined in the above step MT34 that it is not the output timing of the winning information, the winning information test signal may not be output (returns directly from the step MT34).

As described above, in the present embodiment, in the period when the value of the winning information output period timer is from "24" to "13", the winning information test signal carrying the winning information of the accessory is output, and the winning information output period timer is output. In the period when the value of is from "12" to "1", the winning information test signal carrying the winning / RP winning information is output. Further, during the period when the value of the winning information output period timer is "0", the winning information test signal in which the actual winning information is not supported is output. As described above, the winning information output period timer is set when it is determined that the slot machine 1 has the test specifications, and is not set when it is determined that the slot machine 1 has the mass production specifications (the timer value is always "0"). Therefore, in the mass production specifications, the winning information test signal carrying the actual winning information is not output. Therefore, it is possible to prevent illegal acquisition of winning information from the winning information test signal.

As a modification of the test signal output processing (for example, an example corresponding to the reel rotation start preparation processing (modification example K5) described above), the test signal output processing (modification example L1) shown in FIG. 48 is executed. May be good. Steps MT31A to MT34A and MT35A to MT42A in the test signal output process (modification example L1) are the same as steps MT31 to MT34 and MT35 to MT42 in the test signal output process. The difference is that in step MT34A, when it is determined that it is the output timing of the winning information, it is determined whether or not the slot machine 1 has the test specifications (the specific determination method may be the various methods described above. ) (Step MT3401A), and if it is determined that it is not a test specification (mass production specification), the output data of dummy winning information (for example, "11111111B") is set (step MT3402A). That is, in this test signal output processing (modification example L1), if it is determined that the specifications are mass production even at the output timing of the winning information, the winning information test signal carrying the dummy winning information is output. It has become so.

Further, as another modification of the test signal output processing (for example, an example corresponding to the reel rotation start preparation processing (modification example K6) described above), the test signal output processing (modification example L2) shown in FIG. 49 is executed. You may try to do it. Steps MT31A to MT34A and MT42A in the test signal output process (modification example L2) are the same as steps MT31 to MT34 and MT42 in the test signal output process. Further, in step MT34B, when it is determined that it is the output timing of the winning information, it is determined whether or not the slot machine 1 has the test specifications (the specific determination method may be the various methods described above). (Step MT3401B), if it is determined that the specification is not the test specification (mass production specification), the output data of the dummy winning information is set (step MT3402B), which is the same as the test signal output processing (modification example L1). Is. The difference is that the processes of steps MT3403B to MT3406B are performed.

That is, if it is determined in step MT3401B that the test specifications are met, the process proceeds to step MT3403B, and the address of the accessory winning information storage area (see FIG. 29B) is set (step MT3403B). Specifically, the process of setting the upper value "F0H" of the address value "F04DH" of the accessory winning information storage area in the H register and setting the lower value "4DH" of the address value "F04DH" in the L register. I do. Next, it is determined whether or not it is the output timing of the prize winning information (step MT3404B), and if it is not the output timing of the prize winning information, the winning / RP winning information storage area (see FIG. 29 (A)). The address of (step MT3405B) is set. Specifically, the upper value "F0H" of the address value "F04CH" of the winning / RP winning information storage area is set in the H register, and the lower value "4CH" of the address value "F04CH" is set in the L register. Perform processing. Then, the output data of the winning information is set (step MT3406B). Specifically, when the address of the accessory winning information storage area is set in the HL register, the data of the accessory winning information is set in the A register, and the address of the winning / RP winning information storage area is set in the HL register. If so, the process of setting the winning / RP winning information data in the A register is performed. As described above, in the test signal output processing (modification example L2), since the winning information data to which the identifier data has already been added is directly set and output, the processing for setting the identifier data is not performed.

Other control processes performed by the main control means 100 include a main control power-on process and a main control setting change process. The main control power-on process is a process performed when the power supply to the main control means 100 is started (when the power is turned on), and the temporary stack pointer is set, the checksum is calculated, and the check is performed. It is processed so that the power restoration process can be performed. Further, it is determined whether or not the setting key type switch 83 is turned on, and if it is turned on, the process proceeds to the main control setting change process described below. On the other hand, when the setting key type switch 83 is not turned on, the stack pointer is returned and the interrupt is activated, and further, information on the combination determination result stored in the predetermined storage area when the power is turned off and the like. The game is played based on information about the RT state and the like.

The main control setting change process is a process executed when the setting key type switch 83 is turned on in the above-mentioned main control power-on process, and the setting change command operation of the setting change switch 84 by a game clerk or the like is confirmed. In this case, the stack pointer is initialized, the interrupt is initialized, and the game information saved when the power is turned off is cleared. In addition, the set value set when the setting is changed is stored in a predetermined storage area, and the process shifts to the game progress control process described above.

<Program start processing>
Next, the program start process executed by the sub-main control means 200A will be described. As shown in FIG. 50 (A), this program start process is started when the power is turned on, first, interrupts are prohibited (step U11), and then various initialization processes (initialization of CPU and RAM) are performed. Conversion, calculation of checksum, etc.) is performed (step U12). Next, it is determined whether or not the checksum value calculated when the power is turned on and the checksum value calculated and stored when the power is turned off match (step U13).

Here, if the two match, it is determined whether or not the state has recovered from the state in which the power was cut off during the one command processing of the sub-main loop processing described below (hereinafter referred to as "complete recovery") (hereinafter referred to as "complete recovery"). Step U14), if it is a complete recovery, interrupt is permitted (step U15), and the process returns to the one command process that was being executed when the power was turned off. On the other hand, in the determination in step U13, if the checksums do not match, the RAM is cleared (step U16), and the process proceeds to the sub-main loop process. Further, in the determination in step U14, if it is not a complete recovery, the sub-main loop processing is directly performed from there.

<Sub-main loop processing>
In the sub-main loop processing, as shown in FIG. 50 (B), the WDT (watchdog timer) is first cleared (step V11), and then the WDT operation is started (step V12). Next, interrupt is permitted (step V13), processing is performed every 16 ms (monitoring whether or not the image display device is normally started, timing the power-on time, and signal data (command) to be transmitted to the image display device are predetermined. Storage in the storage area (command buffer), etc.) is performed (step V14).

Next, one command process (a process based on a control command from the main control means 100, an example of which will be described later) is performed (step V15), and it is determined whether or not 16 ms (time can be set arbitrarily) has elapsed. (Step V16) If it has not passed, the process returns to step V15. On the other hand, if 16 ms has passed, the process returns to step V11.

<Power off processing>
The power-off process shown in FIG. 50 (C) is a process started when the sub-main control means 200A detects a power-off. First, the WDT is stopped (step W11), and then the program start process is in progress. Whether or not it is determined (step W12). Here, if the program start process is not in progress, the checksum is calculated (step W13), and various data (checksum calculation result, program address, etc.) are saved (retained) (step W14). Proceed to step W15. On the other hand, in the determination of step W12, if the program start process is in progress, the process proceeds to step W15 without performing the processes of steps W13 and W14.

In this step W15, it is determined whether or not 500 ms (time can be set arbitrarily) has elapsed. Here, if 500 ms has passed, the power off processing is terminated. On the other hand, if 500 ms has not passed, it is determined whether or not the power is restored (step W16). Here, if the power is restored, the number of momentary interruptions is updated (step W17), the WDT operation is started (step W18), and the process returns to the process being executed when the power is turned off. On the other hand, in the determination of step W16, if the power supply is not restored, the process returns to step W15.

<1 command processing>
In the one command process shown in FIG. 51 (A), it is determined whether or not a control command (hereinafter referred to as a “special combination command”) including information on the combination combination result number of the accessory has been received (step V101). Here, when the special combination command is received, the process proceeds to step V102 and the process at the start lever is executed. In this process at the start lever, as shown in FIG. 51 (B), first, it is determined whether or not the push order instruction number is any of A1 to A9 (push order prior to the above-mentioned special combination command). Since a control command including the information of the instruction number has been received, a determination is made based on the control command (step V121). Here, when the push order instruction number is any of A1 to A9, the push order navigation effect corresponding to the received push order instruction number is performed (step V122), and the process returns. On the other hand, when the push order instruction numbers are not A1 to A9 (in the case of A0), the process returns without performing the process of step V122.

With the return from the processing at the start lever, the one-command processing shown in FIG. 51 (A) is also completed and returned. On the other hand, in the determination of step V101 of the one command process, if the special combination command is not received, the process proceeds to step V103, and a control command including information on the start of reel rotation (hereinafter referred to as "reel rotation start command"). Is received or not. Here, when the reel rotation start command is received, the process proceeds to step V104, processing such as switching of the effect is performed, and the process returns. On the other hand, if the reel rotation start command has not been received, the process proceeds to step V105, and has the control command including the information of the first cylinder stop reception (hereinafter referred to as "the first cylinder stop reception command") been received? Judge whether or not. Here, when the first body stop acceptance command is received, the process proceeds to step V106 to perform the process at the time of the first body stop acceptance.

In the process at the time of receiving the first body stop, as shown in FIG. 52 (A), first, it is determined whether or not the push order navigation effect is being executed (step V141). Here, if the push order navigation effect is not being executed, the process at the time of receiving the first torso stop is completed and the process returns. On the other hand, when the push order navigation effect is being executed, the process proceeds to step V142, and it is determined whether or not the first push order executed by the player is the correct answer. Here, if the answer is correct in the push order, the process proceeds to step V143, a process of switching the push order navigation effect (including erasing the display of the first push order, etc.) is performed, and the process returns. On the other hand, if the push order is incorrect, the process proceeds to step V144 to end the push order navigation effect, execute a failure effect (effect to notify that the push order is incorrect) (step V145), and return. do.

With the return from the processing at the time of receiving the first body stop, the one command processing shown in FIG. 51 (A) is also completed and returned. On the other hand, in the determination of step V105 of the one command process, if the first cylinder stop acceptance command is not received, the process proceeds to step V107 and the control command including the information of the first cylinder stop (hereinafter, "first"). It is determined whether or not a command (referred to as a rotation stop command) has been received. Here, when the first body stop command is received, the process proceeds to step V108, processing of the winning expectation display (including the stop sound, etc.) is performed, and the process returns. On the other hand, if the first body stop command has not been received, the process proceeds to step V109, and a control command including information on the second body stop reception (hereinafter referred to as "second body stop reception command") is received. Determine if it has been done. Here, when the second body stop acceptance command is received, the process proceeds to step V110, and the process at the time of the second body stop acceptance is performed.

In the process at the time of receiving the second body stop, as shown in FIG. 52 (B), first, it is determined whether or not the push order navigation effect is being executed (step V151). Here, if the push order navigation effect is not being executed, the process at the time of accepting the second body stop is completed and the process returns. On the other hand, when the push order navigation effect is being executed, the process proceeds to step V152, and it is determined whether or not the second push order executed by the player is the correct answer. Here, if the answer is correct in the push order, the process proceeds to step V153, a process of switching the push order navigation effect (including erasing the display of the second push order, etc.) is performed, and the process returns. On the other hand, if the push order is incorrect, the process proceeds to step V154 to end the push order navigation effect, execute the failure effect (step V155), and return.

With the return from the processing at the time of receiving the second body stop, the one command processing shown in FIG. 51 (A) is also completed and returned. On the other hand, in the determination of step V109 of the one command process, if the second cylinder stop acceptance command is not received, the process proceeds to step V111 and the control command including the information of the second cylinder stop (hereinafter, "second"). It is determined whether or not a command (referred to as a rotation stop command) has been received. Here, when the second body stop command is received, the process proceeds to step V112, processing of the winning expectation display (including the case of outputting the stop sound, the tempai sound, etc.), and the return. On the other hand, if the second body stop command has not been received, the process proceeds to step V113, and a control command including information on the third body stop reception (hereinafter referred to as "third body stop reception command") is received. Determine if it has been done. Here, when the third body stop acceptance command is received, the process proceeds to step V114, and the process at the time of the third body stop acceptance is performed.

In the process at the time of receiving the third body stop, as shown in FIG. 52 (C), first, it is determined whether or not the push order navigation effect is being executed (step V161). Here, if the push order navigation effect is not being executed, the process at the time of accepting the third body stop is completed and the process returns. On the other hand, if the push order navigation effect is being executed, the process proceeds to step V162 to end the push order navigation effect and return.

With the return from the processing at the time of receiving the third body stop, the one command processing shown in FIG. 51 (A) is also completed and returned. On the other hand, in the determination of step V113 of the one command process, if the third cylinder stop acceptance command has not been received, the process proceeds to step V115 and the control command including the information of the third cylinder stop (hereinafter, "third"). It is determined whether or not a rotation stop command) has been received. Here, when the third body stop command is received, the process proceeds to step V116, processing of the winning expectation display (including the stop sound and the like) is performed, and the process returns. On the other hand, if the third body stop command has not been received, the process proceeds to step V117, and it is determined whether or not a control command (all times body stop command) including information on the stop display symbol has been received. Here, when the all-turn body stop command is received, the process proceeds to step V118, processing such as switching of the effect is performed, and the process returns. On the other hand, if the command to stop the trunk all times is not received, the command returns as it is.

<< Second Embodiment >>
Hereinafter, the slot machine according to the second embodiment (hereinafter, also referred to as “the slot machine of the second embodiment”) will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 to 55. The slot machine of the second form has the same configuration of the main part as the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment described above, and the description of the common part will be omitted. Further, the flow of the main control process is also the same as that of the first embodiment, and the description thereof will be omitted.

<Circuit configuration of main control board (difference between test specifications and mass production specifications)>
In the slot machine 1 described above, the potential of the terminal PI0 differs between the test specification and the mass production specification by connecting a pull-up resistor, a pull-down resistor, or a voltage dividing circuit to the terminal PI0 of the main IC. (See FIGS. 24 and 25). On the other hand, in the slot machine of the second form, as shown in FIG. 53, in the test specifications, the terminal PI0 of the main IC and the terminal Q7 of the test IC2 (the terminal that outputs the signal from the terminal D7 of the main IC). ) Is provided (hereinafter referred to as "special circuit") (see the figure (A)), and such a special circuit is not provided in the mass-produced specifications because the test IC2 is not mounted (the same). It is configured as shown in FIG. (B).

<Test signal output processing>
In the slot machine 1 described above, the control process for outputting each test signal of the symbol stop test signal, the operating state test signal, and the winning information test signal to the test device in the case of the test specifications has been described. In the slot machine of the form, in addition to this, the control process when outputting the RT information test signal for transmitting the RT setting state will also be described. Regarding the output of the symbol stop test signal, the same control processing as that of the first embodiment (the symbol stop test signal output processing shown in FIG. 37) is performed, but the output of the operating state test signal and the winning information test signal is the first. A control process having a content different from that of the first embodiment is performed. Hereinafter, control processing related to the output of the RT information test signal, the operating state test signal, and the winning information test signal will be described.

First, in the present embodiment, the modified example J1 shown in FIG. 32 (B) is adopted as the test specification determination preparatory process to be executed when the power is turned on. That is, when the power is turned on, no particular process is performed to determine whether the specifications are test specifications or mass production specifications. Further, at the start of the game (before accepting the start lever operation), as shown in FIG. 54 (A), the process of setting the RT information output time machine identification flag (step S2011) is executed (for example, the game start shown in FIG. 34). Execute as one step in the process). The RT information output time identification flag is a flag set in a predetermined storage area (8-bit storage area) such as RAM to identify whether or not it is the timing to output the RT information test signal, and is set. The hour is set to a value of "10000000B". Further, after setting the RT information output time identification flag, as shown in FIG. 54 (B), every time a timer interrupt is executed, a process (step S2021) of updating the RT information output time identification flag is executed (for example,). It is executed as a process in the timer measurement (step MT14) in the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 46). The update process at this time is performed as a process of shifting the value of the RT information output time identification flag to the right by one bit and maintaining the value of bit 7. Further, at the time of receiving the start lever operation, as shown in FIG. 54 (C), the process (step S2031) of clearing the RT information output time identification flag (setting to the value of "00000000B") is executed (for example, FIG. 39 (A) is performed between the processes of steps S102E and S104E of the reel rotation start preparation process (modification example K5)).

The value of the RT information output time identification flag set in this way is set to "10000000B" each time the timer interrupt process is executed, from the time it is set at the start of the game until it is cleared when the start lever operation is accepted. (At the time of setting)-> "11000000B"-> "11100000B"-> "11110000B"-> "11111000B"-> "11111100B"-> "11111110B"-> "11111111B"-> "11111111B" ... Until then, the value of "00000000B" is updated to be maintained as it is. This RT information output time identification flag is used to identify whether or not it is the output timing of the RT information test signal in the test signal output processing described below.

The test signal output process in the present embodiment replaces the test signal output process (see FIG. 47) executed in step MT21 of the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 46, and is as shown in FIG. 55. First, it is determined whether or not the inspection signal is ON-input (step MT131). The inspection signal is a "0" or "1" signal output from the terminal D7 of the main IC to the terminal D7, the terminal Q7 of the test IC2, and the terminal PI0 via the special circuit, and is the present embodiment. Then, the operation state test signal bit 7 (usually set to "0") is set to "1" (hereinafter referred to as "inspection signal is set to ON") and output to obtain "1". By outputting the inspection signal, setting it to "0" (hereinafter referred to as "setting the inspection signal to OFF"), and outputting it, the inspection signal of "0" is output (hereinafter, in step MT131). , The potential of the terminal PI0 is read out, and if it is "1" (H level), it is determined that the inspection signal is ON input, and if it is "0" (L level), it is determined that the inspection signal is OFF input.

Here, if it is determined that the inspection signal is ON input, the process proceeds to step MT132, and the winning information output prohibition flag is set to ON. The winning information output prohibition flag is a flag set in a predetermined bit (for example, bit 0) of a predetermined storage area such as RAM, for determining whether or not the actual output of winning information is prohibited. The inspection signal is input ON only during the period from step MT135 to step MT148, which will be described later, and the inspection signal is usually input OFF during the other periods. Therefore, the winning information output prohibition flag is set to ON when the potential of the terminal PI0 is forcibly set to "1" due to a fraudulent act or the like. In the present embodiment, once the winning information output prohibition flag is set to ON, the winning information test signal carrying the actual winning information is not output, so that the winning information is illegally acquired. It can be prevented. When the winning information output prohibition flag is set to ON, an error notification may be performed. Further, when a predetermined error canceling operation is performed along with the error notification, the winning information output prohibition flag may be set to OFF.

After setting the winning information output prohibition flag to ON in step MT132, or if it is determined in step MT131 that the inspection signal is OFF input, the process proceeds to step MT133 to determine whether or not the winning information output prohibition flag is ON. .. Here, when it is determined that the winning information output prohibition flag is not ON (OFF), it is determined whether or not it is the output start timing of the RT information or the winning information (step MT134). Specifically, when the value of the RT information output time identification flag is "10000000B", it is determined that it is the RT information output start timing, and when the value of the winning information output period timer is "24", the winning information is output. It is determined that it is the start timing, and in other cases, it is determined that it is not the output start timing. Here, if it is determined that it is the output start timing of the RT information or the winning information, the process proceeds to step MT135, the operation state test signal with the inspection signal set to ON is output, and the process proceeds to step MT136. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the output start timing of the RT information or the winning information, the process proceeds to step MT136 without performing the processing of step MT135.

In this step MT136, it is determined whether or not the winning information output flag is ON. The winning information output flag is a flag set in a predetermined bit (for example, bit 0) of a predetermined storage area such as RAM, and is a flag for determining whether or not the actual winning information is permitted to be output. , It is set to ON in step MT138 described later, and is set to OFF in step MT145. Here, if it is determined that the winning information output flag is not ON (OFF), it is determined whether or not the inspection signal is ON input (step MT137), and if it is determined that the inspection signal is ON input, the winning information is output. The flag is set to ON (step MT138), and the process proceeds to step MT139. On the other hand, if it is determined in step MT136 that the winning information output flag is not ON, the process proceeds to step MT139 without performing the processes of steps MT137 and MT138.

In this step MT139, the output data of RT information is set. Specifically, a process of setting the data value of RT information stored in a predetermined storage area such as RAM in the A register is performed. Next, it is determined whether or not it is the output timing of RT information (step MT140). Specifically, when the value of the RT information output time identification flag is other than "00000000B", it is determined that it is the RT information output timing, and when the value of the winning information output period timer is "00000000B", the RT information is output. Judge that it is not the timing. Here, if it is determined that the RT information output timing is reached, the process proceeds to step MT147, and the RT information test signal is output. Specifically, the data set in the A register is output (set) to the test output port PO7. As a result, the RT information test signal carrying the RT information is output (transmitted) from the test output port PO7 to the test apparatus.

On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the RT information output timing, the process proceeds to step MT141, and the output data of the accessory winning information is set. Specifically, the process of setting the data of the role determination result number of the accessory stored in the accessory combination determination result number storage area (see FIG. 27 (D)) in the A register is performed. Next, it is determined whether or not it is the output timing of the accessory winning information (step MT142). Specifically, when the value of the winning information output period timer stored in the winning information output period timer storage area (see FIG. 27 (F)) is "24 to 13", it is the output timing of the accessory winning information. It is determined that there is, and if it is any other value, it is determined that it is not the output timing of the accessory winning information. Here, if it is determined that it is the output timing of the accessory winning information, the process proceeds to step MT147, and the accessory winning information test signal is output. Specifically, a process is performed in which the data of the identifier of the accessory is added to the data set in the A register and the data is output (set) to the test output port PO7. As a result, the accessory winning information test signal carrying the accessory winning information is output (transmitted) from the test output port PO7 to the test device. When the above-mentioned accessory winning information storage area (see FIG. 29 (B)) is provided, the accessory winning information data stored therein is set in the A register and stored in the test apparatus. It may be output.

On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the output timing of the accessory winning information, the process proceeds to step MT143, and the output data of the winning / RP winning information is set. Specifically, the process of setting the data of the winning / RP winning combination result number stored in the winning / RP winning combination decision result number storage area (see FIG. 27C) in the A register is performed. Next, it is determined whether or not it is the output timing of the winning / RP winning information (step MT144). Specifically, when the value of the winning information output period timer is "12 to 1", it is determined that it is the output timing of the winning / RP winning information, and when it is any other value, the winning / RP winning information is determined. Judge that it is not the output timing. Here, if it is determined that it is the output timing of the winning / RP winning information, the process proceeds to step MT147, and the winning / RP winning information test signal is output. Specifically, a process of adding the winning / RP identifier data to the data set in the A register and outputting (setting) it to the test output port PO7 is performed. As a result, the winning / RP winning information test signal carrying the winning / RP winning information is output (transmitted) from the test output port PO7 to the test device. When the above-mentioned winning / RP winning information storage area (see FIG. 29 (A)) is provided, the winning / RP winning information data stored there is set in the A register for the test. It may be output to the device.

On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the output timing of the winning / RP winning information, the process proceeds to step MT145, and the winning information output flag is set to OFF. Next, empty winning information is set. Specifically, the process of setting the data of "00000000B" in the A register as empty winning information is performed. Next, the process proceeds to step MT147, and a winning information test signal carrying empty winning information is output. Specifically, the process of outputting (setting) the data of "00000000B" set in the A register to the test output port PO7 is performed. As a result, the winning information test signal that does not carry the actual winning information is output (transmitted) from the test output port PO7 to the test device. Further, the operating state test signal in which the inspection signal is set to OFF is output (step MT148) and returned. If it is determined in step MT133 that the winning information output prohibition flag is ON, the process proceeds to step MT146 without performing the processing of steps MT134 to MT145, and in step MT137, the inspection signal is not input to ON. If it is determined, the process proceeds to step MT145 without performing the processes from steps MT138 to MT144.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the actual winning information is output only when the winning information output flag is set to ON and within the winning information output period. The winning information output flag outputs an operating state test signal with the inspection signal set to ON in the timer interrupt processing executed at the output start timing of RT information or winning information, and then in the same timer interrupt processing. Only when the inspection signal ON input is confirmed in, the setting is made from OFF to ON. Further, when the inspection signal ON input is confirmed at a timing other than the above timing, the winning information output prohibition flag is set to ON so that the actual winning information is not output. Therefore, even if the potential of the terminal PI0 is forcibly set to "1" and an attempt is made to illegally acquire the winning information by erroneously recognizing it as an inspection signal ON input, in order to output the actual winning information. , It is necessary to set the potential of the terminal PI0 to "1" at the above timing, but it is very difficult. As described above, in the slot machine of the present embodiment, it is extremely difficult to illegally acquire the actual winning information from the winning information test signal.

<Change mode>
Hereinafter, the modification mode will be described.
In the above embodiment, the control program for the symbol stop test signal output processing is stored in the second PRG area, but it may be stored in the first PRG area. In this case, it is preferable that the data of the stop reception designation tables T1 and T2 are also stored in the first PRG area. Further, the control program of the test signal output process (including each modification) in the timer interrupt process may be stored in the second PRG area, or a process for determining whether or not the test specifications are met. The control program (including each modification) may be stored in the second PRG area. Further, the winning information output period timer may be set in the second PRG area, and the control program for setting, updating, and clearing the timer value may be stored in the second PRG area.

In the above embodiment, the notification of the push order is executed from the time when the operation of the start lever is received until each reel is in the constant speed rotation state, but this time from the time when the operation of the start lever is received in the previous game. Since the time until the start lever operation is accepted in the game may be less than the minimum game time (especially there is a margin until the minimum game time elapses), the push order is immediately received even if the start lever operation is accepted. It is also possible to set the minimum game time for the next game and then notify the push order without notifying the player. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the time zone in which the stop switch cannot be operated even though the pressing order is notified.

Although not set in the above embodiment, a push order flag may be set as an index for identifying whether or not the push order can be notified (in the above embodiment, the game mode). It was identified whether or not the push order could be notified by.) When the push order flag is ON, it indicates that the push order can be notified, and when the push order flag is OFF, it indicates that the push order cannot be notified. By providing such a push order flag, it is possible to distinguish between a case where the push order can be notified and a case where the push order cannot be notified even in the same game mode. For example, even in game mode 0 (normal time), it is possible to set a situation in which the push order flag is turned ON and play a push order guessing game there. Further, in the above embodiment, game modes 2 (AT preparation) and 3 (AT) are managed as different game modes, but these are managed as one game mode, and whether the mode is in AT preparation or in AT. The AT flag may be set as an index for identifying whether the mode is set to. When the AT flag is ON, it indicates that the mode is in AT, and when the AT flag is OFF, it indicates that the mode is in preparation for AT.

In the above embodiment, after the push order notification by the WIN lamp 46j is started, each information of the push order instruction number, the effect group number, and the role determination result number of the accessory is in this order, and the reel is in a constant speed rotation state. It is designed to be transmitted to the sub-control means before the above (see FIG. 22). In order to ensure that the push order notification (push order navigation effect) by the liquid crystal display is executed before the reel is in the constant speed rotation state, the push order instruction number, before the reel starts to rotate, It is preferable that each information of the effect group number and the combination determination result number of the accessory is set in the buffer for transmission to the sub-control means. When the push order flag is provided, it is preferable to transmit the push order flag information to the sub before each information of the effect group number and the combination determination result number of the accessory. This is because it is necessary to confirm whether or not the push order flag is ON at that time in order to execute the push order notification by the liquid crystal display device in the process at the time of receiving the start lever operation.

In the above embodiment, the game mode information and the RT state information are transmitted to the sub-control means after accepting the start lever operation, but may be transmitted before accepting the start lever operation. good. By doing so, the sub-control means can know the game mode information and the RT state information before the start lever operation is accepted, so that each process can be smoothly executed when the start lever operation is accepted. can. For example, when shifting from the game mode 1 (precursor) to the game mode 2 (AT preparation), a confirmation screen indicating that the AT setting has been confirmed may be displayed, but the game mode 2 may be displayed before the start lever operation is accepted. By knowing that the transition to (AT preparation) will occur, it is possible to smoothly display the confirmation screen when the start lever operation is accepted. In addition, the number of AT games (remaining number) may be displayed when shifting from game mode 2 (AT preparation) to game mode 3 (AT), but even in that case, the game is played before the start lever operation is accepted. By knowing that the mode 3 (AT) will be entered, it is possible to smoothly display the number of AT games when the start lever operation is accepted (specifically, before the start lever operation is accepted, the RAM. Data of the number of AT games (“50”) can be set in a predetermined storage area such as (RAM77), and the data can be displayed on the liquid crystal display device when the start lever operation is accepted. Therefore, the AT game can be displayed when the start lever operation is accepted. A number (“50”) of data can be set and then displayed faster than when displayed on a liquid crystal display device). When the AT flag is provided, it is preferable to transmit the AT flag information before accepting the operation of the start lever.

In the above embodiment, as described above, in order to prevent the player from intentionally staying in the game mode 2 (AT preparation), if the push order navigation is not followed in the game mode 2, the player shifts to the game mode 3 (AT). The AT counter is set. In this case, it is sufficient to determine whether or not the push order operation is performed along the push order navigation in the game mode 2, so that the processing load can be reduced, but it is unintentionally different from the push order navigation. Even if the push order operation is performed, the game mode 3 will be entered. Therefore, if the player does not follow the replay navigation, the mode is shifted to the game mode 3, but if the player does not follow the bell navigation (when the player is merely disadvantageous), the mode is not shifted to the game mode 3. good. In this case, it is possible to rescue the player who did not follow the bell navigation by mistake, but it is necessary to determine whether the player did not follow the replay navigation or the bell navigation, so that the processing load increases. If the push order navigation is not followed and the RT state falls, the game mode 3 is entered. However, if the push order navigation is not followed but the RT state does not fall, the game mode 3 is entered. You may not let it. In this case, it is necessary to determine whether or not the RT state has fallen in addition to determining whether or not the push order navigation has been followed, so that the processing load increases. Further, in the above embodiment, when the game mode 2 is set, the RT state is set to RT3 to shift to the game mode 3, but when the RT3 transition RP is won, the player shifts to the game mode 3. You may shift to the game mode 3.

In the above embodiment, the number of AT stocks is added when the correct answer is given to the push order hitting game, but the addition of the number of AT games (addition of the number of AT games) may be a privilege. In addition, a privilege (for example, a special performing an image effect) may be given in the sub-control means.

In the above embodiment, when the setting is changed, the information about AT (the number of AT games and the number of AT stocks) is cleared, but the information of the RT state is maintained. It also has many RT states. On the other hand, only the non-internal (non-RT) that does not have many RT game states and has not won the bonus role, the bonus internal (RT1), and the bonus (RT2) that have won the bonus role. Even if the specifications are set so that most of the game period is inside the bonus (internal specifications), when the setting is changed, the AT information will be cleared, but the RT status information will be maintained. May be good. Further, when the power is turned off, it is preferable to maintain the information on the AT and the information on the RT state (the same may be applied to the internal internal specifications).

In the above embodiment, the command is transmitted by the serial communication method, but it has already been described that the command may be transmitted by the parallel communication method. However, in the case of the parallel communication method, communication is possible even if one of the plurality of communication lines is broken, so that erroneous information may be transmitted. Therefore, in the case of the parallel communication method, a predetermined command (for example, "00000101B") is transmitted at the start of each game (for example, when the start lever is operated), and at the end of each game (for example, all). (At the time of stop), a predetermined command and a command in which "0" and "1" of each bit are reversed (for example, "1111010B") are transmitted, and it is determined whether or not the wire is broken based on the result of these logical operations. You may try to do it.

In the above embodiment, when the sub control means does not receive the push order instruction number, or when there is no push order to be notified with priority, the sub control means sends an effect transmitted from the main control means. The push order may be notified based on the group number or the combination determination result number.

In the above embodiment, one terminal (terminal PI0) is used to determine whether the specification is a test specification or a mass production specification, but a plurality of terminals may be used. In addition, the above-described embodiments and modifications can be used in combination as appropriate.

<< Third Embodiment >>
Next, with respect to the slot machine according to the third embodiment (hereinafter, also referred to as “the slot machine of the third embodiment”), specifically, the lighting timing of the plurality of display lamps when the replay combination is established is shown in FIG. It will be described with reference to FIGS. 56 to 60. The slot machine of the third form includes a replay lamp, a 1BET lamp, a 2BET lamp, a 3BET lamp, a start lamp, and a medal insertion possible lamp as display lamps composed of LED lamps and the like.

The replay lamp is due to the fact that the symbol combination (also referred to as the "replay symbol") corresponding to the replay game (also referred to as the "replay role" in the previous game) in this game is stopped and displayed on the effective line. , A lamp that can be executed without betting a game medal owned by the player), and corresponds to the above-mentioned re-game display lamp 46e. The 1BET lamp is a lamp indicating that the number of bets on the game medal is 1 or more, and corresponds to the above-mentioned 1-BET indicator lamp 46bA. The 2BET lamp is a lamp indicating that the number of bets on the game medal is 2 or more, and corresponds to the above-mentioned 2-BET indicator lamp 46bB. The 3BET lamp is a lamp indicating that the number of bets on the game medal is 3, and corresponds to the MAX-BET indicator lamp 46b described above. The start lamp is a lamp indicating that the start lever operation can be started (a state in which the game can be started by operating the start lever), and corresponds to the above-mentioned game start indicator lamp 46d. The medal insertion possible lamp is a lamp indicating that a game medal can be inserted, and corresponds to the above-mentioned insertion possibility indicator lamp 46c.

When the replay combination is established (when the replay symbol is stopped and displayed on the valid line), the next game becomes the replay game, and the same number of game medals as the number of bets in the previous game are bet by the automatic bet process. .. In the replay game, the player does not have to bet the game medal by himself (it cannot bet by himself), so if a role other than the replay is established in the previous game or if the game is lost, the game is played. The operation procedure performed by the person is very different. Therefore, if this game is a replay game and it is difficult for the player to understand that the game medal is automatically bet, the player may be confused. Therefore, at what timing during the replay game, it is important to turn on the replay lamp, the 1BET lamp, the 2BET lamp, the 3BET lamp, the start lamp, and the medal insertion possible lamp in order to perform a smooth game. ..

56 to 60 exemplify 10 patterns regarding the lighting timing of these display lamps, and these will be described in sequence below. In any pattern, the previous game is not a replay game, and the number of bets in the previous game is "3". Further, it is assumed that the third stop switch (the stop switch in which the third stop operation is performed) is switched from the on state to the off state (the hand is released from the third stop switch) after the replay symbol is displayed. .. In FIGS. 56 to 60, when the replay symbol is stopped and displayed on the effective line as a timing that can trigger the switching between the lit state and the non-lit state of each display lamp (denoted as “when the replay symbol is displayed” in the figure). , When the 3rd stop switch is switched from the on state to the off state (indicated as "when the 3rd stop switch is off" in the figure), and when the start lever can be operated to start the game (operation of the start lever). Is shown as the three timings (indicated as "when the start lever operation can be started" in the figure). Further, in the following description, for convenience, the period from the time when the replay symbol is displayed to the time when the start lever operation can be started is referred to as a "replay game preparation period", of which the period from the time when the replay symbol is displayed to the time when the third stop switch is turned off. The period is referred to as the "replay game preparation first half period", and the period from the time when the third stop switch is turned off to the time when the start lever operation can be started is referred to as the "replay game preparation second half period". The length of the horizontal axis (distance between each time point) in each of the timing patterns 1 to 10 does not accurately represent the actual time.

In the lighting timing pattern 1 shown in FIG. 56 (A), the replay lamp, the start lamp, and the medal insertion possible lamp are not lit during the predetermined period before the replay symbol is displayed, and the 1BET lamp, the 2BET lamp, and the 3BET lamp are in the non-lighting state. It is set to the lighting state (this point is the same in the other lighting timing patterns 2 to 10). Immediately after the replay symbol is displayed (substantially at the same time), the replay lamp switches from the non-lighting state to the lighting state, and the 2BET lamp and the 3BET lamp switch from the lighting state to the non-lighting state. On the other hand, the 1BET lamp remains lit, and the start lamp and the medal insertion possible lamp remain unlit. The 2BET lamp and the 3BET lamp, which are switched from the lit state to the non-lit state after the replay symbol is displayed, are first changed from the non-lit state to the 2BET lamp during the period until the third stop switch is turned off (the first half of the replay game preparation period). It switches to the lit state, and then the 3BET lamp switches from the non-lit state to the lit state.

During the period from the time when the third stop switch is turned off to the time when the start lever operation can be started (the latter half period of the replay game preparation), there is no change in the lighting / non-lighting state of each display lamp. That is, the replay lamp, the 1BET lamp, the 2BET lamp, and the 3BET lamp, which are lit when the third stop switch is off, remain lit throughout the second half of the replay game preparation, and are not lit when the third stop switch is off. The start lamp and the medal-insertable lamp, which are, remain unlit during the latter half of the replay game preparation period. When the start lever operation can be started, the start lamp switches from the non-lighting state to the lighting state, but there is no change in the lighting / non-lighting state of the other display lamps. In this lighting timing pattern 1, the medal insertion enable lamp is maintained in the non-lighting state even after the start lever operation startable time has elapsed. This is because during the replay game, even if the number of stored game medals has not reached the upper limit, the game medals cannot be inserted, and the game medals are inserted. But it will be returned. If it is possible to insert medals even during the replay game, the medal insertion possible lamp may be switched from the non-lighting state to the lit state at the same time as the start lamp.

As described above, in the lighting timing pattern 1, the replay game preparation period (both end points of the period, that is, the time when the replay symbol is displayed and the time when the start lever operation can be started are not included, but both end points are included, or one of them is included. The 1BET lamp remains lit for a period of time before and after (which may include endpoints). In addition, the replay lamp switches from the non-lit state to the lit state before the start lamp. Further, the replay lamp does not include both end points of the period during the first half of the replay game preparation (that is, when the replay symbol is displayed and when the third stop switch is off, but includes both end points, or even if one of the end points is included. (Good), the 2BET lamp, the 3BET lamp, and the medal insertion possible lamp are lit before the lamp (switches from the non-lit state to the lit state). Further, the 2BET lamp and the 3BET lamp are temporarily turned off at the same time immediately after the replay symbol is displayed (switched from the lit state to the non-lit state), and then are sequentially switched from the non-lit state to the lit state within the first half period of the replay game preparation. It has become like. Immediately after the replay symbol is displayed, the 2BET lamp and the 3BET lamp are temporarily turned off at the same time as the replay lamp is turned on.

In the lighting timing pattern 2 shown in FIG. 56B, the replay lamp is in a non-lighting state from before the replay symbol is displayed, after the replay symbol is displayed and when the third stop switch is turned off, and until just before the start lever operation can be started. It is maintained as it is, and immediately before the start lever operation can be started, the non-lighting state is switched to the lighting state. The 1BET lamp, the 2BET lamp, and the 3BET lamp are maintained in the lit state during the replay game preparation period and the period before and after the replay game preparation period. The start lamp and the medal insertable lamp are maintained in a non-lit state from before the replay symbol is displayed, after the replay symbol is displayed and when the third stop switch is turned off, until the start lever operation can be started, and the start lever operation can be started. At the same time, it switches from the non-lighting state to the lighting state at the same time. When the medal insertion possible lamp lights up, it is possible to insert a game medal. This is because even during the replay game period, if the number of stored game medals has not reached the upper limit, the game medals can be inserted, and the inserted game medals can be inserted. Is added to the number of stored items (returned after reaching the upper limit of the number of stored items) (the same applies to the following lighting timing patterns 3 to 10).

In the lighting timing pattern 3 shown in FIG. 57 (A), the replay lamp remains in the non-lit state from before the replay symbol is displayed, after the replay symbol is displayed and when the third stop switch is turned off, until the start lever operation can be started. It is maintained, and when the start lever operation can be started, the non-lighting state is switched to the lighting state. The 1BET lamp, the 2BET lamp, and the 3BET lamp are maintained in the lit state during the replay game preparation period and the period before and after the replay game preparation period. The start lamp and the medal-insertable lamp are maintained in a non-lit state from before the replay symbol is displayed, after the replay symbol is displayed and when the third stop switch is turned off, until the start lever operation can be started, and the start lever operation can be started. At times, it switches from the non-lit state to the lit state at the same time (at the same time as the replay lamp).

In the lighting timing pattern 4 shown in FIG. 57 (B), the replay lamp is maintained in a non-lit state from before the display of the replay symbol to the first half period of the replay game preparation, and within the second half period of the replay game preparation (during the period). It does not include both end points, that is, when the third stop switch is off and when the start lever operation can be started, but includes both end points or may include either end point (for example, the third end point). Immediately after the stop switch is turned off), the non-lighting state is switched to the lit state. The 1BET lamp is maintained in the lit state during the replay game preparation period and the period before and after the replay game preparation period. The 2BET lamp and the 3BET lamp are turned off at the same time (switching from the lit state to the non-lit state) within the second half of the replay game preparation period (after the replay lamp is lit), and then the 2BET lamp is turned on by the time the start lever operation can be started. It lights up first, and when the start lever operation can be started, the 3BET lamp lights up. It should be noted that the replay lamp is used before the 2BET lamp and the 3BET lamp are turned off (switching from the lit state to the non-lit state) within the latter half of the replay game preparation period, and the 2BET lamp, the 3BET lamp, the start lamp and the medal are inserted. The lamp is lit (switches from the non-lit state to the lit state) before the lamp is lit. The start lamp and the medal-insertable lamp are maintained in a non-lit state from before the replay symbol is displayed, after the replay symbol is displayed and when the third stop switch is turned off, until the start lever operation can be started, and the start lever operation can be started. At times, it switches from the non-lighting state to the lighting state at the same time (at the same time as the 3BET lamp).

In the lighting timing pattern 5 shown in FIG. 58 (A), the 1BET lamp, the 2BET lamp, and the 3BET lamp continue to light from before the display of the replay symbol to the first half of the replay game preparation period, and within the second half period of the replay game preparation (for example). , Immediately after the third stop switch is turned off), the lamps are turned off at the same time (switching from the lit state to the non-lit state), and then the 1BET lamp and the 2BET lamp are simultaneously (or 1BET) until the start lever operation can be started. The lamp lights up a little earlier than the 2BET lamp), and the 3BET lamp lights up when the start lever operation can be started. The replay lamp is maintained in a non-lit state for the first half of the replay game preparation from before the replay symbol is displayed, and at the same time as the 1BET lamp and the 2BET lamp are lit and the 3BET lamp is in the second half of the replay game preparation. , The start lamp and the medal insertion possible lamp are lit before the lamp (switches from the non-lit state to the lit state). The start lamp and the medal-insertable lamp are maintained in a non-lit state from before the replay symbol is displayed, after the replay symbol is displayed and when the third stop switch is turned off, until the start lever operation can be started, and the start lever operation can be started. At times, it switches from the non-lighting state to the lighting state at the same time (at the same time as the 3BET lamp).

In the lighting timing pattern 6 shown in FIG. 58 (B), the 1BET lamp is maintained in the lighting state during the replay game preparation period and the period before and after the replay game preparation period. The 2BET lamp and the 3BET lamp continue to light from before the replay symbol is displayed to within the first half of the replay game preparation, and at a predetermined timing within the second half of the replay game preparation (for example, immediately after the third stop switch is turned off). At the same time, the lamp is turned off once (switched from the lit state to the non-lit state), and then the 2BET lamp and the 3BET lamp are turned on again in this order until the start lever operation can be started. The replay lamp is maintained in a non-lit state for the first half of the replay game preparation from before the replay symbol is displayed, and at the same time as the 2BET lamp and the 3BET lamp are turned off and the 2BET lamp is turned off during the second half of the replay game preparation. , The 3BET lamp, the start lamp, and the medal insertion possible lamp are turned on before the relighting (switching from the non-lighting state to the lighting state).

In the lighting timing pattern 7 shown in FIG. 59 (A), the replay lamp remains in the non-lit state from before the replay symbol is displayed, after the replay symbol is displayed and when the third stop switch is turned off, until the start lever operation can be started. It is maintained, and when the start lever operation can be started, the non-lighting state is switched to the lighting state. The 1BET lamp, the 2BET lamp, and the 3BET lamp are maintained in the lit state during the replay game preparation period and the period before and after the replay game preparation period. The start lamp and the medal-insertable lamp are maintained in a non-lit state from before the replay symbol is displayed, after the replay symbol is displayed and when the third stop switch is turned off, until the start lever operation can be started, and the start lever operation can be started. At times, it switches from the non-lit state to the lit state at the same time (at the same time as the replay lamp).

In the lighting timing pattern 8 shown in FIG. 59 (B), the 1BET lamp, the 2BET lamp, and the 3BET lamp continue to be lit from before the display of the replay symbol to the first half of the replay game preparation period, and are predetermined within the second half period of the replay game preparation. At the timing of (for example, immediately after the third stop switch is turned off), the lights are turned off at the same time (switching from the lit state to the non-lit state), and then the lights are turned on at the same time when the start lever operation can be started. The replay lamp is maintained in a non-lit state from before the display of the replay symbol to the first half of the replay game preparation and the second half of the replay game preparation, and when the start lever operation can be started, the 1BET lamp, the 2BET lamp, and the 3BET It lights up at the same time as the lamp lights up (switches from the non-lighting state to the lit state). The start lamp and the medal insertable lamp are maintained in a non-lit state from before the replay symbol is displayed, after the replay symbol is displayed and when the third stop switch is turned off, until the start lever operation can be started, and the start lever operation can be started. At times, the non-lighting state is switched to the lighting state at the same time (at the same time for the replay lamp, the 1BET lamp, the 2BET lamp, and the 3BET lamp).

In the lighting timing pattern 9 shown in FIG. 60 (A), the replay lamp is maintained in a non-lit state for the first half period of the replay game preparation from before the display of the replay symbol, and is a predetermined state within the second half period of the replay game preparation. At the timing (for example, immediately after the third stop switch is turned off), the non-lighting state is switched to the lighting state. The 1BET lamp is maintained in the lit state during the replay game preparation period and the period before and after the replay game preparation period. The 2BET lamp and the 3BET lamp are temporarily turned off at a predetermined timing (for example, immediately after the replay lamp is lit) within the second half of the replay game preparation period (switching from the lit state to the non-lit state), and then when the start lever operation can be started. By the time, the 2BET lamp and the 3BET lamp are turned on in this order. It should be noted that the replay lamp is used before the 2BET lamp and the 3BET lamp are turned off (switching from the lit state to the non-lit state) within the latter half of the replay game preparation period, and the 2BET lamp, the 3BET lamp, the start lamp and the medal are inserted. The lamp is lit (switches from the non-lit state to the lit state) before the lamp is lit. The start lamp and the medal insertable lamp are maintained in a non-lit state from before the replay symbol is displayed, after the replay symbol is displayed and when the third stop switch is turned off, until the start lever operation can be started, and the start lever operation can be started. At the same time, it switches from the non-lighting state to the lighting state at the same time.

In the lighting timing pattern 10 shown in FIG. 60 (B), the replay lamp is maintained in a non-lit state for the first half period of the replay game preparation from before the display of the replay symbol, and is a predetermined state within the second half period of the replay game preparation. At the timing (for example, immediately after the third stop switch is turned off), the non-lighting state is switched to the lighting state. The 1BET lamp, the 2BET lamp, and the 3BET lamp are maintained in the lit state during the replay game preparation period and the period before and after the replay game preparation period. The start lamp and the medal insertable lamp are maintained in a non-lit state from before the replay symbol is displayed, after the replay symbol is displayed and when the third stop switch is turned off, until the start lever operation can be started, and the start lever operation can be started. At the same time, it switches from the non-lighting state to the lighting state at the same time. The replay lamp is lit before the start lamp and the medal insertion possible lamp are lit within the latter half of the replay game preparation period (switches from the non-lit state to the lit state).

The difference in lighting timing pattern causes a difference in effect. This point will be described below. In the case of a pattern in which the start lamp and the medal insertion possible lamp are turned on at the same time (lighting timing patterns 2 to 10 are applicable), if the start lamp is turned on before the medal insertion possible lamp, the player wants to insert the game medal. Even if you think, there is a risk of misunderstanding that you can not insert the medal because the start lamp lights up first, and conversely, if you turn on the medal insertion possible lamp before the start lamp, you can not operate the start lever. There is a risk of misidentification. Therefore, by turning on the start lamp and the medal insertion possible lamp at the same time, it becomes possible for the player to make a smooth decision regarding the insertion of the game medal and the operation of the start lever, and the insertion of the game medal and the operation of the start lever are smooth. Can be done.

A pattern in which the 1BET lamp is maintained in the lit state during the replay game preparation period (or during the replay game preparation period and the period before and after it) (lighting timing patterns 1 to 4, 6, 7, 9). , 10), it is easy for the player to understand that the re-gaming combination has been established and the automatic bet has been made, and it is possible to promptly notify the player that the re-gaming combination has been established. , It becomes possible to smoothly proceed with the game. A pattern in which the 2BET lamp and the 3BET lamp are kept lit during the replay game preparation period (or during the replay game preparation period and the period before and after the replay game preparation period) (lighting timing patterns 2, 7, and 10). In the case of (corresponding to), it becomes easier for the player to understand that the re-gaming combination has been established and the automatic bet has been made, and it is possible to promptly notify the player that the re-gaming combination has been established. It becomes possible to carry out the progress smoothly.

If the replay lamp has a pattern that switches from the non-lighting state to the lit state before the start lamp (corresponding to the lighting timing patterns 1, 2, 4 to 7, 9, 10), the replay lamp is turned on first. , Notify the player that the replay game will be established and the replay game will be performed, and then turn on the start lamp to check the progress of the game (the start lever can be operated). Since it is possible to notify the player, it is possible to smoothly proceed with the game. If the replay lamp lights up before the medal insertion possible lamp (switches from the non-lighting state to the lighting state) (lighting timing patterns 1, 2, 4 to 7, 9, 10 correspond), the replay lamp is turned on. By turning on the lamp first, the player is notified first that the replay combination is established and the replay game is to be performed, and then the medal insertion possible lamp is turned on so that the game medal can be inserted. Since it is possible to notify the player, it is possible to make the player smoothly grasp the game situation.

When the replay lamp is a pattern that lights up before the 3BET lamp (or 2BET lamp and 3BET lamp) (switches from the non-lighting state to the lighting state) (lighting timing patterns 1, 4, 6, 7, and 9 are applicable). By turning on the replay lamp first, the player is notified first that the replay combination is established and the replay game is performed, and then the 3BET lamp (or 2BET lamp and 3BET lamp) is turned on. , Since it is possible to notify the player that the automatic bet has been made, it is possible to smoothly proceed with the game. When the 2BET lamp and the 3BET lamp are sequentially switched from the non-lighting state to the lighting state (corresponding to the lighting timing patterns 1, 4, 5, 6 and 9), the 2BET lamp and the 3BET lamp should be turned on in stages. As a result, it is possible to notify the player more clearly that the automatic bet has been made, so that the game can proceed smoothly.

In the case of a pattern in which the 2BET lamp and the 3BET lamp are temporarily turned off (switching from the lighting state to the non-lighting state) (lighting timing patterns 1, 4, 5, 6, 8 and 9 are applicable), many display lamps are lit. Considering that it may be difficult for the player to grasp the gaming state if the state remains, by temporarily turning off the 2BET lamp and the 3BET lamp at the same time, the player is given a gaming state (re-gaming role). It is possible to quickly grasp (the establishment and automatic betting). If the replay lamp has a pattern in which the 2BET lamp lights up before the 2BET lamp turns off once (corresponding to lighting timing patterns 4 and 9), by turning on the replay lamp first, a replay combination is established and the replay is performed. By notifying the player that the game will be performed first and then turning off the 2BET lamp, it is possible to inform the player that the game medal will be automatically bet in an easy-to-understand manner. It is possible to grasp the situation smoothly.

If the 2BET lamps (or the 2BET lamps and the 3BET lamps) are turned off at the same time as the replay lamps are turned on (corresponding to the lighting timing patterns 1 and 6), I would like to notify the player that an automatic bet will be made. , 2BET lamps (or 2BET lamps and 3BET lamps) are used in view of the fact that if the 2BET lamps (or 2BET lamps and 3BET lamps) continue to be lit, it may be difficult for the player to grasp the gaming state. By turning off the lights once, it is possible for the player to quickly grasp the game state. In addition, by turning on the replay lamp at the same time, it is possible to notify the player at an early stage that it is not necessary to insert a game medal. In the case of a pattern in which the 3BET lamp and the start lamp are lit at the same time (lighting timing patterns 4, 5 and 8 are applicable), the player can be notified early that the start lever can be operated, so that the game can proceed smoothly. Is possible.

If the previous game is a replay game and the current game is also a replay game, a pattern in which the replay lamp is continuously lit from the previous game to the current game may be adopted. .. By continuously turning on the replay lamp, it is possible to promptly notify the player that the replay combination has been established, so that the game can proceed smoothly.

It is also possible to form another lighting timing pattern by appropriately combining a part of the lighting timing patterns 1 to 10 described above. Each display lamp (replay lamp, 1BET lamp, 2BET lamp, 3BET lamp, start lamp, medal insertion possible lamp) is lit by processing on the main side (main control means side) (for example, timer interrupt processing). The lights are turned off (some can be controlled on the sub side). "Simultaneous" when a plurality of display lamps are turned on or off at the same time includes a case where there is a slight time difference to some extent. For example, even if the timing of turning on or off is shifted by several interrupts between the plurality of display lamps, the player cannot determine the difference in the timing, so that there is no problem in treating them at the same time.

<< Fourth Embodiment >>
Next, with respect to the slot machine according to the fourth embodiment (hereinafter, also referred to as "slot machine of the fourth form"), specifically, with respect to the arrangement mode of the electronic components on the control board, FIGS. 61 and 62 are additionally referred to. I will explain while. The slot machine of the fourth form includes a main control board 600 (corresponding to the above-mentioned main control board 60) mainly for performing control processing related to the progress of the game.

Various electronic components are mounted on the main control board 600. FIG. 61 shows the planar arrangement relationship of the main electronic components mounted on the main control board 600. Specifically, as shown in the figure, on the main control board 600, a microprocessor MP01 as an IC element having a CPU function, other IC elements IC01 to IC15 not having a CPU function, and resistors R01 to R26, collective resistors R31 and R32, capacitors C01 to C05, C11 to C14, and connectors CN01 to CN04 are mounted. Further, on the main control board 600, pad portions P01 and P02 for mounting (soldering) a test IC element (not shown) used at the time of type test are formed. Other electronic components such as diodes and LEDs may be mounted on the main control board 600, but they are not shown.

The microprocessor MP01 is a one-chip type microcomputer in which an IC chip equipped with a CPU, ROM, RAM, etc. is enclosed in a rectangular parallelepiped package body, and is mounted on a main control board 600 via a socket S01. It is implemented in. The IC elements IC01 to IC15 are general-purpose IC elements in which an IC chip on which a plurality of predetermined logic circuits are mounted is enclosed in a rectangular parallelepiped package body. The resistors R01 to R26 are horizontal type (axial type) resistors configured by enclosing an electric resistance element in a cylindrical package, and the collective resistors R31 and R32 have a plurality of resistors. It is a vertical type resistor that is housed in one package. The capacitors C01 to C05 are axial type capacitors, and the capacitors C11 to C14 are radial type capacitors larger than the capacitors C01 to C05. The connectors CN01 to CN04 are electrical components that are joined to a connector (not shown) on the harness side for electrically connecting the main control board 600 to another control board or electrical equipment, and each has a plurality of terminals. It is configured with a box-shaped housing that surrounds the terminals.

FIG. 62 shows the height relationship of each electronic component mounted on the main control board 600. As shown in the figure, the height of the microprocessor MP01 (the distance from the surface of the main control board 600 to the upper surface of the package body of the microprocessor MP01 installed on the board surface via the socket S01) is defined as H1. In the state of being mounted on the main control board 600, the electronic component taller than the height H1 of the microprocessor MP01 exemplifies the collective resistor (FIG. 62 shows the collective resistor R31, but the same applies to the others. ) And a radial type capacitor (in FIG. 62, the capacitor C12 is illustrated, but the same applies to the others). All of the other electronic components are shorter than the height H1 of the microprocessor MP01 (in FIG. 62, only the axial resistor R12, the IC element IC12, and the connector CN03 are illustrated, but other axial types are illustrated. The same applies to resistors, IC elements, connectors, axial capacitors, etc.).

<Orientation of microprocessor and other IC elements>
As shown in FIG. 61, many IC elements IC01 to IC15 are mounted on the main control board 600. A circuit connected to each terminal of each IC element is formed on the main control board 600, and if the IC element is mounted in the wrong mounting position (orientation), it will not function normally as a matter of course. Therefore, when mounting the IC element, the mounting direction of the IC element is grasped with reference to the position of the 1st pin 1P of the IC element, and the position on the main control board 600 to which the 1st pin 1P is connected is determined. Implementation work may be performed while checking. On the other hand, if the mounting orientation of a large number of IC elements (the position of the 1st pin 1P at the time of mounting) is different for each IC element, it takes time and effort to confirm the mounting orientation of each IC element, and the work efficiency is lowered. It ends up.

Therefore, in the slot machine of the fourth form, the mounting directions of the respective IC elements are aligned according to the mounting direction of the microprocessor MP01 on the main control board 600. Specifically, the direction in which the long side direction of the microprocessor MP01 (the long side direction of the upper surface of the package body) coincides with the horizontal direction in the drawing (the direction of one side (long side in this example) of the main control board 600) ( It is mounted in a state where the first pin 1P of the housing terminal is located at the lower left in the drawing (hereinafter referred to as “horizontal”). The IC elements are mounted in a direction (horizontal direction) in which the long side direction (long side direction of the upper surface of the package body) coincides with the horizontal direction in the drawing (horizontal direction), and the long side direction thereof is the vertical direction in the drawing (main control). There are IC14 and IC15 mounted in a direction (hereinafter referred to as "vertical orientation") that coincides with the other side (short side in this example) of the substrate 600. Of these, IC01 to IC13 mounted sideways are all mounted in a state where their respective pin 1Ps are located at the lower left in the drawing, like the microprocessor MP01. On the other hand, both the IC14 and the IC15 mounted in the vertical orientation are mounted in a state where the 1st pin 1P is located at the upper left in the drawing.

As described above, in the slot machine of the fourth form, the positions of the 1st pin 1P of the microprocessor MP01 and the IC elements IC01 to IC13 mounted in the same horizontal direction on the main control board 600 are aligned (both). It is configured to come to the lower left position in the figure). Therefore, when mounting the IC elements IC01 to IC13, it becomes easy to confirm the mounting orientation thereof, so that mounting errors can be reduced and work efficiency can be improved. Further, in this example, the test IC element is also mounted in a horizontal direction in which the pin 1 is located at the lower left position in the figure (for the pin 1 in each pad portion P01 and P02). Land portions L1 and L2 are formed at the lower left positions in the figure), which makes it difficult for mounting mistakes to occur.

In this example, all of the horizontal IC elements IC01 to IC13 are configured so that the positions of the 1st pins 1P are aligned, but some of the horizontal IC elements are mounted in the opposite directions. It may be an IC element (the position of pin 1 1P is at the upper right in the figure). In that case, it is preferable that the IC element mounted in the opposite direction has a shape and a size that can be easily distinguished from other IC elements from the viewpoint of reducing mounting errors. Further, the substrate surface may be divided into a plurality of regions, and the mounting direction of the IC element may be changed for each region. For example, the substrate surface is divided into a left side region and a right side region, and each of the horizontally oriented IC elements mounted in the left side region is arranged so that the positions of the 1st pins are aligned at the lower left, and the right side region. For each of the laterally oriented IC elements mounted on the above, the position of each pin 1 may be aligned on the upper right.

<Distance between microprocessor and other IC elements>
When a current is supplied to the IC elements (IC01 to IC15) installed on the main control board 600, noise may be generated from the IC elements. If such an IC element is installed in the vicinity of the microprocessor MP01, the noise generated from the IC element may adversely affect the operation of the microprocessor MP01.

Therefore, in the slot machine of the fourth form, the IC element is not arranged in the vicinity of the microprocessor MP01 on the main control board 600. Specifically, a virtual boundary formed in the vicinity region of the microprocessor MP01 (here, from the outer periphery of the package main body of the microprocessor MP01, at a position separated by a length W1 in the direction of the short side of the upper surface of the package main body). No IC element is arranged in the area surrounded by the line BL1). In addition, W1 is a length equal to or longer than the length (length at the time of mounting) of one axial type resistor (R01 to R26).

As described above, in the slot machine of the fourth form, all the IC elements IC01 to IC15 mounted on the main control board 600 are longer than the microprocessor MP01 in the direction of the upper surface short side of the package body of the microprocessor MP01. The W1 minute is located apart. Therefore, even if noise is generated from the IC element, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the noise adversely affects the operation of the microprocessor MP01. It is preferable that each IC element is arranged at a distance of at least twice the length W1 from the microprocessor MP01.

<Height of electronic components placed around the microprocessor>
The microprocessor MP01 is automatically mounted on the main control board 600 by a mounting device such as a chip mounter. The mounting device grips the microprocessor MP01 and moves it above the planned mounting position, then moves the microprocessor MP01 downward to a predetermined height and mounts it in the socket S01. If a component taller than the height of the microprocessor MP01 (height H1 at the time of mounting) is mounted in the vicinity of the microprocessor MP01, it will be different from the planned mounting position due to a data input error at the planned mounting position. When the mounting device moves the microprocessor MP01 downward at the position, the microprocessor MP01 and the jig that grips the microprocessor MP01 may come into contact with tall parts.

Therefore, in the slot machine of the fourth form, a component taller than the microprocessor MP01 is not arranged in the vicinity of the microprocessor MP01 on the main control board 600. Specifically, at the above-mentioned boundary line BL1 formed in the vicinity region of the microprocessor MP01 (at a position separated from the outer periphery of the package main body of the microprocessor MP01 by the length W1 in the direction of the short side of the upper surface of the package main body). In the enclosed area), parts taller than the microprocessor MP01 (in this example, the collective resistors R31 and R32 and the radial type capacitors C11 to C14) are not arranged. Even within the vicinity region, any component shorter than the microprocessor MP01 (however, the IC element is excluded) may be arranged, but these may not be arranged either.

As described above, in the slot machine of the fourth form, all the parts (collective resistors R31, R32 and radial type capacitors C11 to C14) taller than the microprocessor MP01 are from the microprocessor MP01 to at least the microprocessor MP01. The length W1 minutes in the direction of the short side of the upper surface of the main body of the package is arranged apart from each other. Therefore, when the mounting device moves the microprocessor MP01 downward at a position different from the planned mounting position, the microprocessor MP01 or the jig that grips the microprocessor MP01 comes into contact with a tall component, and the microprocessor MP01 or It is possible to prevent the tall parts from being damaged.

<< Fifth Embodiment >>
Next, with respect to the slot machine according to the fifth embodiment (hereinafter, also referred to as “slot machine of the fifth embodiment”), specifically, the built-in RWM (hereinafter, corresponding to the above-mentioned main control means 100) of the main control means (corresponding to the above-mentioned main control means 100). A memory map (referred to as “RAM”) will be described with reference to FIGS. 63 and 64.
In such a RAM memory map, a set value data area, an external signal system data area, a RAM check sum data area, a control command buffer area, a stack pointer temporary storage buffer area when a power failure occurs, an unused area, and saved data storage. Areas etc. are included.
The unused area means an area that may be used as an area for taking or clearing a checksum value, but is not used in a game.

In the gaming machine, the set value data as the data used for the winning combination processing lottery and the like is important in advancing the game. Therefore, it is necessary to surely prevent a state in which the set value data is rewritten for some reason when it is stored in the RAM.

For example, when it becomes necessary to save a running program based on the occurrence of an interrupt instruction (save instruction), for example, the stack address is updated (subtracted) and then executed in the save data storage area secured as a stack. Stores the value of the program counter of the program inside (original program). When returning to the original state, the stack address is updated (added) after the data is taken out from the saved data storage area indicated by the stack address. This makes it possible to store information (return destination address) when returning to the original program, such as how far the original program was executed. When consecutive interrupts occur in program processing, in principle, as many return destination addresses as the number of consecutive interrupts are stored in the save data storage area in order to return from the deep subroutine hierarchy to the original program. Therefore, the capacity of the backup data storage area needs to be at least the capacity corresponding to the number of consecutive interrupts. However, the capacity of the saved data storage area in such a case is almost fixed at the time of program design (at the time of the compiler) (the above saved data storage area is, for example, several bytes in consideration of the normal number of interrupts. Minutes (8 bytes of saved data 1 to 8 in FIG. 64) are generally secured), so it is important to appropriately set the capacity of the saved data storage area when designing the program. It is usually possible to avoid the situation where the set value data is rewritten by the return destination address described above.

However, if the program goes out of control for some reason and it becomes impossible to perform the necessary processing procedure, a continuous interrupt instruction may be generated from the watchdog timer (WDT) or the like, thereby storing the above-mentioned saved data. A number (capacity) of information corresponding to the number of interrupt instructions will be loaded in the area. That is, by instructing the stack address that is sequentially subtracted (decremented) by the stack pointer, the return destination address is sequentially stored in each saved data storage area.

In such a case, the return destination address may be instantly piled up on the stack, exceeding the saved data area secured at the time of design, and above that (RAM address is on the 0 address side). The return address of the original program is rewritten up to the RAM storage area (the area where other data is stored) in the area). That is, the data described in the area on the 0th address side of the address adjacent to the reserved saved data area is eroded by the return destination address, and the data stored in the RAM is lost. The rewritten unnecessary address data causes various unfavorable problems in the operation of the gaming machine.

In particular, when the above-mentioned set value data area is arranged in an area close to the address 0 side of the above-mentioned saved data area on the RAM address space, the set value data makes no sense at all. It is important to reduce the risk of such a situation to the minimum because there is a risk that the data will be rewritten to the missing data and it may become impossible to continue the game itself on the gaming machine. It becomes.

Therefore, the gaming machine (slot machine) according to the fifth embodiment of the present invention has a configuration having the following requirements so that the occurrence of the above-mentioned situation can be reduced to the minimum.
The five typical patterns of the present embodiment will be described below by listing the requirements.

<Pattern 1 gaming machine (slot machine)>
(1) It is equipped with a storage means (RAM) capable of reading and writing data.
(2) The storage means (RAM) saves at least a first storage area in which set value data is stored, a second storage area that is an unused area, and data necessary for advancing the game. A third storage area is provided.
(3) The second storage area is set at an address position between the first storage area and the third storage area.
(4) By setting as described in (3) above, even if the number of data saved in the third storage area exceeds the design upper limit, the set value data is unlikely to be overwritten.

According to the game machine (slot machine) of the pattern 1 configured in this way, as shown in FIG. 63 (A), the game proceeds with the first storage area in which the set value data is stored at the address position. By arranging the second storage area, which is an unused area, between the third storage area where the necessary data is saved, interrupt instructions are continuously generated due to the runaway of the program or the like. Even if the return destination address data exceeds the saved data area secured at the time of design and erodes the area on the smaller side of the address and is overwritten, the description is first made in the unused area. This is done in a second storage area, and it is possible to reduce the possibility that the set value data is rewritten to data that makes no sense at all. As a result, it is possible to reduce the risk of causing a serious hindrance (or making the game impossible) in playing the game.

<Pattern 2 gaming machine (slot machine)>
(1) It has the same requirements as the requirement (1) in the gaming machine (slot machine) of the above pattern 1.
(2A) The storage means (RAM) saves at least a first storage area in which the set value data is stored, a second storage area which is an unused area, and data necessary for advancing the game. A third storage area and a fourth storage area for storing predetermined data transmitted to the outside of the game machine are provided.
(3A) The second storage area and the fourth storage area are set at address positions between the first storage area and the third storage area.
(4) It has the same requirements as the requirement (4) in the gaming machine (slot machine) of the above pattern 1.

According to the game machine (slot machine) of the pattern 2 configured in this way, as shown in FIG. 63 (B), the game proceeds with the first storage area in which the set value data is stored at the address position. A second storage area, which is an unused area, and a fourth storage area for storing predetermined data to be transmitted to the outside of the game machine are arranged between the third storage area in which the necessary data is saved. As a result, interrupt instructions are continuously generated due to the runaway of the program, and the return destination address data exceeds the saved data area secured at the time of design and erodes and overwrites the area on the smaller address side. Even if it comes to be done, the description first stores a second storage area which is an unused area, and predetermined data transmitted to the outside of the game machine, which is not directly related to the game of the game machine. This is done in the fourth storage area, and the possibility that the set value data is rewritten to completely meaningless data can be significantly reduced. As a result, it is possible to reduce the risk of causing a serious hindrance (or making the game impossible) in playing the game.

<Pattern 3 gaming machine (slot machine)>
(1) It has the same requirements as the requirement (1) in the gaming machine (slot machine) of the above pattern 1.
(2B) The storage means (RAM) saves at least a first storage area in which the set value data is stored, a second storage area which is an unused area, and data necessary for advancing the game. A third storage area and a fifth storage area for storing the checksum data of the storage means (RAM) are provided.
(3B) The second storage area and the fifth storage area are set at address positions between the first storage area and the third storage area.
(4) It has the same requirements as the requirement (4) in the gaming machine (slot machine) of the above pattern 1.

According to the game machine (slot machine) of the pattern 3 configured in this way, as shown in FIG. 63 (C), the game proceeds with the first storage area in which the set value data is stored at the address position. A second storage area, which is an unused area, and a fifth storage area for storing checksum data of the storage means (RAM) are arranged between the third storage area in which the necessary data is saved. By doing so, interrupt instructions are continuously generated due to the runaway of the program, and the return destination address data exceeds the saved data area reserved at the time of design and overwrites the area on the smaller address side. Even if it becomes, the description first describes the second storage area which is an unused area, and the check of the storage means (RAM) which is practically not used after the first processing such as when the power is turned on in the game. This is done in the fifth storage area for storing the sum data, and the possibility that the set value data is rewritten to completely meaningless data can be significantly reduced. As a result, it is possible to reduce the risk of causing a serious hindrance (or making the game impossible) in playing the game.

<Pattern 4 gaming machine (slot machine)>
(1) It has the same requirements as the requirement (1) in the gaming machine (slot machine) of the above pattern 1.
(2C) The storage means (RAM) saves at least a first storage area in which set value data is stored, a second storage area that is an unused area, and data necessary for advancing the game. A third storage area is provided, and a sixth storage area for storing command information for transmission from the main control means to the sub-main control means is provided.
(3C) The second storage area and the sixth storage area are set at address positions between the first storage area and the third storage area.
(4) It has the same requirements as the requirement (4) in the gaming machine (slot machine) of the above pattern 1.

According to the game machine (slot machine) of the pattern 4 configured in this way, as shown in FIG. 63 (D), the game proceeds with the first storage area in which the set value data is stored at the address position. The second storage area, which is an unused area, and the command information for transmission from the main control means to the sub-main control means are stored between the third storage area in which the necessary data is saved. By arranging the sixth storage area, interrupt instructions are continuously generated due to runaway of the program, and the return destination address data exceeds the save data area secured at the time of design and of the address. Even if the smaller area is eroded and overwritten, the description is not directly related to the second storage area, which is an unused area, and the main control, which is essential for playing the game. This is done in the sixth storage area, which stores the command information to be transmitted from the main control means to the sub-main control means, and the set value data is rewritten into data that makes no sense at all. The risk can be significantly reduced. As a result, it is possible to reduce the risk of causing a serious hindrance (or making the game impossible) in playing the game.

<Pattern 5 gaming machine (slot machine)>
(1) It has the same requirements as the requirement (1) in the gaming machine (slot machine) of the above pattern 1.
(2D) The storage means (RAM) saves at least a first storage area in which the set value data is stored, a second storage area which is an unused area, and data necessary for advancing the game. A third storage area and a seventh storage area for storing the stack pointer address in the event of a power failure are provided.
(3D) The second storage area and the seventh storage area are set at address positions between the first storage area and the third storage area.
(4) It has the same requirements as the requirement (4) in the gaming machine (slot machine) of the above pattern 1.

According to the game machine (slot machine) of the pattern 5 configured in this way, as shown in FIG. 63 (E), the game proceeds with the first storage area in which the set value data is stored at the address position. The second storage area, which is an unused area, and the seventh storage area, which stores the stack pointer address when a power failure occurs, are arranged between the third storage area in which the necessary data is saved. As a result, interrupt instructions are continuously generated due to the runaway of the program, and the return destination address data exceeds the saved data area reserved at the time of design and erodes the area on the smaller address side and is overwritten. Even if this happens, the description is practically not used except for the second storage area, which is an unused area, and when a power failure occurs, and the power failure occurrence does not significantly affect normal games. This is done in the seventh storage area where the stack pointer address of the time is stored, and the possibility that the set value data is rewritten to completely meaningless data can be greatly reduced. As a result, it is possible to reduce the risk of causing a serious hindrance (or making the game impossible) in playing the game.
In the above-mentioned memory map, each of the predetermined areas other than the above-mentioned storage areas is defined as an area for storing various important data.

<Preferable aspects of each of the above-mentioned patterns in a gaming machine>
In the gaming machines of patterns 1 to 5 described above, in addition to the second storage area or the second storage area, one storage area (fourth) is provided between the first storage area and the third storage area. (Any of a storage area, a fifth storage area, a sixth storage area, and a seventh storage area) is arranged. In each of the fourth to seventh storage areas, unlike the case of the set value data directly connected to the game of the gaming machine, when the data stored in the storage area is overwritten and the contents are changed. It is possible to insert game medals, and the game can be continued.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 63 (A) to 63 (E), in addition to the second storage area, one storage area (fourth storage area, fifth storage area, sixth storage area, and the like) are provided. It is preferable that any of the seventh storage area) is arranged at an address position closer to the third storage area than the intermediate address position between the first storage area and the third storage area. As a result, the above-mentioned fourth to seventh storage areas are arranged in the address area closer to the third storage area than the intermediate address position between the first storage area and the third storage area. Areas other than the fourth to seventh storage areas include the intermediate address position and are arranged in the address area farther from the third storage area. Therefore, interrupt instructions are continuously issued due to a runaway of the program or the like. Even if the return destination address data is overwritten by eroding the area on the smaller side of the address beyond the saved data area reserved at the time of design, it will be stored in the 4th to 7th storage areas. It is possible to reduce the possibility that data rewriting is performed in an area other than the above-mentioned fourth to seventh storage areas that store more important data than the stored data.

Further, in the gaming machines of patterns 1 to 5 described above, it is preferable that a second storage area composed of an unused area is arranged adjacent to the side where the address of the third storage area is small. In the unused area, the data already described is not usually erased, so the arrangement is such that the problem does not occur most as compared with the case where another storage area is adjacent to the third storage area. be able to.

Further, in the gaming machines of patterns 1 to 5 shown in FIGS. 63 (A) to 63 (E), in the address arrangement of the RAM, a second storage is performed between the first storage area and the third storage area. In addition to the area or the second storage area, one storage area (any of a fourth storage area, a fifth storage area, a sixth storage area, and a seventh storage area) is provided. , Any combination of storage areas among the fourth to seventh storage areas can be arranged between the first storage area and the third storage area.

That is, two storage areas may be added in addition to the second storage area, for example, the fourth and fifth storage areas may be arranged, or the fourth and sixth storage areas may be arranged. The fourth and seventh storage areas may be arranged, the fifth and sixth storage areas may be arranged, and the fifth and seventh storage areas may be arranged. However, the sixth and seventh storage areas may be arranged. Further, the second storage area and the two added storage areas may be arranged between the first storage area and the third storage area in any order.

In addition to the second storage area, three storage areas may be added, for example, the fourth, fifth, and sixth storage areas may be arranged, and the fourth, fifth, and seventh storage areas may be arranged. Storage areas may be arranged, fourth, sixth and seventh storage areas may be arranged, and fifth, sixth and seventh storage areas may be arranged. Further, the second storage area and the three added storage areas may be arranged between the first storage area and the third storage area in any order.

Further, in addition to the second storage area, fourth, fifth, sixth and seventh storage areas may be arranged. FIG. 64 shows an address map of a RAM in which these second, fourth, fifth, sixth and seventh storage areas are arranged between the first storage area and the third storage area. ..

In the above description, in any of the embodiments, the second storage area is arranged between the first storage area and the third storage area, but of course, the second storage area is arranged. It is also possible to have a configuration that does not.

Hereinafter, the embodiment shown in FIG. 64 will be described.
As shown in FIG. 64, this RAM is a storage area used as a work area (data area, stack area, etc.) by the user program, and in the embodiment shown in FIG. 64, a set value is set in the memory space of 7F00H to 7FFFH. The first storage area for storing the set value data, which is the number that manages the data, the second storage area as an unused area that is not used for the game, and the saved data saved by the CALL command, PUSH command, etc. are saved. A third storage area that is a storage area that may be stored, a fourth storage area that stores data related to external signal output, and a third storage area that stores checksum data for setting the added value of the RAM area to 0. To store the storage area of 5, the sixth storage area which is a control command buffer for storing command data transmitted from the main control means to the sub-main control means, and the stack pointer when a power failure occurs until the power is restored. A seventh storage area, which is a buffer of the above, is arranged.
The address of 8000H is the start address of the stack pointer, and is a value that is one more than 7FFFH, which is the address of the save data 1 area where the data is first saved. Actually, when it becomes necessary to save the running program for the first time, the stack pointer is subtracted by 1, so that the value of the program counter to be saved is set in the area of the save data 1 located at the address of 7FFFH. Stored.

Specifically, the first storage area for storing the set value data is arranged in the address space of 7F02H, and the fourth storage area for storing the external signal output-related data is arranged in the address space of 7FC0H, and the check sum data. The fifth storage area for storing data is arranged in the address space of 7FCEH, the sixth storage area which is a control command buffer is arranged in the address space of 7FD0H to 7FD5H, and the stack pointer (address) at the time of power failure is stored. A seventh storage area, which is a buffer for stacking data, is arranged in the address space of 7FE0H, a second storage area as an unused area is arranged in the address space of 7FF7H, and a third storage area in which saved data can be stored. It is arranged in the address space of 7FF7H to 7FFFH.

The sixth storage area, which is the control command buffer, is allocated a capacity of 6 bytes, and the third storage area, which can store the saved data, is allocated a capacity of 8 bytes. The other storage areas are allocated a capacity of one byte.

According to the game machine (slot machine) in which the address space of the RAM is configured as shown in FIG. 64, the first storage area in which the set value data is stored and the data necessary for advancing the game are saved. A second storage area, which is an unused area, a fourth storage area for storing predetermined data transmitted to the outside of the game machine, and a storage means (RAM) between the third storage area and the storage area. A fifth storage area for storing checksum data, a sixth storage area for storing command information for transmission from the main control means to the sub-main control means, and a seventh storage area for storing the stack pointer address when a power failure occurs. By arranging the storage area of the above, even if an unexpected situation occurs, the setting value data stored in the first storage area is largely overwritten by data that has no meaning at all. Can be reduced to.

That is, a situation in which interrupt instructions are continuously generated due to a runaway of the program, and the return destination address data exceeds the saved data area secured at the time of design and erodes and overwrites the area on the smaller address side. Even if the occurrence occurs, the description first describes the second storage area, which is an unused area, and then the power failure, which is practically not used except when a power failure occurs, and does not significantly affect normal games. A seventh storage area for storing the stack pointer address at the time of occurrence, and then storing command information for transmission from the main control means to the sub-main control means, which is not directly related to the main control means essential for playing the game. A sixth storage area to be used, then a fifth storage area for storing checksum data of the storage means (RAM), which is not substantially used after the first processing such as when the power is turned on in the game, and further, with the game. Will be sequentially performed in the fourth storage area that stores predetermined data transmitted to the outside of the game machine, which is not directly related, and there is a great risk that the set value data will be rewritten to data that makes no sense at all. Can be reduced to.

As a result, the possibility that it becomes impossible to play a game with a gaming machine can be significantly reduced. In particular, an unused area is arranged at a position closest to the third storage area, and even if unnecessary return destination address data is described in this unused area, there is no possibility that the data will be overwritten, which is extremely high. The layout is highly safe.

In the embodiment shown in FIG. 64, a first storage is performed between the first storage area in which the set value data is stored and the third storage area in which the data necessary for advancing the game is stored. From the area side, a fourth storage area for storing predetermined data transmitted to the outside of the game machine, a fifth storage area for storing check sum data of the storage means (RAM), and a sub-main from the main control means. A sixth storage area for storing command information to be transmitted to the control means, a seventh storage area for storing the stack pointer address when a power failure occurs, and a second storage area which is an unused area are arranged. However, the arrangement of these storage areas is not limited to the embodiment shown in FIG. 64, and can be arranged in any order.

For example, between the first storage area and the third storage area, a fourth storage area is arranged at a position closest to the first storage area among the above five storage areas, and the other fifth storage area is arranged. The storage area, the sixth storage area, the seventh storage area, and the second storage area can be rearranged and arranged in any order. In these arrangements, since the fourth storage area is arranged on the first storage area side, it is transmitted to the outside of the game machine together with the set value data stored in the first storage area. It is possible to reduce the possibility that the data stored in the fourth storage area for storing the predetermined data will be rewritten into data that makes no sense at all. As a result, the predetermined data transmitted to the outside of the gaming machine can be made correct, and accurate information can be transmitted to the hall manager or the like.

Further, for example, between the first storage area and the third storage area, a fifth storage area is arranged at a position closest to the first storage area among the above five storage areas, and other storage areas are arranged. The fourth storage area, the sixth storage area, the seventh storage area, and the second storage area can be rearranged and arranged in any order. In these arrangements, since the fifth storage area for storing the checksum data of the storage means (RAM) is arranged on the first storage area side, the setting stored in the first storage area is provided. It is possible to reduce the possibility that the data stored in the fifth storage area for storing the checksum data of the storage means (RAM) together with the value data is rewritten to data that makes no sense at all. As a result, the checksum data of the storage means (RAM) can be made correct, and the confirmation of the data value in the storage means (RAM) can be made good.

Further, for example, between the first storage area and the third storage area, a sixth storage area is arranged at a position closest to the first storage area among the above five storage areas, and other storage areas are arranged. The fourth storage area, the fifth storage area, the seventh storage area, and the second storage area can be rearranged and arranged in any order. In these arrangements, since the sixth storage area for storing the command information to be transmitted from the main control means to the sub-main control means is arranged on the first storage area side, the first storage area is arranged. There is a risk that the data stored in the sixth storage area, which stores the command information to be transmitted to the sub-main control means together with the set value data stored in, will be rewritten to data that makes no sense at all. Can be reduced. As a result, the command information to be transmitted to the sub-main control means can be made correct, and the effect processing performed by using the sub-main control means can be made good.

Further, for example, between the first storage area and the third storage area, a seventh storage area is arranged at a position closest to the first storage area among the above five storage areas, and other storage areas are arranged. The fourth storage area, the fifth storage area, the sixth storage area, and the second storage area can be rearranged and arranged in any order. In these arrangements, since the seventh storage area for storing the stack pointer address when a power failure occurs is arranged on the first storage area side, the set value data stored in the first storage area is arranged. At the same time, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the stack pointer address stored in the seventh storage area is rewritten to data that makes no sense at all. As a result, the stack pointer address can be held at the correct value until the power is restored, and the original program can be continuously processed without any trouble.

Of course, between the first storage area and the third storage area, the second storage area (unused area) is arranged on the most first storage area side, and the other fourth storage area. , The fifth storage area, the sixth storage area, and the seventh storage area can be rearranged in any order.

Further, as shown in FIG. 63 (F), the memory space allocated to the built-in RAM may be configured to be continuous with the memory space of the built-in ROM for storing user programs and data. That is, the main control unit of the gaming machine can be composed of the built-in ROM allocated to the memory space of addresses 0000H to 7DFFH and the built-in RAM allocated to the memory space of addresses 7F00H to 7FFFH described above.

<< 6th Embodiment >>
Next, regarding the slot machine according to the sixth embodiment (hereinafter, also referred to as "slot machine of the sixth form"), specifically, during rotation of the reel (also referred to as "rotating cylinder"), rotation failure or power failure or power failure The control process when the above occurs will be described with reference to FIGS. 65 to 67. In this sixth form of the slot machine, three reels (corresponding to the above-mentioned reels 3a, 3b, 3c) and three stepping motors (the above-mentioned stepping motors 35a, 35b, 35c) for rotating each reel are used. (Equivalent) is provided, and the rotation of the reel is controlled by switching the exciting phase of the stepping motor.

First, an outline of reel control will be described with reference to FIG. 65. Here, the stepping motor has four phases (φ0, φ1, φ2, φ3), and the 1-2 excitation method (φ0, φ0, φ1, φ1, φ1, φ2, φ2, during acceleration and constant speed). It is controlled by a method of sequentially switching eight exciting phase steps of φ2, φ3, φ3, φ3, and φ0), and during deceleration, it is controlled by a deceleration method that excites all phases of φ0 to φ3 (stepping motor). The configuration and control method can be changed as appropriate). Further, the excitation phase is switched in an interrupt process (corresponding to the above-mentioned timer interrupt process) executed every predetermined time (for example, 1.5 milliseconds).

As shown in FIG. 65, when the rotating cylinder start operation (operation of the start lever) is accepted, the acceleration state processing (processing of rotating the rotating cylinder while accelerating until it reaches a predetermined rotation speed) is triggered by the reception. Is executed. In the accelerated state processing, as shown in the figure, the excitation phase switching in the first step is performed when the number of executions of the interrupt processing (also referred to as “interrupt number”) reaches 100 from the start time. After that, when the number of interrupts is 50, the excitation phase switching in the second step is performed, and when the number of interrupts is 10, 5, and 2, the excitation phase switching in the third, fourth, and fifth steps is performed. .. Then, when the interrupt process next to the interrupt process in which the fifth step of the excitation phase is switched is executed (when the number of interrupts is 1), the sixth step of the excitation phase is switched and the acceleration state process (acceleration state processing) is performed. The excitation switching from the first step to the sixth step) is completed (the value of the number of interrupts that determines the switching timing of the exciting phase can be changed as appropriate).

When the acceleration state processing is completed, the constant speed state processing (processing for rotating the rotating cylinder at a constant speed) is executed. In the constant speed state processing, the excitation phase is switched every time the interrupt processing is executed (the number of interrupts is 1). If the rotation cylinder stop operation (operation of the stop switch for stopping the rotation cylinder) is accepted during the execution of the constant speed state processing, the rotation cylinder stop scheduled position (deceleration state described later) is received according to the accepted timing. The position to start the process) is determined, and the deceleration start process of rotating (sliding) the rotating cylinder at a constant speed until the rotating cylinder moves to the planned stop position is executed. Then, when the rotating cylinder moves to the planned stop position, a deceleration state process (a process of stopping the rotating cylinder while decelerating it) is executed. In the deceleration state processing, all phases of φ0 to φ3 are excited while the stop symbol interrupt processing is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 6 times).

Next, the control process when a reel rotation failure occurs during the rotating cylinder constant speed state or the rotating cylinder acceleration state will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 66A to 66C. In addition, in each flowchart, not only the processing content but also the state of the slot machine is described. FIG. 66A shows a processing procedure when a reel rotation failure occurs during the rotating cylinder constant speed state. In this case, when the rotation cylinder start operation is accepted (J11), the rotation cylinder acceleration state (a state in which the acceleration state processing can be executed) is entered (J12), and the acceleration state processing is executed (J13). .. When the acceleration state processing is completed (J14), the state shifts to the rotating cylinder constant speed state (a state in which the constant speed state processing can be executed) (J15), and the constant speed state processing is executed (J16). When a rotation failure occurs during the execution of this constant speed state processing (J17) and the rotation failure is detected (J18), reacceleration for normally rotating the rotation speed at a constant speed is started (J18). J19).

FIG. 66B shows a processing procedure when a reel rotation failure occurs during the rotating cylinder acceleration state. In this case, when the rotation cylinder start operation is accepted (J11), the rotation cylinder acceleration state is entered (J12), and the acceleration state processing is executed (J13). Even if a rotation failure occurs during the execution of this acceleration state processing (J133), the unprocessed acceleration state processing (processing of the unexecuted part of the entire process of the acceleration state processing) is executed as scheduled (J134). , The acceleration state processing is terminated (J14). After that, it shifts to the rotating cylinder constant speed state (J15), and the rotating cylinder constant speed state is executed (J16). If a rotation failure of the rotating cylinder is detected during the execution of this constant speed state processing (J18), reacceleration is started (J19). In the reacceleration, the same processing as the acceleration state processing described above may be performed, or a reacceleration state processing having a content different from the acceleration state processing is separately defined and the reacceleration state processing is performed. You may.

When a rotation failure occurs during the acceleration state processing, it is possible to detect the rotation failure and perform re-acceleration. However, there is a possibility that the rotation failure can be solved by executing the unprocessed acceleration state processing as scheduled. Therefore, in this example, even if a rotation failure occurs during the acceleration state processing, re-acceleration is not performed (the rotation failure may or may not be detected), and the constant speed state processing is being executed. When a rotation failure is detected, it is re-accelerated. By doing so, if the rotation failure is resolved by executing the unprocessed acceleration state processing as scheduled, it is not necessary to execute re-acceleration, so that the game can proceed smoothly. It becomes. In addition, the control process during the acceleration state process can be simplified (for example, even if a rotation failure occurs, reacceleration is not performed and the rotation failure is not detected), so that the control program can be used. It is possible to reduce the amount of data.

FIG. 66C shows a processing procedure when a power failure occurs during the rotating cylinder acceleration state, which causes a reel rotation failure. In this case, when the rotation cylinder start operation is accepted (J11), the rotation cylinder acceleration state is entered (J12), and the acceleration state processing is executed (J13). Even if a power failure occurs during the execution of this acceleration state processing (J131) and a rotation failure occurs after the power is restored (J132) (J133), the unprocessed acceleration state processing is executed as scheduled (J133). J134), the acceleration state processing is terminated (J14). After that, it shifts to the rotating cylinder constant speed state (J15), and the rotating cylinder constant speed state is executed (J16). If a rotation failure of the rotating cylinder is detected during the execution of this constant speed state processing (J18), reacceleration is started (J19).

In the case of this example, even if the power is cut off during the execution of the acceleration state processing and the rotation failure occurs, the re-acceleration is not performed (the rotation failure may or may not be detected). ), If a rotation failure is detected during the execution of the constant speed state processing, re-acceleration is performed. By doing so, if the rotation failure is resolved by executing the unprocessed acceleration state processing as scheduled, it is not necessary to execute re-acceleration, so that the game can proceed smoothly. It becomes. In addition, the control process during the acceleration state process can be simplified (for example, even if a rotation failure occurs due to a power failure, re-acceleration is not performed and rotation failure is not detected). , It is possible to reduce the amount of data in the control program.

For example, the detection of rotation failure of the rotating cylinder is performed as follows. Here, when the rotating cylinder is rotating normally, the stepping motor is configured to make one rotation when the exciting phase is switched by 336 steps. In this case, when the rotating cylinder is in the constant speed state, one step is advanced for each interrupt, so if the rotating cylinder is rotating normally, the rotating cylinder will make one rotation at 336 interrupts. Therefore, the number of interrupts is counted, the count value is cleared when the rotating cylinder makes one rotation, and the number of interrupts is counted again. Whether or not the rotating cylinder has made one rotation is detected by an index sensor arranged in the vicinity of the rotating cylinder (that is, when detected by the index sensor, the count value of the number of interrupts is cleared). In this way, when the rotating cylinder is in the constant speed state, the rotating cylinder should make one rotation (detected by the index sensor) when the number of interrupts (count value) reaches 336. Therefore, if there is no detection by the index sensor even if the number of interrupts exceeds 336, it can be determined that a rotation failure has occurred. However, if it is immediately determined that the rotation is defective when the number of interrupts exceeds 336, the number of cases where the rotation is determined to be defective may increase and the reel control may be delayed. When the number of interrupts reaches 400 (the number of interrupts can be changed as appropriate), it is determined that the rotation is defective.

Next, with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 67 (A) to 67 (C), the control process when a winning combination (hereinafter, also referred to as “winning confirmation combination”) that is always established regardless of the pushing order and pushing position is won. explain. In addition, in each flowchart, not only the processing content but also the state of the slot machine is described. FIG. 67A shows a processing procedure when all the rotating cylinders are normally stopped after the winning winning combination is won.

In this case, when the winning winning combination is won (J31) and the rotating cylinder starts rotating (J32), the rotating cylinder is shifted to the constant speed state (J33), and the constant speed state processing is executed (J34). After that, it shifts to the state where the stop operation can be accepted (the state where the cylinder is rotated at a constant speed and the operation of the stop switch can be accepted) (J35), and when the first stop operation is accepted (J36), the first time. In the body (rotating body stopped by the first stop operation), the winning combination symbol (corresponding symbol of the winning winning combination) is stopped and displayed on the effective line (J37). After that, when the second stop operation is accepted (J38), the winning combination symbol is stopped and displayed on the effective line in the second cylinder (the cylinder stopped by the second stop operation) (J39). Further, when the third stop operation is accepted (J40), the state shifts to the rotating cylinder deceleration enable state (the state in which the deceleration start process and the subsequent deceleration state process can be executed) (J41). After that, the deceleration start process is executed to move the third cylinder (the cylinder stopped by the third stop operation) to the planned stop position (J42), and further, the deceleration state process is executed to the third cylinder. The winning combination symbol is stopped and displayed on the effective line (J43). Then, after confirming that the body has stopped all times (J44), the payout of game medals is started (J45).

FIG. 67B shows a processing procedure when a power failure occurs after the reception of the third stop operation. In this case, when the winning winning combination is won (J31) and the rotating cylinder starts rotating (J32), the rotating cylinder is shifted to the constant speed state (J33), and the constant speed state processing is executed (J34). After that, the state shifts to the stop operation acceptable state (J35), and when the first stop operation is accepted (J36), the winning combination symbol is stopped and displayed on the valid line in the first body (J37). After that, when the second stop operation is accepted (J38), the winning combination symbol is stopped and displayed on the effective line in the second body (J39). Further, when the third stop operation is accepted (J40), the state shifts to the rotating cylinder stop state (J41). After that, even if the power is cut off (J411), the deceleration start process is executed to move the third cylinder to the planned stop position (J42), and the deceleration state process is executed. After that, the power off processing is executed (J421), and the power is restored (J422). Since the deceleration start process and the deceleration state process are executed before the power cutoff process is executed, the winning combination symbol is stopped and displayed on the effective line in the 3rd cylinder (J43), and the entire cylinder is stopped (J44). ), Then the payout of the game medal is started (J45).

In the case of this example, even if the power is cut off after the third stop operation is accepted, the third body can be moved to the planned stop position and the winning combination symbol can be stopped and displayed on the effective line. (Even if a power outage occurs, a level of power that can control the rotation cylinder (a level of power that is not detected as a power outage) is supplied for a predetermined period, and deceleration start processing and deceleration state processing are normally executed within that predetermined period. It is possible to configure). Therefore, even if the power is cut off after the third stop operation is accepted, the winning symbol combination can be stopped and displayed on the effective line, so that the player does not feel uncomfortable. In addition, since the game medals can be paid out promptly after the power is restored, the game can proceed smoothly.

FIG. 67C shows a processing procedure when a rotation failure occurs after the reception of the third stop operation. In this case, when the winning winning combination is won (J31) and the rotating cylinder starts rotating (J32), the rotating cylinder is shifted to the constant speed state (J33), and the constant speed state processing is executed (J34). After that, the state shifts to the stop operation acceptable state (J35), and when the first stop operation is accepted (J36), the winning combination symbol is stopped and displayed on the valid line in the first body (J37). After that, when the second stop operation is accepted (J38), the winning combination symbol is stopped and displayed on the effective line in the second body (J39). Further, when the third stop operation is accepted (J40), the state shifts to the rotating cylinder stop state (J41). After that, a rotation failure occurred in the 3rd cylinder (J415), which made it impossible to normally execute the deceleration start processing and the deceleration state processing, and the 3rd cylinder could be moved to the scheduled stop position. (J416), the winning combination symbol cannot be stopped and displayed on the effective line in the 3rd torso (J417). However, after confirming that the body has stopped all times (J44), the payout of game medals is started (J45).

In the case of this example, the game medal is paid out even if the winning combination symbol cannot be stopped and displayed on the effective line in the 3rd cylinder due to the rotation failure of the rotating cylinder after the 3rd stop operation is accepted. Is supposed to do. This is because it is internally determined that the winning combination will be established when the third stop operation is accepted, but the winning combination symbol will not be stopped and displayed on the valid line in the third body. However, if the game medals are not paid out, the player will be unfairly disadvantaged. Therefore, if there is no problem in the program control, even if the actual stop position is deviated due to an external factor, the player is benefited from the fact that the winning symbols are aligned as the display determination. As in this example, even if the winning combination symbols are not aligned, when the formation is confirmed internally, it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged by paying out the game medals. Moreover, it becomes possible to smoothly proceed with the game. In this example, the case where the winning winning combination is won has been described as an example, but the same control can be performed even when a winning combination other than the winning winning combination is won. For example, if a winning combination that is established depending on the pushing order or pushing position is won, and if it is internally determined that the winning combination will be established when the third stop operation is accepted, then a rotation failure occurs. Even if it occurs and the winning combination symbol cannot be stopped and displayed on the effective line, the game medal may be paid out. On the other hand, when it is internally determined that the winning combination will not be established when the third stop operation is accepted, but the winning combination symbol is stopped and displayed on the valid line due to a subsequent rotation failure. May not pay out game medals. This makes it possible to prevent the player from unreasonably obtaining profits that would not otherwise be possible.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 67 (B), even if the power is cut off after the third stop operation is accepted, the third body is moved to the planned stop position and the winning combination symbol is placed on the effective line. It is configured so that it can be stopped and displayed. On the other hand, depending on the timing when the power supply is cut off, it is possible to make the configuration in which the winning combination symbol may not be stopped and displayed on the effective line in the third cylinder. Even with such a configuration, if it is internally determined that the winning combination will be established when the third stop operation is accepted, the power will be cut off after that and the winning combination symbol will be valid. It is preferable that the game medals are paid out even if the stop display cannot be displayed on the line.

Further, if a power failure or a rotation failure occurs after receiving the third stop operation, an error notification may be performed. This error notification may be performed whenever a power failure or rotation failure occurs, or an error may occur when a game medal is paid out (when the winning combination is internally confirmed). If the notification is not performed and the game medal is not paid out (when the non-establishment of the winning combination is internally determined), the error notification may be performed. If the configuration is such that error notification is always performed, the number of times for determining whether or not to perform error notification can be reduced, so that the control program can be simplified. If the error notification is not performed when paying out the game medals, it is possible to prevent the game from being interrupted by the error notification, so that the game can proceed smoothly. If you do not pay out the game medals, you can notify the error even if the winning combination symbol that should not be stopped and displayed on the valid line stops due to power failure or rotation failure. Since it becomes easier for the player to understand that it is due to an error, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrust that the game medal is not paid out even though the winning combination symbols are complete. It will be possible.

In the above, the case where the power off or the rotation failure occurs after the third stop operation is accepted has been described, but the case where the power off or the rotation failure occurs after the first stop operation or the second stop operation is accepted. Can have the same configuration. For example, even if the power off or rotation failure occurs after the second stop operation is accepted and the winning combination symbol cannot be stopped and displayed on the effective line in the second body, the first stop before the power is turned off. If the winning combination symbol is stopped and displayed on the effective line in the first cylinder and the third cylinder by the operation and the third stop operation after the power is restored, the game medal may be paid out. Similarly, even if the power is cut off or rotation failure occurs after the first stop operation is accepted and the winning combination symbol cannot be stopped and displayed on the effective line in the first cylinder, the second after the power is restored. When the winning combination symbol is stopped and displayed on the effective line in the 2nd and 3rd torso by the stop operation and the 3rd stop operation, the game medal may be paid out.

<< 7th Embodiment >>
Next, regarding the slot machine according to the seventh embodiment (hereinafter, also referred to as "slot machine of the seventh form"), specifically, regarding the setting of the number of winnings of the re-game combination and the payout rate, and the setting of the bonus game. , FIGS. 68 to 71 will be described with reference to FIGS.

The payout rate in the slot machine is based on the total number of game media (also referred to as "total bet number") placed (bet) on the slot machine in order to play the games when the games are played a predetermined number of times. The ratio of the total number of game media paid out from the slot machine as a result of the game (also referred to as "total number of payouts"). The higher the payout rate, the more advantageous it is for the player and the higher the profit can be obtained, but the more disadvantageous it is for the amusement place and the lower the operating profit. On the contrary, the lower the payout rate, the more disadvantageous the player may be and the more disadvantageous the player may be, while the more advantageous the game hall is and the higher the profit in business. Therefore, how to set the ball output rate is important in designing (determining the specifications) the slot machine.

In the slot machine of the seventh form, by design, when each predetermined number of games (400 times, 1600 times, 6000 times, 17500 times) is played, the number of times the re-game combination is won is shown in the middle column of FIG. It is set so as to be within the numerical range shown, and thereby, the ball output rate is set to be within the numerical range shown in the right column of FIG. 68. In FIG. 68, the number of winnings of the design replaying combination when the games are played 400 times, 1600 times, 6000 times, and 17500 times are shown by P1, P2, P3, and P4, respectively. The design ball output rates are indicated by Q1, Q2, Q3, and Q4, respectively. The payout rate (Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4) is calculated by dividing the total number of payouts when a predetermined number of games are played by the total number of bets. In addition, the number of bets for the next game when the re-game combination is established is calculated as 0.

Further, the following two methods are known as simulation methods for verifying the design ball output rate. The first method is a method of calculating the payout rate based on the game result when the rotating cylinder is stopped by an arbitrary pushing order and an arbitrary pushing position in all the games of a predetermined number of times. The second method is a method of calculating the payout rate based on the game result when all the winning combinations are established in the game in the predetermined number of games. In either method, when a plurality of set values (for example, set values 1 to 6) are set for the winning probability of a winning combination, all the set values are verified and bets are placed in one game. If the number of game media that can be played can be changed (for example, 1 bet, 2 bets, 3 bets), verification is performed for all the bet numbers. In the slot machine of the seventh form, the ball output rate is set to be within the numerical range shown in FIG. 68 by design regardless of which method is used for verification.

Hereinafter, the contents shown in FIG. 68 will be described individually. Regarding the lower limit value when 400 games are played, the re-game combination is set to win at least 54 times (54 ≤ P1) by design, and as a result, the ball output rate is set by design. It is set to exceed 1/3 (1/3 <Q1). If the lower limit of the payout rate is set lower than this, the player may be in a significantly disadvantageous state as a result of playing 400 times, but according to this example, such a situation occurs. It is possible to prevent this. In addition, if the ball output rate does not exceed 1/3 at the stage of playing less than 400 times, as a player, let's play up to 400 times and recover as much as possible (profit). As a game hall, there will be more opportunities for players to play at least 400 times, and the operating rate of slot machines will increase, ensuring a certain level of profit. It will be easier.

Regarding the upper limit value when playing 400 times, the re-game combination is set to win within the range not exceeding 300 times (P1 ≤ 300) by design, and by design, the ball is put out. The rate is set to be less than 2.2 (Q1 <2.2). If the upper limit of the payout rate is set higher than this, there is a risk that the playground will be in a significantly disadvantageous state as a result of playing 400 games, but according to this example, such a situation occurs. It is possible to prevent this. In addition, if the ball output rate is significantly lower than 2.2 at the stage of playing less than 400 times, as a player, let's play up to 400 times and recover as much as possible (profit). As a playground, there will be more opportunities for players to play at least 400 times, and the operating rate of slot machines will increase, ensuring a certain level of profit. It becomes easier to do.

Regarding the lower limit value when 1600 games are played, the re-game combination is set to win at least 219 times (219 ≦ P2) by design, and as a result, the ball output rate is set by design. It is set to exceed 2/5 (2/5 <Q2). If the lower limit of the payout rate is set lower than this, the player may be in a significantly disadvantageous state as a result of playing 1600 times, but according to this example, such a situation occurs. It is possible to prevent this. In addition, if the ball output rate does not exceed 2/5 at the stage where the game has been played more than 400 times but less than 1600 times, the player plays up to 1600 times. Since you will have the consciousness to recover even a little (to increase profits), as a game hall, there will be more opportunities for players to play games up to 1600 times, and the operating rate of slot machines will increase and be constant. It becomes easier to secure the profit of.

Regarding the upper limit value when 1600 games are played, the design is set so that the re-game combination is won within the range not exceeding 1200 times (P2 ≤ 1200), and as a result, the ball is released by design. The rate is set to be less than 1.5 (Q2 <1.5). If the upper limit of the payout rate is set higher than this, there is a risk that the playground will be in a significantly disadvantageous state as a result of playing 1600 times, but according to this example, such a situation occurs. It is possible to prevent this. In addition, if the ball output rate is significantly less than 1.5 at the stage where the number of games exceeded 400 times but less than 1600 times, the player plays up to 1600 times. Since you will have the consciousness to recover even a little (to increase profits), as a game hall, there will be more opportunities for players to play games up to 1600 times, and the operating rate of slot machines will increase. It becomes easier to secure a certain amount of profit.

Regarding the lower limit value when 6000 games are played, the re-game combination is set to win at least 821 times (821 ≤ P3) by design, and as a result, the ball output rate is set by design. It is set to exceed 1/2 (1/2 <Q3). If the lower limit of the payout rate is set lower than this, the player may be in a significantly disadvantageous state as a result of playing 6000 times, but according to this example, such a situation occurs. It is possible to prevent this. In addition, if the ball output rate does not exceed 1/2 at the stage where the number of games exceeded 1600 but less than 6000, the player plays up to 6000 times. Since you will have the consciousness to recover even a little (to increase profits), as a game hall, there will be more opportunities for players to play games up to 6000 times, and the operating rate of slot machines will increase and be constant. It becomes easier to secure the profit of.

Regarding the upper limit value when playing 6000 times, the design is set so that the re-game combination is won within the range not exceeding 4500 times (P2 ≤ 4500), and as a result, the ball is output by design. The rate is set to be below 1.26 (Q2 <1.26). If the upper limit of the payout rate is set higher than this, there is a risk that the game field will be in a significantly disadvantageous state as a result of playing 6000 games, but according to this example, such a situation occurs. It is possible to prevent this. In addition, if the ball output rate is significantly lower than 1.26 at the stage where the number of games exceeded 1600 but less than 6000, the player plays up to 6000 times. Since you will have the consciousness to recover even a little (to increase profits), as a game hall, there will be more opportunities for players to play games up to 6000 times, and the operating rate of slot machines will increase. It becomes easier to secure a certain profit.

Regarding the lower limit value when playing 17,500 times, the re-game combination is set to win at least 2397 times (2397 ≤ P4) by design, and as a result, the ball output rate is set by design. It is set to exceed 3/5 (3/5 <Q4). If the lower limit of the payout rate is set lower than this, the player may be in a significantly disadvantageous state as a result of playing 17,500 times, but according to this example, such a situation occurs. It is possible to prevent this. In addition, if the ball output rate does not exceed 3/5 at the stage where the number of games exceeded 6000 but less than 17,500, the player plays up to 17,500. Since you will have the consciousness to recover even a little (to increase profits), as a game hall, there will be more opportunities for players to play games up to 17,500 times, and the operating rate of slot machines will increase and be constant. It becomes easier to secure the profit of.

Regarding the upper limit value when playing 17,500 times, the re-game combination is set to win within the range not exceeding 13125 times (P2 ≤ 13125) by design, and as a result, the ball is ejected by design. The rate is set to be less than 1.15 (Q2 <1.15). If the upper limit of the payout rate is set higher than this, there is a risk that the game field will be in a significantly disadvantageous state as a result of playing 17,500 times, but according to this example, such a situation occurs. It is possible to prevent this. In addition, if the ball output rate is significantly lower than 1.15 at the stage where the number of games exceeded 6000 but less than 17,500, the player plays up to 17,500. Since you will be conscious of trying to recover even a little (to increase profits), as a game hall, there will be more opportunities for players to play games up to 17,500 times, and the operating rate of slot machines will increase. It becomes easier to secure a certain profit.

Here, the simulation result of the ball output rate will be described with reference to FIG. 69. FIG. 69 (A) shows an example of the result when the simulation by the above-mentioned second method (the winning combination is always established in the game) is performed over 10 games. ) Shows the winning combination (here, the bell role and the replaying combination), the winning probability of each loss, and the number of payouts (when the number of bets is 3) in the simulation.

In this simulation result, the winning combinations from the first game to the tenth game are lost, bell role, replay role, loss, loss, bell role, replay role, bell role, loss, and loss, respectively. There is. The number of bets is "0" in the next game when the re-game combination is established, and "3" in other games. In addition, the number of payouts is "6" when the bell role is established, and "0" when the re-game combination is established and when the game is lost, so the total number of bets in 10 games is "24" and the total number of payouts. Is "18". When the ball output rate is calculated based on this simulation result, it is 0.75 (= 18/24). This is a result that satisfies the above-mentioned design settings of the ball output rates Q1 to Q4. In this simulation result, the bonus combination is not won, but if a bonus game is provided when the bonus combination is won and established, a net increase of 2 cards (for example, 3 bets and 5 cards are paid out). It is preferable to use this as a bonus game.

In the above, the upper limit of the number of winnings of the design replay combination (300, 1200, 4500, 13125) when the game is played a predetermined number of times (400 times, 1600 times, 6000 times, 17500 times) is set. By setting, the design does not exceed the upper limit of the ball output rate (2.2, 1.5, 1.26, 1.15). On the other hand, by setting a small number of game medals to be paid out when a small winning combination is established, even if the number of winnings of the re-gaming combination exceeds the above-mentioned upper limit, the payout rate is described above in terms of design. It is also possible to configure it so that it does not exceed the upper limit of.

<Bonus game settings>
When a bonus game is installed, the ball output rate is set higher than usual during the bonus game, so how to set the upper limit of the game medium to be paid out during the bonus game greatly affects the overall ball output rate. Affect. In addition, when the ratio of the number of combinations of symbols (also referred to as "bonus symbols") that trigger the execution of the bonus game to the number of combinations of all symbols in all the rotating cylinders becomes high, the bonus game is executed. Since the ratio will also increase, how to set the maximum number of combinations of bonus symbols (also referred to as "maximum number of symbol combinations") will also affect the overall payout rate.

The slot machine of the seventh form is equipped with a total of three bonus games, two BB (big bonus) games (BB1, BB2) and one MB (middle bonus) game (MB1). The BB game is a bonus game in which a maximum of 8 prizes can be won and a maximum of 15 cards can be paid out with one prize according to the standard when designing a slot machine ("RB (Regular Bonus) Game"). (Also called) is a bonus game that can be executed continuously. The MB game is a bonus game in which at least one reel stops within a shorter time (for example, 75 milliseconds) than usual after the stop operation is accepted (also referred to as a "CB (challenge bonus) game"). However, it is a bonus game that can be executed continuously.

Hereinafter, the setting contents of each bonus game will be described individually with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71. FIG. 70 (A) shows the setting contents of BB1 when the number of symbols on each reel is 21, and FIG. 70 (B) shows the setting of BB1 when the number of symbols on each reel is 20. It shows the contents. As shown in the figure, the upper limit of the number of payouts in BB1 is "maximum 225" (up to 225 in BB1) regardless of whether the number of symbols on each reel is 21 or 20. It is possible to pay out medals, but no more than 225 medals will be paid out). Further, in BB1, the maximum number of symbol combinations of BB symbols is set to "12" when the number of symbols on each reel is 21, and "10" when the number of symbols on each reel is 20. Is set to.

The pattern of the combination of the number of symbols in each reel of BB1 when the actual number of combinations of BB symbols is set to the maximum number of symbol combinations is as shown in the figure. That is, when the number of symbol combinations of BB symbols is "12", there are 18 combinations patterns from symbol number combination A1 to symbol number combination A18, and when the number of symbol combinations of BB symbols is "10", there are 18 combinations. , There are nine combinations patterns from the symbol number combination B1 to the symbol number combination B9. Each symbol number combination indicates the number of each symbol on the left reel, the middle reel, and the right reel. For example, the symbol number combination A1 indicates a pattern in which 12 BB symbols are arranged on the left reel, 1 BB symbol is arranged on the middle reel, and 1 BB symbol is arranged on the right reel. The combination A7 shows one pattern of BB symbols arranged on the left reel, six BB symbols arranged on the middle reel, and two BB symbols arranged on the right reel. Three BB symbols are placed on the left reel, four BB symbols are placed on the middle reel, and one BB symbol is placed on the right reel (all are BBs on each reel). Multiplying the number of symbols gives "12").

Similarly, the symbol number combination B1 indicates a pattern in which 10 BB symbols are arranged on the left reel, 1 BB symbol is arranged on the middle reel, and 1 BB symbol is arranged on the right reel. The number combination B5 shows a pattern of 5 BB symbols arranged on the left reel, 1 BB symbol arranged on the middle reel, and 2 BB symbols arranged on the right reel. , 1 BB symbol placed on the left reel, 2 BB symbols placed on the middle reel, and 5 BB symbols placed on the right reel (all on each reel) Multiplying the number of BB symbols gives "10").

FIG. 71 (A) shows the setting contents of BB2 when the number of symbols on each reel is 21, and FIG. 71 (B) shows the setting of BB1 when the number of symbols on each reel is 20. It shows the contents. As shown in the figure, the upper limit of the number of payouts in BB2 is "more than 285" (the number of game medals paid out in BB2 is 285) regardless of whether the number of symbols on each reel is 21 or 20. BB2 ends when the number of sheets is exceeded). Further, in BB2, the maximum number of symbol combinations of BB symbols is set to "6" when the number of symbols on each reel is 21, and "5" when the number of symbols on each reel is 20. Is set to.

The pattern of the combination of the number of symbols in each reel of BB2 when the actual number of combinations of BB symbols is set to the maximum number of symbol combinations is as shown in the figure. That is, when the number of symbol combinations of BB symbols is "6", there are nine combination patterns from symbol number combination C1 to symbol number combination C9, and when the number of symbol combinations of BB symbols is "5", there are nine combinations. , There are three types of combination patterns from the symbol number combination D1 to the symbol number combination D3. For example, the symbol number combination C1 indicates a pattern in which 6 BB symbols are arranged on the left reel, 1 BB symbol is arranged on the middle reel, and 1 BB symbol is arranged on the right reel. The combination C4 shows a pattern of three BB symbols arranged on the left reel, two BB symbols arranged on the middle reel, and one BB symbol arranged on the right reel. Two BB symbols are placed on the left reel, one BB symbol is placed on the middle reel, and three BB symbols are placed on the right reel (all are BBs on each reel). Multiplying the number of symbols gives "6").

Similarly, the symbol number combination D1 shows a pattern of 5 BB symbols arranged on the left reel, 1 BB symbol arranged on the middle reel, and 1 BB symbol arranged on the right reel. The number combination D2 indicates a pattern in which one BB symbol is arranged on the left reel, five BB symbols are arranged on the middle reel, and one BB symbol is arranged on the right reel. , One BB symbol placed on the left reel, one BB symbol placed on the middle reel, and five BB symbols placed on the right reel (all on each reel). Multiplying the number of BB symbols gives "5").

FIG. 71 (C) shows the setting contents (upper limit of the number of payouts) of MB1. As shown in the figure, the upper limit of the number of payouts in MB1 is set to "more than 153" (MB1 ends when the number of payouts of game medals in MB1 exceeds 153). In MB1, the number of symbols on each reel and the maximum number of symbol combinations of bonus symbols are not particularly set.

In the slot machine of the seventh form, the bonus game has a high advantage for the player in the order of BB2> BB1> MB1. That is, although BB1 and MB1 are bonus games having a lower advantage than BB2, they are positioned as bonus games that are more advantageous than one RB game. In one RB game, according to the standard when designing a slot machine, it is possible to pay out up to 120 cards (up to 8 winnings and up to 15 payouts per winning). Become. Therefore, if the upper limit of the number of payouts of BB1 or MB1 is set to "120" or less, a player who can receive only that amount of payout may have the impression that the bonus game is less than or equal to the RB game. Therefore, BB1 and BB1 are used so that the player can surely know that the bonus game is more advantageous than the RB game (the number of payouts is more than the maximum payout number "120" allowed by the standard of one RB game). The upper limit of the number of each payout in MB1 is set to "maximum 225" in BB1 and "more than 153" in MB1.

BB2 is a bonus game with a higher advantage than BB1 or MB1. Therefore, the upper limit of the number of payouts in BB2 is set to exceed the upper limit of the number of payouts of BB1 and MB1 respectively. However, if the upper limit of the number of payouts in BB2 is set too high, there is a possibility that a player who has won many game medals by BB2 is likely to be absorbed in the game in an attempt to hit BB2 again. Therefore, for the purpose of preventing the player from being absorbed in such a game (suppressing gambling), the upper limit of the number of payouts in BB2 is set to "more than 285". The numerical value of "285" is larger than twice and less than three times the maximum payout number "120" permitted by the standard of one RB game.

<Other embodiments>
Next, other embodiments different from the above-described embodiments will be described with reference to FIGS. 72 to 88. FIG. 72 is an external view showing the appearance of the slot machine according to another embodiment. The term "image" in the following description includes still images and moving images, unless otherwise specified.

Conventionally, in gaming machines, as a measure against immersiveness (a measure to reduce the number of players who play games beyond their own resources), attention is given while waiting for a game. However, most of the players who are watching the demo screen are not the players who are actually absorbed in the game, but the players who are about to start the game, so they can exert the expected effect as a countermeasure against the depression. However, the number of players who played games beyond their own resources did not decrease.

It is thought that the devotion occurs as a result of the player's inability to make a calm judgment. The following timings can be mentioned as timings at which there is a high possibility that a calm judgment cannot be made.
(1) Timing at which the AT game ends Since many game medals are awarded during the AT game, it is highly likely that the player will become more motivated and will not be able to make a calm judgment. In addition, it is easy to expect that the AT game is hidden (maybe the AT lottery has been won), and it is highly possible that a calm judgment cannot be made. Further, at the end of the AT game, the total number of game medals awarded during the AT game is displayed on the image display device. At that time, if the number of game medals given during the AT game is smaller than the number of game medals corresponding to the amount of money used so far, it is easy to fall into the feeling of trying to get it back (let's win the AT lottery) and calmly. It can be said that there is a high possibility that it will not be possible to make a judgment.
(2) Timing at the end of the bonus game During the bonus game, many game medals are given, so it is highly possible that the player becomes more motivated and cannot make a calm judgment. In addition, if the number of times the bonus combination is won is large, it is easy to expect that the setting is high (for example, the set value is 5 or more), and it is highly likely that a calm judgment cannot be made. Further, at the end of the bonus game, the total number of game medals given during the bonus game is displayed on the image display device. At that time, if the number of game medals given during the bonus game is smaller than the number of game medals corresponding to the amount of money used so far, it is easy to fall into the feeling of recovering (let's win the bonus role) and calmly. It can be said that there is a high possibility that it will not be possible to make a judgment.

Therefore, in another embodiment, attention is given at the timing when a special game such as an AT game or a bonus game in which many game medals can be awarded ends.

FIG. 73 is an example of an end screen displayed on the image display device and an image for calling attention (hereinafter, referred to as “attention image”) at the end of the special game. The end screen is an image showing at least the total number of game medals (TOTAL XXX) and the background given during the special game. An image showing the total number of game medals (TOTAL XXX) given during the special game may be prepared as an image separate from the image showing the background (hereinafter referred to as "background image"). In addition, the alert image is an image that clearly states "Be careful not to get into it. Pachislot is a play that you can enjoy moderately."

Next, with reference to FIG. 74, the size of the caution image to be displayed on the image display device at the end of the special game will be described. If the attention-calling image is too small, the player cannot recognize it, and the effect expected as a countermeasure against immersiveness cannot be exhibited. On the other hand, if it is too large, it may hinder the viewing of other images. In other words, it can be offensive to the player. Therefore, in another embodiment, if the image display device that displays the alert image is less than 7 inches (in other words, if it is a small image display device), the size of the alert image is 10.00 mm in length. The width is 64.12 mm. If the image display device that displays the alert image is 7 inches or more (in other words, if it is a large image display device), the size of the alert image is 30.00 mm in length and 192.37 mm in width. It is supposed to be.

Next, with reference to FIG. 75, the timing of displaying the end screen and the alert image on the image display device will be described. FIG. 75 shows the final game of the special game, and when a game medal is awarded in the final game (when a small winning combination is won), the end screen and a warning are displayed on the image display device after adding or paying out as the number of credits. An image is displayed (FIG. 75 (a)). If no game medal is awarded in the final game (such as when the replay combination wins a prize), the end screen and the alert image are displayed on the image display device after the rotation of all reels has stopped (FIG. 75 (b)). ).

Next, the timing for hiding the end screen on the image display device will be described. One of the reasons for displaying the end screen is to inform the player of the total number of game medals awarded during the special game. That is, it can be said that there is no problem even if the end screen is hidden as long as it seems that the player has recognized the total number of game medals given during the special game. Therefore, in another embodiment, the end screen is hidden when the start switch is operated.

Further, in another embodiment, when the start switch is operated, an effect screen corresponding to the game situation at that time is displayed on the image display device. For example, if the bonus game or the game after the end of the AT game is a normal game and the cherry role, which is one of the small roles, is won, it means that the cherry role as shown in FIG. 76 (a) is won. The suggestive effect screen can be displayed. Further, if the game after the end of the bonus game is an AT preparation game and the push order bell role, which is one of the small roles, is won, the stop switch is operated in any order as shown in FIG. 76 (b). It is possible to display a push order image (hereinafter, also referred to as a “navigation image”) indicating whether or not it should be performed, and an effect screen during the AT preparation game.

Next, the time for which the alert image is continuously displayed will be described. If the time for displaying the attention-calling image is too short, the player cannot recognize it, and the expected effect as a countermeasure against immersiveness cannot be exhibited. Moreover, even if it can be recognized, it does not care, and the expected effect as a countermeasure against immersiveness cannot be exhibited. On the other hand, if it is too long, it may hinder the viewing of other images. In other words, it can be offensive to the player. Therefore, in other embodiments, the attention-calling image is continuously displayed only for a period of time in which the expected effect as a countermeasure against immersiveness can be exhibited and the player does not feel uncomfortable. The time appropriate for continuing to display the alert image will be explained step by step.

First, with reference to FIG. 77, the time spent when the player plays the game in the shortest time will be described. After the start switch is operated, the time spent from the start of the rotation of the reel until the rotation speed of the reel becomes constant is about 180 ms. In addition, the maximum time spent from the operation of the stop switch to the stop of the rotation of the reel is 190 ms (Article 6 of the Regulations Concerning Certification of Gaming Machines and Examination of Types, etc. (Technical Standards for Gaming Machine Models). ) Shown in Appendix 5 (1) a (g)). Further, the time spent adding the granted game medals as the number of credits and the time actually spent paying out are about 40 ms per card. That is, although the time spent when the player plays the game in the shortest time varies depending on the number of game medals given, if the specifications are such that multiple stop switches cannot be operated at the same time (multiple reels cannot be stopped and controlled at the same time). Approximately 750 ms to approximately 1070 ms (when the number of game medals awarded is 0 to 8), and if the specifications allow multiple stop switches to be operated at the same time (multiple reels can be stopped and controlled at the same time), approximately 370 ms to approximately 690 ms. (When the number of game medals given is 0 to 8).

By the way, even if the player plays the game in the shortest time, one game cannot be completed in less than the minimum game time (the minimum time required for one game is 4100 ms or more). This is an interpretation of Appendix 5 (1) Li (a) and its technical standards shown in Article 6 of the Regulations Concerning Certification of Pachinko Machines and Examination of Types, etc. (Technical Standards for Game Machine Types). It is stipulated in the standard. Therefore, in another embodiment, as shown in FIG. 78, even when the previous game is played in the shortest time and the start switch is operated, it is the reel in the previous game that starts the rotation of the reel. By setting 4100 ms after the start of the rotation of the game, one game is not completed in less than the minimum game time.

In general, in the BB game, which is one of the bonus games, a small winning combination that does not require a push (a small winning combination that does not require the stop switch to be operated aiming at a specific symbol) is won with a high probability (always won). It may be a specification). Further, in the AT game, although the push order bell combination and the push order replay combination, which require the stop switches to be operated in a specific order, are won, the order in which they should be operated is taught. Furthermore, the player is in an excited state during the bonus game or the AT game. Therefore, at least during the special game, many players play in the shortest time.

As described above, even if the player plays the game in the shortest time, one game cannot be completed in less than the minimum game time. That is, as shown in FIG. 79, when the final game of the special game is played in the shortest time, even if the start switch is operated immediately, there is a certain amount of time before the reel starts rotating. Further, even if the rotation of the reel starts, there is a certain amount of time before the rotation speed of the reel becomes constant. Since any operation by the player is invalid during these times, the player will not be uncomfortable even if the warning image is continuously displayed, but the warning image will be displayed even after these times. If it continues to be displayed, it may cause discomfort to the player. This is because, after these times, at least the operation of the stop switch becomes effective, but the suggestion that the cherry role was won as shown in FIG. 76 (a) and the warning image overlap, so that the stop switch is switched. This is because you cannot operate (because you do not know which role to aim for), or because the warning image is displayed, you may feel anxious that you should not operate the stop switch. .. Therefore, it can be said that it is preferable that the time for continuing to display the alert image does not exceed these times.

Therefore, in another embodiment, the appropriate time for continuously displaying the alert image is set to 3000 ms or more and 3210 ms or less. The reason why it is set to 3000 ms or more is that the longer it is, the more effective it is expected to be as a countermeasure against immersiveness.

As shown in FIG. 80, it seems that there are a few players who spend a lot of time playing the game even during the special game. In that case, if the attention-calling image is continuously displayed for 3210 ms, at least the operation of the stop switch becomes effective on the way, which may cause discomfort to the player. However, since he is a player who spends a lot of time playing the game even during the special game, it is highly likely that he does not feel more uncomfortable than the player who plays the game in the shortest time. By the way, if the game is played in the shortest time after the attention alert image is hidden, one game can be completed before the minimum game time elapses. Therefore, although it is possible to end one game before the minimum game time elapses, the warning image continues to be displayed, so that one game is performed before the minimum game time elapses. There will be no complaints about not being able to finish the game (loss).

Next, the position where the alert image is displayed will be described. Basically, it is preferable that the display is in a position that is easy for the player to recognize. One of the positions easily recognized by the player is a position above the center of the housing. This is because the height of the player's eyes is above the center of the housing.

In another embodiment, as shown in FIG. 72, an image display device is provided above the center of the housing, and as shown in FIG. 73, a warning image is displayed above the center of the image display device.

Of course, if the image display device is provided above the center of the housing, the image display device is above the center, above the center, above the right corner, above the center, above the left corner, below the center, below the center, and below the center. , A warning image may be displayed in the left corner below the center.

In addition, it is preferable to determine the position where the attention-calling image is displayed in consideration of the position where the other image is displayed. For example, it is preferable to display a warning image at a position that does not overlap as much as possible with the total number of game medals (TOTAL XXX) given during the special game and the suggestion that the cherry role has been won. Further, it is preferable to display the attention-calling image at a position where the push-order image does not overlap as much as possible.

Further, in another embodiment, the alert is issued even while waiting for the game. FIG. 81 shows a demo screen displayed on the image display device during the game standby.

When the game is on standby, an image showing the manufacturer is first displayed (FIG. 81 (a)). Then, after the lapse of a predetermined time, a warning image is displayed (FIG. 81 (b)). Further, after a lapse of a predetermined time, an image introducing the subject of the slot machine is displayed (FIG. 81 (c)). In this way, FIGS. 81 (a) to 81 (c) are repeatedly displayed on the image display device during the game standby.

As mentioned above, most of the players watching the demo screen are not the players who are actually absorbed in it, but the players who are about to start the game. As a countermeasure against immersiveness, it is possible to impress the player who is about to start the game that he / she should not be enthusiastic in advance, but if excessive attention is given, there is a risk that the motivation for the game will be reduced. Therefore, in another embodiment, the time during which the image for alerting is continuously displayed during the waiting for the game is shorter than the time during which the image for alerting is continuously displayed at the end of the special game. In other words, it is less than 3000 ms. Specifically, it is set to 2000 ms or less. However, it is not limited to this.

By the way, the position and size of displaying the alert image are the same as the position and size of being displayed at the end of the special game. This is because if the display position is changed depending on the situation, the burden on the sub-control unit may increase. Also, if the size is changed, it is necessary to prepare a plurality of images.

Next, a case where an error occurs in the final game of the special game will be described with reference to FIG. 85. In another embodiment, even if an error occurs between the operation of the start switch and the stop of rotation of all reels, the progress of the game is not stopped until the rotation of all reels is stopped. It has become. This is because if the progress of the game is stopped, the player's concentration may be lost and mistakes may easily occur when operating the stop switch. It should be noted that the minimum game time (4100 ms) is measured even while the progress of the game is stopped.

Then, when the rotation of all the reels is stopped (when the progress of the game is stopped), an error image is displayed on the image display device. This is because if the error image is displayed when an error occurs, the player may make a mistake in a surprised time signature. After that, when the error is cleared, the progress of the game is restarted (if there is a game medal granted, the granted game medal is added as the number of credits or actually paid out), and the end screen and caution are displayed on the image display device. An awakening image is displayed.

It will take some time until the error is cleared, but the warning image is continuously displayed for a predetermined time (3000 ms or more, 3210 ms or less). Of course, since the alert image will continue to be displayed even after the operation of the stop switch is enabled, it may cause discomfort to the player, but if the time to continue displaying the alert image is shortened, This is because there is a slight possibility that the expected effect as a countermeasure against immersiveness cannot be exhibited. Also, since it will take some time for the error to be cleared, it may not be unpleasant if the warning image continues to be displayed even after the stop switch operation is enabled. Is high.

Next, with reference to FIG. 86, a case where an error occurs in a situation where a warning image is displayed at the end of the special game will be described. In another embodiment, if an error occurs before the start switch is operated, the progress of the game is stopped when the error occurs. It should be noted that the minimum game time (4100 ms) is measured even while the progress of the game is stopped.

Further, when the progress of the game is stopped, the image display device displays an error image on top of the alert image. By the way, since it is necessary to promptly notify the game clerk that an error has occurred, the error image is set to have a higher priority than the alert image. After that, when the error is cleared, the progress of the game is restarted (if the game medal is given, the given game medal is added as the number of credits or actually paid out), and the error image is not displayed on the image display device. Display.

It will take some time until the error is cleared, but it does not include the time that the error image is continuously displayed (the time spent until the error is cleared), and the predetermined time (3000 ms or more). , 3210 ms or less) keeps displaying the alert image. It should be noted that the time that was continuously displayed before the error image was displayed (the error occurred) is included. Of course, since the alert image will continue to be displayed even after the operation of the stop switch is enabled, it may cause discomfort to the player, but if the time to continue displaying the alert image is shortened, This is because there is a slight possibility that the expected effect as a countermeasure against immersiveness cannot be exhibited. Also, since it will take some time for the error to be cleared, it may not be unpleasant if the warning image continues to be displayed even after the stop switch operation is enabled. Is high.

Next, with reference to FIG. 87, a case where the power supply is stopped while a warning image is displayed at the end of the special game will be described. In another embodiment, when the power supply is stopped, the measurement of the minimum game time (4100 ms) is also stopped, and when the power supply is restarted, the measurement of the minimum game time (4100 ms) is also restarted.

Further, when the power supply is stopped, the image display device is also stopped, and when the power supply is restarted, the image display device is also restarted. It should be noted that the warning image is continuously displayed for a predetermined time (3000 ms or more, 3210 ms or less) including the time that was continuously displayed before the power supply was stopped. As a result, if the game is played in the shortest time, the caution image will not continue to be displayed even after the operation of the stop switch is enabled, and the player will not be uncomfortable.

Next, with reference to FIG. 88, a case where the effect switch is operated in a situation where a warning image is displayed at the end of the special game will be described. In another embodiment, when a game medal is awarded, the game medal to be granted is added as a number of credits or is actually paid out until the game medal is inserted (the bet switch is operated and inserted from the insertion slot). When the effect switch is operated during the period, the menu screen is displayed on the image display device. Further, when the menu screen is displayed on the image display device, items such as password input, two-dimensional code display, and payout table can be selected. Specifically, each item can be selected by operating the cross key switch and the effect switch.

Even if the effect switch is operated, the warning image is continuously displayed for a predetermined time (3000 ms or more, 3210 ms or less). This is because if the attention-calling image is hidden when the menu screen is displayed, the expected effect as a countermeasure against immersiveness may not be exhibited.

However, the position where the alert image is displayed is set so that the selected item can be seen. In other words, as long as the selected item can be understood, it may be displayed in an overlapping manner. Further, the position where the attention-calling image is displayed is set so as not to overlap with the two-dimensional code displayed when the two-dimensional code display is selected as much as possible. This is to prevent the player who is about to finish the game from being unable to finish the game immediately because the caution image is continuously displayed.

In another embodiment, at the end of the special game, a warning image is displayed on the image display device together with the end screen. However, if the number of game medals awarded during the special game is extremely small, the special game At the end, the alert image may not be displayed on the image display device.

If the number of game medals awarded during the special game is extremely small, the player will not be distracted, and the number of game medals corresponding to the amount of money used so far will be increased during the special game. Even if the number of game medals is small, it is difficult to get the feeling of getting it back (because it is almost impossible to get it back).

As an example of the case where the number of game medals awarded during the special game is extremely small, there are cases where the number of medals is less than 300 during the AT game and 50 or less during the bonus game. In addition, at the end of the special game or at a part of the demo screen, the warning screen is displayed on the image display device, but at regular intervals (for example, every hour) and every fixed number of games (for example, every 600 games). A predetermined time (3000 ms or more, 3210 ms or less) may be displayed, or a certain time (for example, 1 hour) and a certain number of games (600 games) have elapsed since the last warning screen was displayed. It may be displayed. At that time, the caution screen may be displayed small in the upper right corner of the image display device, or may be the same as the position and size displayed at the end of the special game. In addition, when displaying, it may be displayed at the same time as other effects (continuous effect, notice effect, effect showing expectation, etc.), or the period during which the display is displayed is set to be an inoperable period. May be good. By displaying the display on a regular basis, it is possible to call attention to a player who has not performed a special game.

In another embodiment, at the end of the special game, the alert image is displayed on the image display device together with the end screen, but when the end screen is not displayed, the alert image may not be displayed either. .. For example, when the AT game is performed 20 times in a row, the moving image is displayed on the image display device during the 20th AT game. Then, even if the bonus combination is won during the 20th AT game, during the bonus game, or at the end of the bonus game, the image display device wants to continue to display the moving image, so the image display device is used at the end of the bonus game. The end screen is not displayed. In such a case, the warning image may not be displayed because it hinders the visual recognition of the displayed moving image. However, at the end of the 20th AT game, it is preferable to display the end screen and the caution image on the image display device.

In other embodiments, the size of the alert image is set to the size shown in FIG. 74, but it is sufficient as long as it can exert the effect expected as a countermeasure against immersiveness, and the alert is larger than the size shown in FIG. 74. It may be an image.

Further, the size of the alert image displayed at the end of the special game may be changed depending on the situation. For example, the size when displayed together with the end screen and the size when displayed together with the effect screen may be different sizes.

In another embodiment, when a game medal is awarded, the end screen and the alert image are displayed on the image display device after adding or paying out as the number of credits, but the image is displayed after all the reels have stopped rotating. It may be displayed on the display device, or may be displayed on the image display device when the last stop switch is released. In addition, when the game medal is not given, the end screen and the alert image are displayed on the image display device after all the reels have stopped rotating, but when the last stop switch is released, the image display device displays the end screen and the alert image. It may be displayed.

In another embodiment, the end screen and the alert image are displayed on the image display device at the same timing, but the alert image may be displayed after the end screen is displayed. Further, the alert image may be displayed after a lapse of a predetermined time from the display of the end screen.

In another embodiment, the end screen is hidden when the start switch is operated regardless of whether or not the game medal is given in the final game, but the game medal is given in the final game. In this case, the end screen may be hidden when the game medal is inserted (the bet switch is operated and inserted from the insertion slot).

Further, it may be hidden when a predetermined time has elapsed since the end screen was displayed. This is because the image display device displays not only the end screen but also the caution image, so that the player who feels anxiety may not operate the start switch.

In another embodiment, the image display device is provided above the center of the housing, but the image display device may be provided in the center of the housing. In that case, if the alert image is displayed above the center, above the right corner above the center, above the left corner above the center, and in the center of the image display device, it will be displayed at a position close to the height of the player's eyes. If only one image display device is provided, the player's line of sight will be gathered there, so a warning image will be displayed in the lower right corner from the center, the lower right corner from the center, and the lower left corner from the center. May be good.

Further, the image display device may be provided below the center of the housing due to the influence of the design of the housing. If only one image display device is provided, the player's line of sight will be gathered there, so the player's line of sight will be gathered there, so the upper right corner from the center, the upper right corner from the center, the upper left corner from the center, the center, the lower side from the center, and the lower than the center. A warning image may be displayed in the right corner on the side and the left corner below the center.

Further, the position of the alert image displayed at the end of the special game may be changed depending on the situation. For example, the position when displaying together with the end screen and the position when displaying together with the effect screen may be different positions.

In another embodiment, FIGS. 81 (a) to 81 (c) are repeatedly displayed during the game standby, but the display order may be changed. For example, FIGS. 82 (a) to 82 (c) may be repeatedly displayed. The reason why the player sees the demo screen before starting the game is to confirm what the subject of the slot machine that is going to start the game is. If there is a risk that the motivation to play will be significantly reduced by displaying the image for calling attention before the image introducing the subject of the slot machine is displayed as in other embodiments, it is displayed. It is preferable to change the order of doing. The order of replacement is not limited to this.

In another embodiment, the time for displaying the alert image while waiting for the game is set to less than 3000 ms, but if it is necessary to impress the player who is about to start the game that he / she should not be absorbed in advance, 3000 ms. You may keep displaying the above.

In another embodiment, the position and size of the alert image displayed during the game standby are the same as the position and size displayed at the end of the special game, but the position and size to be displayed are changed. You may change it depending on the situation. For example, as shown in FIG. 83, when a warning image is always displayed while waiting for a game, it may be displayed smaller in the upper right corner than the center of the image display device. This is a device to prevent excessive alerting even a little because the alert image will continue to be displayed for a long time. The display position and size are not limited to this.

In another embodiment, even if an error occurs between the operation of the start switch and the stop of rotation of all reels, the progress of the game is not stopped until the rotation of all reels is stopped. However, the progress of the game may not be stopped until the game medals to be given are added as the number of credits or actually paid out (except when the game medals are not given).

In another embodiment, if an error occurs between the time the start switch is operated and the rotation of all reels is stopped, the error image is displayed on the image display device when the progress of the game is stopped. However, the error image may be displayed when an error occurs. As a result, the game clerk can rush in, and the error can be cleared immediately after the progress of the game is stopped.

In another embodiment, if an error occurs between the start switch operation and the stop of rotation of all reels, the minimum game time (4100 ms) is measured even while the game progress is stopped. Although it is made to be performed, the measurement of the minimum game time may be stopped. As a result, if the game is played in the shortest time, the caution image will not continue to be displayed even after the operation of the stop switch is enabled, and the player will not be uncomfortable.

In another embodiment, if an error occurs between the start switch operation and the stop of rotation of all reels, a predetermined time (3000 ms) regardless of the time spent clearing the error. (As described above, 3210 ms or less), the alert image is continuously displayed, but the time spent displaying the alert image may be shortened by the time spent until the error is cleared or the time corresponding to the time. For example, when it takes 60,000 ms or more to clear the error, the alert image may be continuously displayed for 1000 ms.

In another embodiment, when an error occurs while the alert image is displayed at the end of the special game, the error image is displayed on top of the alert image, but the alert image is not displayed. Then, an error image may be displayed. Then, when the error is cleared, the error image may be hidden and a warning image may be displayed. This is suitable when it is desired to make the priority of the error image and the alert image the same.

In another embodiment, if an error occurs while the alert image is displayed at the end of the special game, the time spent displaying the error image (the time spent until the error is cleared) is set. Not included, the warning image was continuously displayed for a predetermined time (3000 ms or more, 3210 ms or less), but the time spent displaying the error image (time spent until the error was cleared) was set. Including, the caution image may be continuously displayed for a predetermined time (3000 ms or more, 3210 ms or less). Regardless of whether or not the error image is displayed (whether or not an error has occurred), it is sufficient to continue displaying the warning image for a predetermined time (3000 ms or more, 3210 ms or less), so that the sub-control unit determines. You don't have to increase the burden.

In another embodiment, if an error occurs while the alert image is displayed at the end of the special game, it should include the time that was being displayed before the error image was displayed (the error occurred). However, it is possible not to include the time that was displayed before the error image was displayed (the error occurred). This is suitable when there is a high possibility that the player's consciousness deviates from the alert image due to the display of the error image.

In another embodiment, if an error occurs while a warning image is displayed at the end of the special game, the minimum game time (4100 ms) is measured even while the game is stopped. However, the measurement of the minimum game time may be stopped. As a result, if the game is played in the shortest time, the caution image will not continue to be displayed even after the operation of the stop switch is enabled, and the player will not be uncomfortable.

In another embodiment, when an error occurs while the alert image is displayed at the end of the special game, the priority of the error image is set higher than that of the alert image, but the priority of the alert image is set. May be set higher than the error image. However, since it is not preferable that the alert image makes it impossible to identify the type of error that has occurred, it is preferable that the position where the alert image is displayed does not overlap with the position where the type of error that has occurred is specified. .. As long as the types of errors that have occurred can be specified, they may overlap.

Further, in this case, the warning image is continuously displayed for a predetermined time (3000 ms or more, 3210 ms or less) including the time during which the error image is continuously displayed (the time spent until the error is cleared). You may do so.

In another embodiment, when the power supply is stopped while the warning image is displayed at the end of the special game, the time that was displayed before the power supply is stopped is included. However, it may not include the time that was displayed before the power supply stopped. This is suitable when there is a high possibility that the player's consciousness deviates from the alert image due to the power supply being stopped.

In another embodiment, an image display device that starts up (resumes display) immediately when the power supply is restarted is used, but the power supply is also stopped when using an image display device that takes a long time to start up. The alert image may be continuously displayed for a predetermined time (3000 ms or more, 3210 ms or less) including the time that has been continuously displayed before the display. Depending on the time until activation, the alert image will continue to be displayed even after the stop switch operation is enabled, which may cause discomfort to the player, but the alert image is displayed. This is because if the duration is shortened, there is a slight possibility that the expected effect as a countermeasure against immersiveness cannot be exhibited. However, if there is a possibility of causing a great deal of discomfort to the player, the time for displaying the alert image may be shortened by the time until the start-up or the time corresponding to the time. It should be noted that the time that was continuously displayed before the power supply was stopped may not be included.

In another embodiment, when a game medal is awarded, the game medal to be granted is added as a number of credits or is actually paid out until the game medal is inserted (the bet switch is operated and inserted from the insertion slot). In the meantime, when the effect switch is operated, the menu screen is displayed on the image display device, but before the start switch is operated, regardless of whether or not a game medal is awarded, When the effect switch is operated, the menu screen may be displayed on the image display device.

In another embodiment, the position where the alert image is displayed is set so that the selected item can be seen when the menu screen is displayed, but the selected item cannot be known. You may. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player's consciousness from deviating from the alert image.

In another embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 79 and 80, even if the alert image continues to be displayed, the operation of the start switch or the like is effective (the game progresses), but the alert image is displayed. You may freeze it while it continues to be displayed. In other words, the operation of the start switch or the like may be invalidated (the progress of the game may be stopped). Although it causes discomfort to the player, it is possible to maximize the effect expected as a countermeasure against immersiveness. Specifically, since the progress of the game is stopped for a long time, the motivation for the game can be reduced to some extent. In this case, it is appropriate that the time during which the alert image continues to be displayed is a time during which the motivation for playing can be reduced to some extent. However, if it is too long (for example, the time is longer than the minimum playing time), the player may never play again. Therefore, it is preferably 3000 ms or more and less than 4100 ms.

Further, in the case of freezing, as shown in FIG. 84, after displaying the end screen on the image display device, the end screen may be hidden and only the caution image may be displayed. By displaying only the attention-calling image, the player's consciousness can be surely directed to the attention-calling image, so that the expected effect as a countermeasure against immersiveness can be more exerted. Even if the warning image is hidden and the end screen is displayed again after a predetermined time (a predetermined time out of 3000 ms or more and less than 4100) has elapsed since the warning image was displayed. Alright, you may continue to display only the alert image.

First, during the game standby, the images are displayed in the order of FIG. 81 (b), FIG. 81 (a), and FIG. 81 (c), and then at the timing of displaying FIG. 84 (b), FIG. 81 (B) may be continuously displayed. This eliminates the need to prepare an image for displaying FIG. 84 (b).

In other embodiments, the image display device is used to call attention, but a device other than the image display device may also be used to call attention. For example, a warning image may be displayed on the panel portion of the housing at a position easily recognized by the player.

The alert image is not limited to the illustrated one. For example, the image may clearly state "Pachinko / pachislot is a play that you can enjoy moderately. Be careful of your immersiveness." Or "Be careful of your immersiveness. Pachinko / pachislot is a play that you can enjoy moderately."

The color and font of the characters are free as long as they are not difficult for the player to recognize. For example, if the color is similar to the background image when displaying the alert image, it may be difficult for the player to recognize it. Therefore, it is preferable that the color is different from the color that occupies most of the background image. In particular, a color that is located in the opposite direction on the color wheel (hereinafter, also referred to as "opposite color") or a color that is close to the opposite color is preferable because the color stands out.

In another embodiment, an appropriate time for continuing to display the alert image is calculated by taking as an example the case where the maximum number of game medals given during the special game is eight, but the time is given during the special game. Even when the maximum number of game medals is 8 or more and 15 or less, the appropriate time for continuously displaying the alert image is preferably 3000 ms or more and 3210 ms or less. Certainly, when 15 game medals are awarded, the time spent is about 280 ms longer than when 8 game medals are awarded, so it is appropriate to continue displaying the alert image by that amount. By shortening the time, it is possible to hide the alert image before the operation of the stop switch becomes effective. However, even if the alert image is hidden about 280 ms after the stop switch operation is enabled, it is extremely unlikely that the player will notice it. If this is the case, the longer it is, the more effective it can be expected as a countermeasure against immersiveness. Therefore, the appropriate time for continuously displaying the alert image is preferably 3000 ms or more and 3210 ms or less.

Further, when the clearing process is performed after the warning screen is displayed, the warning screen may be terminated even if the time when the clearing process is completed is less than 3 seconds from the start of the warning screen display. In that case, the demo screen is started to be displayed after the clearing process is completed. This is because the player finishes the game by the clearing process, and the warning screen is also displayed on the demo screen, so that it is not necessary to display the prevention of immersiveness. In addition, by closing the alert screen, it becomes clearer that the previous player is not playing, and the next player can play the game promptly without being confused as to whether the previous player is playing. You will be able to do it.

In addition, it is possible to appropriately combine the above-described embodiments, modifications and other embodiments, and it is also possible to appropriately combine the above-described modifications with respect to each embodiment or a combination thereof. The present invention is also applicable to game machines other than slot machines (for example, pachinko machines, casino machines, arrange balls, enclosed game machines that do not use game medals or game balls, etc.).

An example of an enclosed gaming machine is a gaming machine that enables gaming using an electronic gaming medium instead of a physical gaming medium such as a gaming medal or a gaming ball. In such a gaming machine, the number of electronic gaming media can be displayed on a multi-digit (two or more digits) 7-segment display. The electronic gaming medium may be directly inserted into the gaming machine by the player, or may be indirectly inserted from a device provided outside the gaming machine according to the instruction of the player. May be good. In the enclosed gaming machine, when a small winning combination is established, an electronic gaming medium is given to the player (the number of electronic gaming media displayed on the multi-digit 7-segment display increases).

Further, in the enclosed gaming machine, an AT lottery or a bonus lottery (a combination lottery for determining any one or more of a plurality of roles including a bonus combination) is performed. Then, when the AT lottery is won or the bonus lottery is won, a production (also referred to as a fanning production) for inciting that fact is also performed. By the way, even when the AT lottery is not won or the bonus lottery is not won, the production for fanning is performed. An example of a fanning production is a series of productions that are performed over multiple games, and at the end, a production that announces whether or not the AT lottery has been won and whether or not the bonus lottery has been won (continuous production). (Sometimes called), or a production that displays a background image that is easy to stay when winning an AT lottery or a bonus lottery on an image display device (sometimes called a precursory production). Can be mentioned.

As a measure against immersiveness, a game prohibition means may be provided to prevent the player from playing (inputting) using an amount exceeding a predetermined amount (for example, 50,000 yen) per day. Specifically, it is possible to put in until the predetermined amount of money is reached, and it is impossible to put in more than the predetermined amount of money. In the case of, the enclosed gaming machine may be provided, and in the case of the enclosed gaming machine that can be indirectly inserted, a device provided outside the gaming machine corresponding to the enclosed gaming machine is provided. You may.

It should be noted that a device provided outside the gaming machine can manage the remaining number of electronic gaming media (specifically, an electronic display displayed on a multi-digit 7-segment display at the end of the game. The game medium may be deposited (stored) in a device provided outside the game machine), and the remaining number of stored electronic game media may be used for loading. In this case, the game prohibition means is to prevent the player from playing (injecting) a game (injection) by using an amount exceeding a predetermined amount (for example, 50,000 yen) per day separately from the input from the stored ball. Alternatively, the total number of electronic game media to be input from the storage and the total number of electronic game media to be input using the amount of money exceeds the number obtained by converting the predetermined amount into electronic game media. It may not be possible to put it in.

Even if either the enclosed gaming machine or the device installed outside the gaming machine is equipped with a game prohibition means, the enclosed gaming machine must have won the AT lottery or the bonus lottery. If the amount of money used by the player exceeds the predetermined amount before the AT game or bonus game related to the notification is completed after the announcement of the game, it is not necessary to disable the game. good. This is because it is too terrible for a player to be unable to play even though the announcement has been made. In addition, the amount of money to be newly used is known to be high (about 1000 yen to 2000 yen). By the way, when the AT game or the bonus game is finished, the game may be disabled (because it was originally disabled), and it is displayed on the multi-digit 7-segment display. As long as the electronic game medium remains, the game may be enabled (the electronic game medium given during the AT game or the bonus game, and the new amount is not used. Because).

In addition, when either the enclosed gaming machine or the device provided outside the gaming machine is equipped with a game prohibiting means, and the AT lottery is won or the bonus lottery is won, one game is performed. The number of electronic gaming media required for the game (for example, 3) and the remaining number of electronic gaming media displayed on the multi-digit 7-segment display (for example, 12 remaining), which are actually used by the player. The situation such as the difference between the amount of money and the predetermined amount (for example, it has already reached 50,000 yen) (Here, it is described that the situation is judged by three pieces of information, but it is not limited to this. Judgment may be made based on any two pieces of information, or one or more new pieces of information such as the remaining number of electronic game media managed by a device provided outside the gaming machine (so-called ball storage) may be added to the three pieces of information. In addition, it may be judged), and it is desirable to determine the timing (how many games to announce after) until the announcement that the player has won the AT lottery or the bonus lottery. This is to prevent the player from being unable to play before announcing that he has won. When the enclosed gaming machine is equipped with a game prohibition means, the remaining amount of money that can be used, such as the difference between the amount of money actually used by the player and the predetermined amount of money, is provided from the device provided outside the gaming machine. Information and the remaining number of usable electronic game media managed by a device provided outside the game machine are received and judged.

In addition, when either the enclosed gaming machine or the device provided outside the gaming machine is equipped with a game prohibiting means, the situation is such that the game will soon become impossible (1 electronic required to play the game). The number of gaming media is 3, the remaining number of electronic gaming media displayed on the multi-digit 7-segment display is 3, and the amount actually used by the player has reached a predetermined amount). As the production of the next game, it is desirable not to perform a fanning production regardless of whether or not the AT lottery or the bonus lottery has been won. This is because if the game cannot be played as soon as the fanning effect is performed, the interest of the game is lowered and the game may be separated.

In addition, before the situation where the game cannot be played soon, a display may be displayed to advise that if the game is continued as it is, even if the profit can be obtained, it may not be possible to obtain the profit. The display timing may be as long as the amount of game media that can be used to rent out the number of games required from the trigger of the AT lottery or the bonus lottery to the announcement and the profit based on the lottery result is left, for example, the player. It may be the timing when the specified amount of money reaches a specific amount of money (for example, 45,000 yen) lower than the predetermined amount of money. With this advice, it is possible to prevent the profit (AT game, bonus game) from being not enjoyed even though the profit (AT game, bonus game) can be obtained by spending a predetermined amount of money.

<< 8th Embodiment >>
Next, the slot machine according to the eighth embodiment (hereinafter, also referred to as “slot machine of the eighth embodiment”) will be described with reference to FIGS. 89 to 94. As shown in FIG. 89A, the slot machine of the eighth form includes a main control board 610 (corresponding to the above-mentioned main control board 60) for mainly performing control processing related to the progress of the game, and a game. It is equipped with a game medal payout device 630 (corresponding to the above-mentioned hopper 50) for paying out game medals according to the progress of the above. Further, although not shown, it is necessary for playing a game as a slot machine, such as a plurality of (for example, three) reels (corresponding to the above-mentioned reels 3a, 3b, 3c) that display a plurality of types of symbols in a variable manner. Each component is provided.

The game medal payout device 630 rotates and drives a tank unit (not shown) for accommodating game medals, a rotor disk (not shown) for rotationally driving the game medal stored in the tank unit, and a rotor disk. A hopper motor 637 for the purpose, two payout sensors 631, 632, and one rocking shading body 635 are provided.

The payout sensors 631, 632 are composed of, for example, a transmissive photosensor (photointerruptor) in which a light emitting portion composed of an LED or the like and a light receiving portion composed of a photodiode or the like are arranged so as to face each other, and swing. They are arranged within the swing range of the light-shielding body 635. The oscillating light-shielding body 635 reciprocates within a predetermined oscillating range each time one game medal is paid out by the rotor disk driven by rotation, and two payout sensors 631 during the one reciprocating oscillating. It is configured to pass between the light emitting unit and the light receiving unit of 632. Due to the shaking of the swinging light-shielding body 635, the payout sensors 631 and 632 have a state in which only the payout sensor 631 is shielded (a state in which the light from the light emitting portion to the light receiving portion is blocked) and a state in which the payout sensors 631 and 632 are blocked. The three states, that is, the state in which neither of them is shielded from light and the state in which only the payout sensor 631 is shielded from light, can be switched in a predetermined order (details will be described later).

The main control board 610 and the game medal payout device 630 are electrically connected to each other. In FIG. 89A, the payout sensor 631,632 of the game medal payout device 630 and the input port of the main control board 610 are connected by two electric circuits 651,652, and the hopper motor 637 of the game medal payout device 630 is connected. The state in which the output port of the main control board 610 is connected by one electric circuit 655 is simply shown. The electric circuit 651 transmits a detection signal from the payout sensor 631 (also referred to as “payout sensor 1 signal”) to the input port of the main control board 610, and the electric line 652 is a detection signal from the payout sensor 632 (“payout sensor 1 signal”). The payout sensor 2 signal (also referred to as “payout sensor 2 signal”) is transmitted to the input port of the main control board 610. The two electric circuits 651 and 652 are pulled up to a predetermined voltage level (for example, DC + 5 volts) on the main control board 610, and the state of the payout sensors 631, 632 (whether or not they are shielded by the rocking shading body 635). Each signal level changes depending on (?) (Details will be described later).

The electric circuit 655 transmits a signal for driving the hopper motor 637 (also referred to as a “hopper motor drive signal”) from the main control board 610 to the hopper motor 637. A hopper motor drive signal is transmitted from the main control board 610 to the hopper motor 637 via the electric path 655, and the hopper motor 637 receives the hopper motor drive signal to operate the game medal payout device 630.

Note that FIG. 89A shows the electrical connection state between the main control board 610 and the game medal payout device 630 in a very simplified manner, and in reality, many other electric circuits are provided. , Electronic components such as ICs and resistors are arranged on each electric circuit as needed. Further, another board may be arranged between the main control board 610 and the game medal payout device 630. In FIG. 89B, a relay board 620 is arranged between the main control board 610 and the game medal payout device 630, and the main control board 610 and the game medal payout device 630 are electrically connected to each other via the relay board 620. A configuration example in which the devices are connected is shown briefly.

In the example shown in FIG. 89B, three signal lines 651a, 652a, and 655a are arranged between the connector 611 of the main control board 610 and the connector 621 of the relay board 620, and the connector 622 of the relay board 620 Four signal lines 651b, 652b, 655b, and 655c are arranged between the game medal payout device 630 and the connector 639. The signal line 651b transmits the payout sensor 1 signal from the payout sensor 631 to the relay board 620, and the signal line 652b transmits the payout sensor 2 signal from the payout sensor 632 to the relay board 620. The signal line 651a transmits the payout sensor 1 signal from the relay board 620 to the main control board 610 (input port), and the signal line 652a transmits the payout sensor 2 signal from the relay board 620 to the main control board 610 (input port). It is transmitted to the input port). The electric circuit 651 is configured by including the signal lines 651a and 651b, and the electric circuit 652 is formed by including the signal lines 652a and 652b.

The signal line 655a transmits a hopper motor drive signal from the main control board 610 (output port) to the relay board 620, and the signal line 655b transmits a hopper motor drive 1 signal from the relay board 620 to the game medal payout device 630 (hopper motor). 637), the signal line 655c transmits two hopper motor drive signals from the relay board 620 to the game medal payout device 630 (hopper motor 637), and includes these signal lines 655a, 655b, and 655c. The electric circuit 655 is configured by. When one signal level of the hopper motor drive 1 signal and the hopper motor drive 2 signal are output in a state of L (Low) and the other signal level is H (High), the hopper motor 637 is driven and both signals are not output. Then, the hopper motor 637 is stopped. A wire harness (also simply referred to as "harness") is composed of signal lines 651a, 652a, 655a (and other signal lines not shown), and signal lines 651b, 652b, 655b, 655c (and not shown). Other signal lines) may form another wire harness.

FIG. 90 shows four states related to the payout sensors 631 and 632, and the levels (voltage levels) of the payout sensor 1 signal and the payout sensor 2 signal input to the input port of the main control board 610 in each state. Shows the relationship with. Here, each state will be described.

The payout sensor state P01 shown in FIG. 6A is a state in which the payout sensor 631 is shielded from light by the swinging light-shielding body 635 and the payout sensor 632 is not shaded. In this payout sensor state P1, an optical current flows through the payout sensor 632 (photodiode) that is not shielded from light, whereby a current is drawn from the pull-up side to the payout sensor 632 side, and the payout sensor at the input port The level of the two signals is set to L (Low). On the other hand, the photocurrent does not flow in the light-shielded payout sensor 631, so that the payout sensor 631 side is in a high impedance state and the level of the payout sensor 1 signal at the input port is H (High). Has been done. The CPU of the main control board 610 (also referred to as “main board CPU”) recognizes the level of the payout sensor 1 signal with negative logic and recognizes the level of the payout sensor 2 signal with positive logic. That is, the payout sensor 1 signal is recognized as OFF (0 at the truth value) at the H level, the signal is ON (1 at the truth value) at the L level, and the payout sensor 2 signal is H. When it is level, the signal is recognized as ON, and when it is L level, the signal is recognized as OFF.

The payout sensor state P02 shown in FIG. 6B is a state in which neither of the two payout sensors 631, 632 is shielded from light. In this payout sensor state P2, photocurrents flow through the payout sensors 631 and 632, respectively, so that the level of the payout sensor 1 signal and the level of the payout sensor 2 signal at the input port are both L. It is configured. Further, at this time, the main board CPU recognizes that the payout sensor 1 signal is ON and the payout sensor 2 signal is OFF.

The payout sensor state P03 shown in FIG. 3C is a state in which the payout sensor 632 is shielded from light by the swinging light-shielding body 635 and the payout sensor 631 is not shaded. In this payout sensor state P03, an optical current flows through the payout sensor 631 that is not shielded from light, whereby a current is drawn from the pull-up side to the payout sensor 631 side, and the level of the payout sensor 1 signal at the input port is L. It is configured to be. On the other hand, the photocurrent does not flow in the light-shielded payout sensor 632, so that the payout sensor 632 side is in a high impedance state and the level of the payout sensor 2 signal at the input port is H. Further, at this time, the main board CPU recognizes that the payout sensor 1 signal is ON and the payout sensor 2 signal is also ON. The payout sensor states P01 to P03 are collectively referred to as “payout sensor state”.

The non-energized state shown in FIG. 3D is a state in which an abnormality has occurred in the electrical connection state between the main control board 610 and the game medal payout device 630, specifically, the input port of the main control board 610. This is the state when the payout sensors 631 and 632 are not electrically connected. In such a non-energized state, for example, the wire harness connecting the main control board 610 and the relay board 620 or the wire harness connecting the relay board 620 and the game medal payout device 630 is disconnected or disconnected, or the main control board is disconnected. When the 610 and the game medal payout device 630 are directly connected by a floating type drawer wire or the like, the connection by the drawer wire is disconnected or the like. In this non-energized state, the level of the payout sensor 1 signal and the level of the payout sensor 2 signal at the input port are both set to H. At this time, the main board CPU recognizes that the payout sensor 1 signal is OFF and the payout sensor 2 signal is ON.

When the game medal payout device 630 is activated and the game medal is normally paid out, the swing shading body 635 swings back and forth once for each game medal payout as described above. More specifically, the rocking shading body 635 is in the first position (the position of the payout sensor state P01 that blocks only the payout sensor 631) when the game medal payout device 630 is not operating or immediately after the start of operation. In the process in which the game medal payout device 630 operates normally and one game medal is paid out, the game medal passes through the first position to the second position (the position of the payout sensor state P02 in which neither of the payout sensors 631 and 632 is shielded from light). , It is configured to move to the third position (the position of the payout sensor state P03 that blocks only the payout sensor 632), and further returns to the first position through the second position.

FIG. 91 shows the transition of the payout sensor state in the process in which the game medal payout device 630 normally operates after the rotation cylinder is stopped and one game medal is paid out, and the main control board 610 in each payout sensor state. The relationship between the levels of the payout sensor 1 signal and the payout sensor 2 signal input to the input port of the above and the ON / OFF of the payout sensor 1 signal and the payout sensor 2 signal recognized by the main board CPU is schematically shown. ..

As shown in this figure, until immediately after the rotating cylinder rotates and stops and the hopper motor drive signal is output (ON), the payout sensor 631 and 632 are shielded from the payout sensor state P01 (only the payout sensor 631 is shielded from light). State). At this time, the level of the payout sensor 1 signal at the input port is H, the level of the payout sensor 2 signal is L, and the main board CPU recognizes that the payout sensor 1 signal is OFF and the payout sensor 2 signal is also OFF.

After the hopper motor drive signal is turned on, when the game medal payout device 630 is activated and the payout of one game medal is started, the payout sensor 631,632 is in the payout sensor state P02 (both payout sensors 631 and 632 are paid out). It will be in a state where it is not shielded from light. At this time, the level of the payout sensor 1 signal at the input port is L, the level of the payout sensor 2 signal is also L, and the main board CPU recognizes that the payout sensor 1 signal is ON and the payout sensor 2 signal is OFF.

Next, the payout sensor 631, 632 is in the payout sensor state P03 (a state in which only the payout sensor 632 is shielded from light). At this time, the level of the payout sensor 1 signal at the input port is L, the level of the payout sensor 2 signal is H, and the main board CPU recognizes that the payout sensor 1 signal is ON and the payout sensor 2 signal is also ON.

Further, the payout sensor 631,632 shifts to the payout sensor state P02 (a state in which both the payout sensors 631 and 632 are not shielded from light), and at this time, the level of the payout sensor 1 signal at the input port is L, and the payout sensor 2 signal. The level is also L, and the main board CPU recognizes that the payout sensor 1 signal is ON and the payout sensor 2 signal is OFF.

Then, at the final stage of paying out one game medal, the payout sensors 631 and 632 return to the payout sensor state P01 (a state in which only the payout sensor 631 is shielded from light). At this time, the level of the payout sensor 1 signal at the input port is H, the level of the payout sensor 2 signal is L, and the main board CPU recognizes that the payout sensor 1 signal is OFF and the payout sensor 2 signal is also OFF. When the payout of the game medal is completed, the hopper motor drive signal is turned off, and the payout sensor state P01 is maintained. When a plurality of game medals are paid out, the hopper motor drive signal is turned on until the payout of all the plurality of game medals is completed. Then, when the first game medal is paid out, the payout sensor 1 signal and the payout sensor 2 signal recognized by the main board CPU are both OFF, the payout sensor 1 signal is ON, and the payout sensor 2 signal is OFF. , Both signals are ON, the payout sensor 1 signal is ON, the payout sensor 2 signal is OFF, and both signals are OFF, and both signals are also OFF when the second and subsequent game medals are paid out. , The payout sensor 1 signal is ON, the payout sensor 2 signal is OFF, both signals are ON, the payout sensor 1 signal is ON, the payout sensor 2 signal is OFF, and both signals are OFF. Then, the hopper motor drive signal is turned off when the final payout of the game medal is completed.

In this way, the main control board 610 and the game medal payout device 630 are electrically connected, and when the game medal payout device 630 operates normally and the game medal is paid out, the payout recognized by the main board CPU is recognized. Both the sensor 1 signal and the payout sensor 2 signal are OFF, the payout sensor 1 signal is ON, the payout sensor 2 signal is OFF, and both signals are ON. ") Will only be taken. On the other hand, in the above-mentioned non-energized state, the payout sensor 1 signal is OFF and the payout sensor 2 signal is ON (see FIG. 90 (D)). Since such a pattern does not normally occur, an electrical connection state between the main control board 610 and the game medal payout device 630 is based on the occurrence of the pattern (also referred to as “sensor signal abnormality pattern”). It is possible to detect that an abnormality (also referred to as "non-energized error") has occurred.

If the game is advanced in a situation where such a non-energization error occurs, the player may suffer a disadvantage such as the game medal that should be paid out is not paid out. One of the situations (causes) in which a non-energization error occurs is forgetting to return the game medal payout device when it is cleaned. Since the game medal payout device tends to collect dust and the like as it is used, cleaning work such as removing it from the game machine and washing it with water is performed on a daily basis. At a game store, multiple game medal payout devices may be cleaned at once, and the game medal payout device removed for cleaning may be forgotten to be returned to the game machine, or even if it is returned, the harness etc. may be forgotten to be connected. In the worst case, the removed game medal payout device may be lost. If the game is played in such a state of forgetting to return, the game medal to be paid out cannot be paid out. Also, even if you notice that you forgot to return the game medal payout device during the game, if you have lost the game medal payout device, you cannot return it. Since it is prohibited to use a substitute product other than the genuine product approved in the type test, etc., in the game machine, if the regular game medal payout device is lost, the game cannot be continued. Even if a game medal payout device that has been forgotten to be returned is found, it must be returned to the game machine and then a harness or the like must be connected. When connecting a harness or the like, it is preferable to turn off the power of the gaming machine, not limited to the gaming machine. However, in the case of a gaming machine, turning off the power during business is an act that allows the setting to be changed. Because it is difficult. Therefore, the harness or the like is connected without turning off the power, which may cause an unexpected situation, for example, the necessary information stored in the RAM or the like may be erased. In addition, it is also possible that a non-energization error has occurred due to fraudulent activity, and if the game is proceeded as it is, the game store may suffer a disadvantage. Therefore, in the slot machine of the eighth form, when a non-energization error occurs, the game is stopped at a predetermined timing. FIGS. 92 and 93 exemplify four situations (situations Q01 to Q04) in which a non-energization error has occurred, and the timing at which the game is stopped in each situation will be described below.

In the situation Q01 of FIG. 92 (A), a non-energization error occurs when all the rotating cylinders are stopped and the game medals are not paid out (the hopper motor drive signal is not output (OFF)). The case is shown. In this situation Q01, as shown in the figure, a sensor signal abnormality pattern in which the payout sensor 1 signal is OFF and the payout sensor 2 signal is recognized as ON occurs. As described above, when this sensor signal abnormality pattern occurs, the electrical connection between the main control board 610 and the game medal payout device 630 is abnormal (also referred to as “non-energized state”). It is shown that. However, since such a sensor signal abnormality pattern may occur instantaneously due to the influence of noise or the like, in the present embodiment, the sensor signal abnormality pattern is generated for a predetermined time T01 (for example, 100 milliseconds) from the time of occurrence. The time is about the same, but it can be changed as appropriate.) If it is continuous, it is detected as a non-energized error, and then the game is stopped.

Specifically, when a non-energized error is detected, predetermined information (also referred to as “non-energized error detection flag”) indicating that fact is stored in a predetermined storage area such as a RAM included in the main control board 610. (It is called setting or turning on the non-energized error detection flag). Then, when it is confirmed in the error processing in the game progress processing described later that this non-energized error detection flag is set, the non-energized error detection flag is cleared (OFF) so that the game is stopped. It has become. For the stopped game, a predetermined game restart condition, for example, the non-energized state is canceled (for example, a wire harness or the like that has been disconnected is connected), and the reset button (corresponding to the reset switch 82 described above) is operated. It will be restarted when the condition (specific contents can be changed as appropriate) is satisfied. Hereinafter, the state from when the non-energized error detection flag is set until the game restart condition is satisfied and the game can be restarted is also referred to as a “non-energized error detecting state”. In the case of this example, since the time from the setting of the non-energized error detection flag to the error processing is very short (because the error processing is frequently executed while the rotating cylinder is stopped), the non-energized error occurs. If detected, the game will be stopped immediately.

The situation Q02 of FIG. 92 (B) shows a case where a non-energized state occurs when the rotating cylinder is rotating (the hopper motor drive signal is OFF), and the non-energized state is canceled after the rotating cylinder is stopped. .. In this situation Q02, as shown in the figure, a sensor signal abnormality pattern occurs during the rotation of the cylinder, and when the state continues for T01 for a predetermined time, the non-energized error detection flag is set. However, confirmation (judgment) as to whether or not the non-energized error detection flag is set is not performed during the rotation of the cylinder, but is performed in the error processing after the rotation is stopped. When it is confirmed that the non-energized error detection flag is set, the non-energized error detection flag is cleared and the game is stopped. After that, when the game restart condition is satisfied, the non-energized error detection state is cleared. The game can be restarted.

The situation Q03 of FIG. 93 (A) shows a case where a non-energized state occurs when the rotating cylinder is rotating (the hopper motor drive signal is OFF), and the non-energized state is canceled during the rotating cylinder rotation. There is. In this situation Q03, as shown in the figure, a sensor signal abnormality pattern occurs during the rotation of the cylinder, and when the state continues for T01 for a predetermined time, the non-energized error detection flag is set. However, the confirmation (determination) of whether or not the non-energized error detection flag is set is not performed during the rotation of the cylinder, but is performed in the error processing after the rotation is stopped, which is the same as the situation Q02. Therefore, the non-energized error detection flag is not cleared even if the non-energized state is cleared during the rotation of the rotating cylinder, and the non-energized error detection flag is set in the error processing after the rotating cylinder is stopped. If confirmed, the non-energized error detection flag is cleared and the game is stopped. After that, when the game restart condition is satisfied (in this example, the non-energized state has already been resolved, the reset button is operated), the non-energized error detection state is resolved and the game can be restarted. Become.

If the non-energized state generated during the rotation of the rotating cylinder is resolved before the game is stopped (for example, during the rotation of the rotating cylinder), the game is configured to continue without stopping the game. Is also possible. However, the cause of the non-energized state and the cause of its elimination may be due to fraudulent activity, so once a non-energized error is detected, be sure to stop the game. It is preferable to confirm the cause of the non-energization error. This makes it easier to detect fraudulent activity if it has been committed.

In the situation Q04 of FIG. 93 (B), a non-energized state occurs when the setting change such as the winning combination lottery probability is executed (the hopper motor drive signal is OFF), and the non-energized state is during the execution of the setting change. It shows the case where it is resolved. In this situation Q04, as shown in the figure, a sensor signal abnormality pattern occurs during execution of the setting change, and when the state continues for T01 for a predetermined time, the non-energized error detection flag is set. Whether or not the non-energized error detection flag is set is not confirmed (determined) during the setting change. Therefore, the non-energized error detection flag is not cleared during the setting change. The game is stopped while the setting is being changed (in the figure, the fact that the game is stopped due to the setting being being changed is referred to as "game stop A"), but when the setting change is completed, this game stop A The state of is cleared. However, in the case of this example, since the non-energized error detection flag is set during the setting change, the non-energized error detection state continues even after the setting change is completed, so that the game remains stopped. (In the figure, the fact that the game is stopped due to the non-energized error detection state is referred to as "game stop B"). It is confirmed that the non-energized error detection flag is set in the error processing after the setting change is completed, the non-energized error detection flag is cleared, and then the non-energized error detecting state is cleared when the game restart condition is satisfied. And the game can be restarted.

In the situation where the non-energization error occurs, other abnormalities may occur. For example, when a non-energized error occurs during the rotation of the rotating cylinder, an abnormality may occur at the same timing that causes a rotation failure of the rotating cylinder. The situations that can be expected when such rotation failure occurs and the countermeasures are described below. As in the above situations Q02 and Q03, if a non-energized state (non-energized error) occurs during the rotation of the rotating cylinder and a rotation failure of the rotating cylinder occurs at the same timing at that time, the rotation failure is the cause. There is a risk that the rotating cylinder cannot be stopped at the desired stop position. For example, in the game when the winning winning combination is won, a non-energized error occurs during the rotation of the rotating cylinder after the third stop operation is accepted, and at that time, a rotation failure of the rotating cylinder occurs at the same timing. In the 1st and 2nd cylinders, the winning combination symbol is stopped and displayed on the effective line, but in the 3rd cylinder, the winning combination symbol is not stopped and displayed on the effective line. In this slot machine of the eighth form, a non-energized error occurs after the third stop operation is accepted, and a rotation failure of the rotating cylinder occurs during the non-energized error. Therefore, the winning combination symbol is valid in the third cylinder. Even if the stop display cannot be displayed on the line, the game medals can be paid out. That is, if it is internally determined that the winning winning combination is established when the third stop operation is accepted, the actual stop position is deviated due to the rotation failure of the rotating cylinder that occurred during the non-energization error. However, as a display judgment, the player is given a profit as if the winning symbols are aligned. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from suffering a disadvantage, and it is possible to smoothly proceed with the game. Of course, in the game when the winning winning combination is won, a non-energized error occurs during the rotation of the rotating cylinder before the third stop operation is accepted, and a defective rotation of the rotating cylinder occurs after the subsequent third stop operation is accepted. Therefore, in the 1st and 2nd torso, the winning combination symbol is stopped and displayed on the effective line, but in the 3rd torso, the winning combination symbol is not stopped and displayed on the effective line. Game medals can be paid out.

The same control can be performed even when a winning combination other than the winning winning combination is won. For example, if a winning combination that is established depending on the pushing order or pushing position is won, and if it is internally determined that the winning combination will be established when the third stop operation is accepted, then (even before that). Even if a non-energized error occurs in (good) and a rotation failure occurs during the non-energized error and the winning combination symbol cannot be stopped and displayed on the effective line, the game medal may be paid out. .. On the other hand, although it was internally determined that the winning combination was not established when the third stop operation was accepted, a non-energized error occurred after that (or even before that), and rotation failure occurred during the non-energized error. If the winning combination symbol is stopped and displayed on the valid line due to the occurrence of, the game medal may not be paid out. This makes it possible to prevent the player from unreasonably obtaining profits that would not otherwise be possible. This is effective when the de-energization error is often caused by fraudulent activity.

The same configuration can be used when a non-energized error occurs after accepting the first stop operation or the second stop operation and a rotation failure occurs during the non-energized error. For example, a non-energized error occurred after the second stop operation was accepted, a rotation failure occurred during the non-energized error, and the winning combination symbol was stopped and displayed on the valid line in the first cylinder. In the 2nd cylinder, the winning combination symbol is not stopped and displayed on the effective line, after that, the non-energized state and the rotation defect of the rotating cylinder are resolved (in the case of situation Q03), and the 3rd stop operation wins the prize in the 3rd cylinder. When the winning combination symbol is stopped and displayed on the valid line, the game medal may be paid out. Similarly, a non-energized error occurs after the first stop operation is accepted, a rotation failure occurs during the non-energized error, and the winning combination symbol is not stopped and displayed on the valid line in the first cylinder. After that, when the non-energized state and the rotation failure of the rotating cylinder are resolved, and the winning combination symbol is stopped and displayed on the effective line in the 2nd and 3rd cylinders by the 2nd stop operation and the 3rd stop operation. The game medal may be paid out.

The game may be stopped even when a non-energized state occurs while the game medal payout device 630 is being driven (the hopper motor drive signal is ON) and a non-energized error is detected. For example, when a sensor signal abnormality pattern occurs while driving the game medal payout device 630, the state may be set to a predetermined time T02 (a length equal to or longer than the predetermined time T01). The non-energized error detection flag is set at the continuous time (may be as short as about 10 milliseconds). Then, error processing is performed at a predetermined timing thereafter, for example, immediately after one game medal is paid out, and in the error processing, confirmation (determination) of whether or not the non-energized error detection flag is set is performed. .. Here, if it is confirmed that the non-energized error detection flag is set, the non-energized error detection flag may be cleared to stop the game (driving the game medal payout device 630).

Next, the main control processing executed by the slot machine of the eighth form will be described with reference to FIG. 94 additionally. FIGS. (A) to (C) show a schematic flow (necessary for explanation) of a game progress process (corresponding to the above-mentioned game progress control process) executed once in one game as the game progresses. The figure (D) shows the interrupt process (for the timer interrupt process described above) that is executed every predetermined time (for example, about 2 milliseconds) while the slot machine is operating. The general flow of (corresponding) is shown.

In the interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 94 (D), the input port is confirmed, and the information input to the input port is stored in a predetermined storage area such as RAM (L11). For example, the H level or L level state of the payout sensor 1 signal and the payout sensor 2 signal at the input port is stored as ON (1) or OFF (0) information. Next, it is determined whether or not the error number is stored (L12). The error number is a number determined for each type of detected error, and is stored in the error processing described later when an error is detected.

Here, if the error number is stored, the interrupt is returned as it is. On the other hand, when the error number is not stored, it is determined whether or not an error has been detected (L13). Error detection depends on the type of error. In the case of a non-energized error, it is detected when it is confirmed that the sensor signal abnormality pattern continues T01 for a predetermined time based on the ON / OFF state of the payout sensor 1 signal and the payout sensor 2 signal. When an error is detected, an error detection flag (in the case of a non-energized error, a non-energized error detection flag) is set (L14). On the other hand, if no error is detected, the error detection flag is not set and interrupt return is performed. In this example, if an arbitrary error number is stored in the determination in step L12, the interrupt return is performed without performing the determination in step L13 (determination of whether or not an error has been detected). However, the presence or absence of an error number may be determined for each type of error, and it may be determined whether or not an error has been detected based on the determination result. For example, if the presence or absence of an error number corresponding to a non-energized error is detected and the error number is stored, it is not determined whether or not a non-energized error is detected, but other errors (for example, game medal retention) are not performed. It may be determined whether or not an error) has been detected, or if the presence or absence of an error number corresponding to the game medal retention error is detected and the error number is stored, the game medal retention error is detected. It is possible to determine whether or not another error (for example, a non-energized error) has been detected, although the determination as to whether or not the error has been made is not performed.

In the game progress process, as shown in FIG. 94 (A), the error process (K11) is repeatedly executed until the operation of the start lever is effectively accepted. In this error processing, as shown in FIG. 94 (B), it is determined whether or not the error detection flag is set (ON) (K21). If the error detection flag is not ON, the error processing is terminated and returned. On the other hand, when the error detection flag is ON, the error number corresponding to the type of the detected error is stored (set) in a predetermined storage area (K22). For example, when the non-energized error detection flag is ON, the error number associated with the non-energized error is set in advance.

After setting the error number, the non-energized error detection flag is cleared (K23). After that, until the reset button is operated and the cause of the error is eliminated, the determination process of step K24 (determination process of whether or not the reset button is operated) and the determination process of step K25 (whether the cause of the error has been eliminated). Whether or not to determine whether or not) is repeated. As a result, the progress of the game is stopped because the error processing remains within the error processing and the game cannot proceed to the next step of the game progress processing. The method of determining whether or not the cause of the error has been eliminated differs depending on the type of error. In the case of a non-energized error, it is determined that the cause of the error has been eliminated when it is confirmed that the sensor signal abnormality pattern has been eliminated. When the reset button is operated and the cause of the error is removed, the error number is cleared (K26) and the error processing returns.

When the error processing is returned and the operation of the start lever is effectively accepted (YES in step K12), the winning combination lottery is performed (K13). After the winning combination lottery, the all-turn cylinder is rotated (K14), and the determination process of step K15 (determination process of whether or not the all-rotation cylinder has stopped) is repeated until the rotation of the all-rotation cylinder is stopped. Since the error processing is not performed during the rotation of the rotating cylinder, the game is not stopped. However, the interrupt process is repeated even during the rotation of the rotating cylinder, and the error is detected there (as an example of changing the mode, the error processing is performed even during the rotation of the rotating cylinder, and the error is detected in the interrupt processing. In that case, the game may be stopped). When the whole rotation cylinder is stopped (YES in step K15), the display determination process (K16) is performed.

In this display determination process, as shown in FIG. 94 (C), error processing is performed (K31). In the error processing here, when the error detection flag ON is confirmed, the progress of the game is stopped as described above. That is, the game is not stopped even if an error is detected during the rotation of the cylinder (the error detection flag is set), but when the entire rotation is stopped, the game is stopped based on the error detection during the rotation of the cylinder. .. After this error processing, it is determined whether or not the winning combination is established (K32). As described above, the winning judgment here is not based on the symbol actually stopped on the valid line, but based on whether or not the winning combination selected by the combination lottery is internally confirmed. Will be. Therefore, for example, even if a rotation failure of the rotating cylinder occurs after the third stop operation is accepted and the rotating cylinder cannot be stopped at the desired stop position due to the failure, the winning combination is internally established. When is confirmed, the game medal is paid out.

If it is determined that the winning combination has been established, the determination process of step K33 (determination process of whether or not the payout of the technique medal has been completed) until the payout of the number of game medals corresponding to the established winning combination is completed. Is repeated, and when the payout of the game medal is completed, the display determination process returns. Although not shown, processing similar to error processing is performed even during the payout of game medals. Specifically, during the process of paying out one game medal (also referred to as "one piece payout process"), a process for detecting an error (in the case of a non-energized error, the payout sensor 1 signal and the payout sensor 2) When an error is detected (in the case of a non-energized error), the process of checking the ON / OFF state of the signal is repeated (may be performed as a process during the one-sheet payout process or may be performed by the interrupt process). When it is confirmed that the sensor signal abnormality pattern is continuous in T02 for a predetermined time), the processing after the error processing step K22 is executed. Therefore, even if an error is detected during the payout of the game medal, the game (payment of the game medal) is stopped.

According to the slot machine of the eighth embodiment, the non-energized error is detected based on the ON / OFF pattern of the payout sensor 1 signal and the payout sensor 2 signal, and the non-energized error is detected. If so, the game is stopped. Therefore, it is possible to surely prevent a situation in which the player is disadvantaged because the game medal that should be paid out is not paid out because the game is advanced in the situation where the non-energization error occurs. It becomes. In addition, since the game can be stopped even if a non-energization error occurs temporarily due to fraudulent activity, the game medal is illegally obtained and the game store is not available. It is also possible to prevent a situation such as receiving a profit.

In the eighth embodiment described above, two payout sensors 631 and 632 are used, and the pattern of the payout sensor 1 signal and the payout sensor 2 signal from these is a sensor signal abnormality pattern, and a non-energization error occurs. The outbreak is detected. In addition, by detecting the transition state (time required for transition, etc.) of the patterns of the payout sensor 1 signal and the payout sensor 2 signal when paying out the game medals, the game medals are jammed or the game medals to be paid out. It is possible to accurately detect that the item has disappeared. The number of payout sensors installed for detection, the specific configuration, the pattern of the sensor signal, and the like are not limited to the above-mentioned examples and can be changed as appropriate.

For example, in the above example, the pattern in which the payout sensor 1 signal is OFF and the payout sensor 2 signal is ON is defined as a sensor signal abnormality pattern, but the pattern in which the payout sensor 1 signal is ON and the payout sensor 2 signal is OFF is a sensor signal abnormality. A pattern is used, or a pattern in which both the payout sensor 1 signal and the payout sensor 2 signal are OFF is set as a sensor signal abnormality pattern (in these cases, a pattern in which the payout sensor 1 signal is OFF and the payout sensor 2 signal is ON is a sensor signal normal pattern. It is also possible. In short, the individual patterns may be any as long as the pattern when the non-energized error does not occur and the pattern when the non-energized error occurs are different. As the payout sensor, a reflective photo sensor may be used, or the configuration of the swinging light-shielding body may be appropriately set (for example, the payout sensor may be configured to block light from two payout sensors at the same time). It is possible.

Further, only one payout sensor may be installed (for example, only the payout sensor 632 is installed), and a non-energization error may be detected by this. When using one payout sensor, for example, the signal from the payout sensor (payout sensor 2 signal) is always OFF when the hopper motor is not driven (payout sensor 2 signal level is L), and from OFF when the hopper motor is driven. It is configured to switch from ON and ON to OFF in sequence, and if it is ON for a predetermined time or longer when the hopper motor is not driven, it is detected that a non-energization error has occurred and it is turned ON for a predetermined time or longer while the hopper motor is being driven. Alternatively, if it remains OFF, it may be detected that the game medals are jammed or the game medals are exhausted. For example, only the payout sensor 631 may be installed. It is also possible to configure the error detection using three or more payout sensors.

Further, in the above example, the error processing cannot be terminated unless the error cause is removed (see step K25 in FIG. 94B), but even if the error cause is not removed, the error processing cannot be completed. If the reset button is operated, the error processing may be completed and the game may be restarted. However, if the error processing is completed without removing the cause of the error, it is preferable to configure the game so that the error is detected again after the game is restarted and the game is stopped again.

Further, in the above example, the main control board 610 and the game medal payout device 630 are electrically connected via one relay board 620, and the main control board 610 and the game medal payout device 630 are electrically connected by a harness or a drawer connector without going through a relay board. Although the configuration is shown in which the main control board 610 and the game medal payout device 630 are electrically connected via a plurality of relay boards. Further, instead of pulling up (pulling down) on the main control board 610, the relay board may be configured to pull up.

The configuration of the eighth embodiment described above can be used in combination with the configuration of another embodiment described in the present specification as appropriate. Further, the eighth embodiment is not limited to the slot machine (rotary body type gaming machine), and is not limited to other gaming machines, for example, as long as it has a configuration including a device for paying out the gaming medium. It can also be applied to pachinko game machines, casino machines, and the like.

<< 9th Embodiment >>
Next, with respect to the slot machine according to the ninth embodiment (hereinafter, also referred to as “slot machine of the ninth embodiment”), specifically, with respect to the main board case in which the main control board is housed, FIGS. 95 to 104 are added. It will be explained with reference to it. Since the basic configuration of the slot machine according to the ninth embodiment is the same as that of the slot machine according to the first embodiment, illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 95, the slot machine of the ninth form includes a main board case unit 700 in which the main control board 710 is housed in the main board case 720 and unitized. As described above, the main board case unit 700 is mainly composed of the main control board 710 and the main board case 720 accommodating the main control board 710. As shown in FIG. 96, the main control board 710 includes electronic components such as a microprocessor 712 having a CPU function, a plurality of IC elements (not shown), a plurality of resistors (not shown), and an electric connector 713. It is composed of electrical components such as, and a printed circuit board 711 on which these are mounted. The main board case unit 700 has an upper part (upper part of the back plate (not shown)) in the main body housing so that the mounting surface of the printed circuit board 711 on which the microprocessor 712 or the like is mounted faces forward (becomes the front side). It is attached to a bracket member (not shown) provided on the inner surface).

The microprocessor 712 is a one-chip type in which an IC chip equipped with a CPU (Central Processing Unit), a ROM (Read Only Memory), a RAM (Random Access Memory), etc. is enclosed in a rectangular package body. It is a microcomputer. A model display sticker 716 with the model name (or product name) of the corresponding slot machine is affixed to the surface of the microprocessor 712. Further, a plurality of electric connectors 713, 713 ... Are mounted on the outer peripheral side of the printed circuit board 711. At the four corners of the printed circuit board 711, screw holes 714 through which the substrate fixing screws 786 (see FIG. 95) can be inserted are formed.

As shown in FIG. 95, the main board case 720 has a case main body 721 and a case lid 741, and houses the main control board 710 inside a case formed by connecting the case main body 721 and the case lid 741. It is configured to be possible. As shown in FIG. 97, the case body 721 is formed into a rectangular box shape with an open front side by molding using a transparent resin material such as ABS resin. Three hinge engaging pieces 722,722,722 are formed in the lower part of the case body 721. A hinge shaft portion (not shown) formed in the lower part of the case lid 741 is rotatably engaged with the hinge engaging piece portion 722. The case lid 741 is swingably connected to the case body 721 in a state where the hinge shaft portion (not shown) of the case lid 741 is engaged with the hinge engaging piece portion 722 of the case body 721.

A first main body side joint portion 723 and a second main body side joint portion 724 are formed on the left and right upper parts of the case main body 721. The first main body side coupling portion 723 is formed in a dovetail groove shape extending in the vertical direction. The first base portion 762 (see FIG. 99) of the first caulking member 761 is inserted and engaged with the first main body side coupling portion 723 from below. The second main body side coupling portion 724 is also formed in a dovetail shape extending in the vertical direction. A second base portion 767 (see FIG. 99) of the second caulking member 766 is inserted into and engaged with the second main body side coupling portion 724 from below. A temporary engaging portion 725 on the main body side is formed at the upper left end of the case main body 721. The main body side temporary engaging portion 725 is formed in a bottomed cylindrical shape extending in the front-rear direction. The first tubular portion 763 (or the second caulking member 766) of the used (cut) first caulking member 761 (or the second caulking member 766) when the main board case unit 700 is collected from the main body side temporary engaging portion 725. The second tubular portion 768) can be engaged. On the left side of the upper center of the case main body 721, a main body side sealing portion 726 sealed by the sealing cover 781 is formed. On the upper right side of the center of the case main body 721, a flat main body side adjacent surface portion 731 adjacent to the lid side adjacent surface portion 751 of the case lid 741 in a state of being connected to the case main body 721 is formed.

On the main body side adjacent surface portion 731, the main body side model name engraved portion 732 and the main body side model type number engraved portion 734 are formed so as to project forward from the flat portion of the main body side adjacent surface portion 731 (see also FIG. 102). ). The main body side model name engraved portion 732 is arranged at the lower part of the main body side adjacent surface portion 731, and is formed to have an engraved shape indicating the upper diagonal half of the product logo (model name) of the corresponding slot machine. At least, the front end portion of the main body side model name engraved portion 732 forming the upper diagonal half of the product logo is formed so as to project forward from the flat portion of the main body side adjacent surface portion 731. The portion recessed from the front end portion of the main body side model name engraved portion 732 may protrude forward from the flat portion of the main body side adjacent surface portion 731 depending on the engraved shape, or may be a flat portion of the main body side adjacent surface portion 731. It may have the same height, or it may be recessed from the flat surface portion of the main body side adjacent surface portion 731. The surface (front surface) of the model name engraved portion 732 on the main body side may be formed as a gently curved curved surface as a whole. The main body side embossed portion 733 is formed in the intermediate portion of the main body side model name engraved portion 732 that does not form the characters of the product logo. The main body side grain forming portion 733 is formed to have a wrinkle-like uneven shape. Since the uneven shape of the texture forming portion 733 on the main body side is fine, it is schematically shown in FIGS. 97, 101, and 103. The main body side model type number engraved portion 734 is arranged in the middle portion of the main body side adjacent surface portion 731 (above the main body side model name engraved portion 732), and is (for example, composed of a combination of numbers and alphabets) of the main board case unit 700. It is formed with a stamped shape indicating the model-specific control number.

As shown in FIG. 98, the case lid 741 is formed into a rectangular lid shape with an open rear side by molding using a transparent resin material such as ABS resin. At the lower part of the case lid 741, three hinge shafts (not shown) that can be engaged with the three hinge engaging pieces 722,722,722 of the case body 721 are formed. Board fixing holes (not shown) that align with the screw holes 714 of the main control board 710 (printed circuit board 711) are formed at the four corners on the rear side of the case lid 741. By inserting the board fixing screw 786 into the screw hole 714 of the main control board 710 and screwing it into the board fixing hole (not shown) of the case lid 741, the main control board 710 is on the rear side (inner surface side) of the case lid 741. ) Is attached.

The first lid side joint portion 743 and the second lid side joint portion 744 are formed on the left and right upper parts of the case lid 741. The first lid-side joint portion 743 is formed in the shape of a double bottomed cylinder extending in the front-rear direction. The first tubular portion 763 (see FIG. 99) of the first caulking member 761 is engaged with the first lid side coupling portion 743 (inner cylinder side). The second lid side joint portion 744 is also formed in the shape of a double bottomed cylinder extending in the front-rear direction. The second tubular portion 768 (see FIG. 99) of the second caulking member 766 is engaged with the second lid side coupling portion 744 (inner cylinder side). A lid-side temporary engaging portion 745 is formed at the upper left end of the case lid 741. The lid-side temporary engaging portion 745 is formed in a bottomed cylindrical shape extending in the front-rear direction. The first tubular portion 763 (or the second caulking member 766) of the used (cut) first caulking member 761 (or the second caulking member 766) is attached to the lid-side temporary engaging portion 745 when the main board case unit 700 is collected. The second tubular portion 768) can be engaged. On the left side of the upper center of the case lid 741, a lid-side sealing portion 746 sealed by the sealing cover 781 is formed together with the main body-side sealing portion 726. On the upper right side of the center of the case lid 741, a flat lid-side adjacent surface portion 751 adjacent to the main body-side adjacent surface portion 731 of the case main body 721 in a state of being connected to the case lid 741 is formed.

The lid-side model name engraved portion 752 and the lid-side model type number engraved portion 754 are formed on the lid-side adjacent surface portion 751 so as to project forward from the flat portion of the lid-side adjacent surface portion 751 (see also FIG. 102). ). The lid-side model name engraved portion 752 is arranged above the lid-side adjacent surface portion 751 and is formed to have an engraved shape indicating the lower diagonal half of the product logo (model name) of the corresponding slot machine. At least, the front end portion of the lid-side model name engraved portion 752 forming the lower diagonal half of the product logo is formed so as to project forward from the flat portion of the lid-side adjacent surface portion 751. The portion recessed from the front end portion of the lid side model name engraved portion 752 may protrude forward from the flat portion of the lid side adjacent surface portion 751 depending on the engraved shape, or may be a flat portion of the lid side adjacent surface portion 751. It may have the same height, or it may be recessed from the flat surface portion of the lid-side adjacent surface portion 751. The surface (front surface) of the lid-side model name engraved portion 752 may be formed in a gently curved curved surface shape as a whole. The lid-side embossed portion 753 is formed in the middle portion of the lid-side model name engraved portion 752 that does not form the characters of the product logo. The lid-side grain-forming portion 753 is formed to have a wrinkle-like uneven shape. Since the concave-convex shape of the lid-side grain forming portion 753 is fine, it is schematically shown in FIGS. 98, 101, and 103. The lid-side model number engraved portion 754 is arranged in the middle portion of the lid-side adjacent surface portion 751 (below the lid-side model name engraved portion 752), and is arranged in the main board case unit 700 (for example, composed of a combination of numbers and alphabets). It is formed with a stamped shape indicating the model-specific control number.

When the case main body 721 and the case lid 741 are combined, as shown in FIGS. 101 and 103, the main body side adjacent surface portion 731 and the lid side adjacent surface portion 751 are adjacent to each other, and the main body side model name engraved portion 732 and the lid side model are adjacent to each other. Adjacent to the name engraved portion 752, the main body side model name engraved portion 732 and the lid side model name engraved portion 752 form an integral engraving indicating the product logo of the corresponding slot machine. With the case main body 721 and the case lid 741 coupled and the main body side adjacent surface portion 731 and the lid side adjacent surface portion 751 adjacent to each other, as shown in FIG. 103, the main body side adjacent surface portion 731 and the lid side are subjected to laser marking. A plurality of marking portions (hereinafter, for the sake of explanation, referred to as the first to tenth marking portions 755A to 755J in order from the left side of FIG. 103) are formed side by side in the left-right direction so as to straddle the adjacent surface portion 751. Each shape of the first to tenth marking portions 755A to 755J can be arbitrarily set to any of the numbers from 0 to 9, and the ten-digit number is set by the first to tenth marking portions 755A to 755J. Is configured to be printable. Since each shape of the first to tenth marking portions 755A to 755J can be arbitrarily set, they are shown in a simplified manner in FIG. 103.

Of the first to tenth marking portions 755A to 755J, the second to eighth marking portions 755B to 755H are formed so as to overlap the main body side model name engraved portion 732 and the lid side model name engraved portion 752. However, it has a different marking shape (numerical shape) than the one-piece marking indicating the (corresponding) slot machine product logo. Therefore, for example, when the first to tenth marking portions 755A to 755J are visually recognized, the integrated marking by the main body side model name marking portion 732 and the lid side model name marking portion 752 and the first to tenth marking portions 755A to 755A to It is possible to discriminate and recognize the 10-digit number by 755J.

By laser marking, the portions of the main body side model name engraved portion 732 and the lid side model name engraved portion 752 on which the second to eighth marking portions 755B to 755H are formed are scraped. Therefore, by touching the main body side model name engraved portion 732 and the lid side model name engraved portion 752 by hand, (at least the front end portion) protrudes forward from the flat portion of the main body side adjacent surface portion 731 and the lid side adjacent surface portion 751. The second to second formed by being scraped (recessed) by the main body side model name stamped portion 732 and the lid side model name stamped portion 752, and the main body side model name stamped portion 732 and the lid side model name stamped portion 752. It can be recognized that the 8 marking portions 755B to 755H are genuine. Even if the main board case unit is illegally duplicated by forming the model name engraved part and the part having the same shape as the marking part on the main body side adjacent surface part and the lid side adjacent surface part only by laser marking, laser marking is used. , The portion corresponding to the engraved portion of each model name is formed by being scraped (recessed) to the adjacent surface portion on the main body side and the adjacent surface portion on the lid side. Therefore, by touching the portion corresponding to each model name engraved portion by hand, it is possible to recognize that the portion (that is, the main board case unit) is illegally duplicated.

At the center of the front surface of the case lid 741, a sticker sticking portion 747 to which the caulking use record sticker 784 (see FIG. 95) is stuck is formed. The sticker sticking portion 747 is formed in a rectangular recess shape that matches the outer peripheral shape of the caulking use record sticker 784. The caulking use record sticker 784 is formed in the form of a transparent sheet on which a table for entering the date on which the main board case 720 is sealed (hereinafter, may be referred to as a caulking use record) is printed.

Further, a plurality of connector exposed portions 748 are formed on each portion of the case lid 741 to expose the electric connector 713 provided on the main control board 710. A bracket connecting portion 749 for connecting the main board case unit 700 (main board case 720) to a bracket member (not shown) in the main body housing is formed at the right end portion of the case lid 741.

The main control board 710 is the main board case 720 of each electronic component other than the electrical connectors such as the microprocessor 712 and the plurality of IC elements (not shown) mounted on the printed circuit board 711 of the main control board 710. The case lid 741 covers the case while it is housed inside the case. As described above, the case body 721 and the case lid 741 are formed by using a transparent resin material, and the microprocessor 712, a plurality of IC elements (not shown), and the like can be visually recognized from the outside of the case lid 741. It is configured in. Then, the above-mentioned seal sticking portion 747 is formed on the front surface of the case lid 741 so as not to overlap with the microprocessor 712. As a result, it is confirmed whether or not the microprocessor 712 is tampered with through the case lid 741 without being blocked by the caulking use record sticker 784 (attached to the sticker sticking portion 747). be able to. Also, confirm the model name (or product name) of the slot machine described on the model display sticker 716 (attached to the microprocessor 712) via the case lid 741 without being blocked by the caulking use record sticker 784. Can be done.

As shown in FIG. 99, the first caulking member 761 is formed in a block shape by molding using a (colored) resin material such as ABS resin, and has a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape formed on the rear side. It has one base portion 762 and a cylindrical first tubular portion 763 formed on the front side. The first base portion 762 is adapted to engage with the first main body side coupling portion 723 of the case main body 721 in a state of being covered with the first main body side guard member 771. The first main body side guard member 771 is formed in a box shape that covers the periphery of the first base portion 762 by using a metal plate material. The locking claw 762a formed on the side portion of the first base portion 762 locks the locking claw 762a formed on the side portion of the first main body side guard member 771 into the locking hole 771a formed on the side portion of the first main body side guard member 771. The state in which the main body side guard member 771 is covered is maintained. By covering the periphery of the first base portion 762 with the metal first main body side guard member 771, unauthorized access to the first base portion 762 engaged with the first main body side joint portion 723 of the case main body 721 is prevented. be able to.

The first tubular portion 763 is adapted to engage with the first lid-side coupling portion 743 of the case lid 741 in a state where the circumference is covered by the first lid-side guard member 776 (see FIG. 95). .. As shown in FIGS. 95 and 100 (B), the first lid side guard member 776 is formed in a rectangular frame shape using a metal plate material, and the first lid is formed in a double tubular shape in the case lid 741. It is attached to the gap between the inner and outer cylinders in the side coupling portion 743. By covering the circumference of the first tubular portion 763 with the metal first lid side guard member 776, unauthorized access to the first tubular portion 763 engaged with the first lid side joint portion 743 of the case lid 741 can be obtained. Can be prevented.

As shown in FIG. 99, the second caulking member 766 is formed in the same manner as the first caulking member 761, and has a second base portion 767 and a second tubular portion 768. The second base portion 767 is adapted to engage with the second main body side coupling portion 724 of the case main body 721 in a state of being covered with the second main body side guard member 772. The second main body side guard member 772 is formed in the same manner as the first main body side guard member 771. The locking claw 767a formed on the side portion of the second base portion 767 is locked to the locking hole 772a formed on the side portion of the second main body side guard member 772, whereby the second base portion 767 is seconded. The state in which the main body side guard member 772 is covered is maintained. By covering the circumference of the second base portion 767 with the metal second main body side guard member 772, unauthorized access to the second base portion 767 engaged with the second main body side joint portion 724 of the case main body 721 is prevented. be able to.

The second tubular portion 768 is adapted to engage with the second lid-side joint portion 744 of the case lid 741 in a state where the circumference is covered by the second lid-side guard member 777 (see FIG. 95). .. As shown in FIGS. 95 and 100 (B), the second lid-side guard member 777 is formed in the same manner as the first lid-side guard member 776, and is formed in a double tubular shape in the case lid 741. It is attached to the gap between the inner and outer cylinders in the lid side joint portion 744. By covering the circumference of the second tubular portion 768 with the metal second lid side guard member 777, unauthorized access to the second tubular portion 768 engaged with the second lid side joint portion 744 of the case lid 741 can be obtained. Can be prevented.

The first base portion 762 of the first caulking member 761 and the first main body side coupling portion 723 of the case main body 721 are engaged, and the first tubular portion 763 of the first caulking member 761 and the first lid of the case lid 741 are engaged. By engaging with the side coupling portion 743, the first main body side coupling portion 723 of the case main body 721 and the first lid side coupling portion 743 of the case lid 741 are coupled. The second base portion 767 of the second caulking member 766 and the second main body side coupling portion 724 of the case body 721 are engaged, and the second tubular portion 768 of the second caulking member 766 and the second lid of the case lid 741 are engaged. By engaging the side coupling portion 744, the second main body side coupling portion 724 of the case body 721 and the second lid side coupling portion 744 of the case lid 741 are coupled. In this way, using the first caulking member 761 and the second caulking member 766, the first main body side joint portion 723 and the second main body side joint portion 724 of the case main body 721 and the first lid side joint portion of the case lid 741 are used. By coupling the 743 and the second lid side coupling portion 744, the case lid 741 is coupled to the case body 721 so as to cover the main control substrate 710. Further, a case fixing screw 787 (see FIG. 95) for fixing the (combined) case lid 741 to the case body 721 is attached so as to straddle the case body 721 and the case lid 741. ..

As shown in FIG. 100 (A), the sealing cover 781 uses a transparent resin material such as ABS resin and is molded to form a main body-side sealing portion 726 of the case main body 721 and a lid-side sealing portion 746 of the case lid 741. Is formed in a box shape that can be sealed. In a state where the case main body 721 and the case lid 741 are connected, the sealing seal 783 is attached across the main body side sealing portion 726 and the lid side sealing portion 746 which are vertically adjacent to each other. The seal cover 781 is attached to the main body side seal portion 726 and the lid side seal portion 746 by sliding from above to the lower side of the main body side seal portion 726 so as to cover the seal seal 783. A cutter member 782 having a cutting portion on the tip side is attached to the sealing cover 781 attached to the main body side sealing portion 726 and the lid side sealing portion 746, and the cutting portion of the cutter member 782 is arranged inside the sealing cover 781. It has become so. Therefore, when the sealing cover 781 is slid upward and removed, the sealing seal 783 is cut by the cut portion of the cutter member 782.

The manufacturing method of the main board case unit 700 configured as described above will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 104. First, the component manufacturing process PC11 for manufacturing each component constituting the main board case unit 700 is performed. In this component manufacturing process PC11, for example, by molding, the hinge engaging piece portion 722, the first main body side coupling portion 723, the second main body side coupling portion 724, the main body side temporary engaging portion 725, and the main body side sealing portion are formed. The case main body 721 is manufactured so as to have 726, the main body side adjacent surface portion 731, the main body side model name engraved portion 732, the main body side model type number engraved portion 734, and the like. Further, by molding, the above-mentioned hinge shaft portion (not shown), the first lid side connecting portion 743, the second lid side connecting portion 744, the lid side temporary engaging portion 745, the lid side sealing portion 746, and the seal are attached. The case lid 741 is manufactured so as to have a portion 747, a connector exposed portion 748, a bracket connecting portion 749, a lid side adjacent surface portion 751, a lid side model name engraved portion 752, a lid side model type number engraved portion 754, and the like.

The shapes of the main body side model name stamped portion 732 and the main body side model type number stamped portion 734 of the case main body 721 are changed according to the model (model) of the corresponding slot machine. Considering the manufacturing cost of the main board case unit 700, it is difficult to change the shape of the main board case unit 700 as a whole every time the model of the slot machine is changed. On the other hand, in consideration of fraud countermeasures, it is preferable to change even a part of the shape of the main board case unit 700 every time the model of the slot machine is changed. Therefore, in the molding mold of the case main body 721, nesting is used in the portion corresponding to the main body side adjacent surface portion 731 where the main body side model name engraved portion 732 and the main body side model type number engraved portion 734 are formed. Similarly, the shapes of the lid-side model name stamped portion 752 and the lid-side model type number stamped portion 754 of the case lid 741 are changed according to the model of the corresponding slot machine. Therefore, in the molding mold of the case lid 741, nesting is used in the portion corresponding to the lid side adjacent surface portion 751 on which the lid side model name engraved portion 752 and the lid side model type number engraved portion 754 are formed. The model-specific control number indicated by the main body-side model-type number stamped section 734 and the lid-side model-type number stamped section 754 is a number for managing the nesting of the molding die. The main body side adjacent surface portion 731 is formed on a part of the front surface of the case main body 721. The formed portion is indicated by a two-dot chain line as a portion corresponding to the main body side adjacent surface portion 731. The lid-side adjacent surface portion 751 is formed on a part of the front surface of the case lid 741. The formed portion is indicated by a two-dot chain line as a portion corresponding to the lid-side adjacent surface portion 751.

Further, for example, a first caulking member 761, a second caulking member 766, a sealing cover 781, a cutter member 782, and the like are manufactured by molding. Further, the microprocessor 712, a plurality of IC elements (not shown), a plurality of resistors (not shown), a plurality of electric connectors 713, 713, etc. are mounted on the mounting surface of the printed circuit board 711 by soldering or the like. By doing so, the main control board 710 is manufactured.

Next, the assembly process PC12 for assembling the main board case unit 700 is carried out. In this assembly process PC12, the first base portion 762 of the first caulking member 761 is engaged with the first main body side coupling portion 723 of the case main body 721 in a state of being covered with the first main body side guard member 771. The second base portion 767 of the second caulking member 766 is engaged with the second main body side coupling portion 724 of the case main body 721 in a state of being covered with the second main body side guard member 772. The main control board 710 is attached to the rear side of the case lid 741 using the board fixing screws 786. The first lid side guard member 776 is attached to the gap between the inner and outer cylinders in the first lid side joint portion 743 of the case lid 741. The second lid-side guard member 777 is attached to the gap between the inner and outer cylinders of the second lid-side joint portion 744 of the case lid 741.

In this state, the hinge shaft portion (not shown) of the case lid 741 is engaged with the hinge engaging piece portion 722 of the case body 721, and the case lid 741 is swung so as to cover the front side of the case body 721. At this time, the first tubular portion 763 of the first caulking member 761 and the case lid 741 are engaged with the first base portion 762 of the first caulking member 761 and the first main body side coupling portion 723 of the case main body 721. By engaging with the first lid-side coupling portion 743 of the case main body 721, the first main body-side coupling portion 723 of the case main body 721 and the first lid-side coupling portion 743 of the case lid 741 are coupled. With the second base portion 767 of the second caulking member 766 and the second body side coupling portion 724 of the case body 721 engaged, the second tubular portion 768 of the second caulking member 766 and the second of the case lid 741. By engaging the lid-side coupling portion 744, the second main body-side coupling portion 724 of the case body 721 and the second lid-side coupling portion 744 of the case lid 741 are coupled.

As a result, the case body 721 and the case lid 741 are combined, and the main control board 710 is housed inside the case. When the case main body 721 and the case lid 741 are combined, as described above, the main body side adjacent surface portion 731 and the lid side adjacent surface portion 751 are adjacent to each other, and the main body side model name engraved portion 732 and the lid side model name engraved portion 752. Are adjacent to each other, and an integral marking indicating the product logo of the corresponding slot machine is formed by the main body side model name marking portion 732 and the lid side model name marking portion 752.

Further, the case lid 741 is fixed to the case body 721 using the case fixing screw 787. Further, in a state where the case main body 721 and the case lid 741 are connected, the sealing seal 783 is attached across the main body side sealing portion 726 and the lid side sealing portion 746 which are vertically adjacent to each other. The seal cover 781 is slid from above the main body side sealing portion 726 to be attached to the main body side sealing portion 726 and the lid side sealing portion 746 so as to cover the sealing seal 783. The cutter member 782 is attached to the sealing cover 781 attached to the main body side sealing portion 726 and the lid side sealing portion 746. The sealing cover 781 seals the main body-side sealing portion 726 and the lid-side sealing portion 746 to which the sealing seal 783 is attached. Further, the caulking use record sticker 784 is attached to the sticker attachment portion 747 of the case lid 741. In this way, the main board case unit 700 is assembled.

Then, the marking process PC13 for performing laser marking on the assembled main board case unit 700 is carried out. In this marking step PC13, the first to tenth marking portions 755A to 755J are formed straddling the main body side adjacent surface portion 731 and the lid side adjacent surface portion 751 by laser marking using a CO2 laser processing machine. For example, the manufacturing control number of the main board case unit 700 is set as a 10-digit number printed by the first to tenth marking units 755A to 755J. At this time, a predetermined reader (not shown) such as a camera is used to obtain the model-specific management number indicated by the main body-side model-type number stamping unit 734 and the model-specific management number indicated by the lid-side model-type number stamping unit 754. Laser marking may be started after reading and confirming that each read model-specific control number is a legitimate model-specific control number. This makes it possible to prevent laser marking from being performed on the case body 721 and the case lid 741 in the wrong combination. Further, when the laser marking is performed by reading the model-specific control number indicated by the main body-side model-type number stamping section 734 and the model-specific control number indicated by the lid-side model-type number stamping section 754, the first to tenth marking sections are used. The fonts (typefaces) of the numbers printed by 755A to 755J may be set to be different fonts (typefaces) for each corresponding model-specific control number.

According to the present embodiment, the case main body 721 has a main body side model name engraved portion 732 formed so as to project forward on the main body side adjacent surface portion 731, and is manufactured by molding, and the case lid 741 is formed on the lid side. The adjacent surface portion 751 has a lid-side model name engraved portion 752 formed so as to project forward, and is manufactured by molding. Then, the case main body 721 and the case lid 741 are combined, the main control board 710 is housed inside the case, and the main body side adjacent surface portion 731 and the lid side adjacent surface portion 751 are adjacent to each other, and the main body side model name engraved portion. The 732 and the lid-side model name engraved portion 752 are adjacent to each other to form an integral engraving (for example, an integral engraving indicating the product logo of the slot machine). In this way, the front end portions of the main body side model name engraved portion 732 and the lid side model name engraved portion 752 that form an integral engraving project forward with respect to the main body side adjacent surface portion 731 and the lid side adjacent surface portion 751. Therefore, it becomes difficult to form the main body side model name engraved portion 732 and the lid side model name engraved portion 752 by cutting, and it takes time and effort to duplicate the case main body 721 and the case lid 741.

Further, by laser marking, marking portions (second to eighth marking portions 755B to 755H) having a marking shape (numerical shape) different from the integrated marking by the main body side model name marking portion 732 and the lid side model name marking portion 752. ) Is formed so as to straddle the main body side model name engraved portion 732 and the lid side model name engraved portion 752. As a result, the surface shapes of the main body side model name engraved portion 732 and the lid side model name engraved portion 752 become complicated, and it takes time and effort to duplicate the case main body 721 and the case lid 741, so that the main board case unit 700 is illegal. Duplication can be prevented.

For example, when a portion having the same shape as each model name engraved portion and the marking portion is formed only by laser marking, the main board case unit including the portion can be duplicated relatively easily. On the other hand, as described above, the substrate case unit 700 in which the marking portions (second to eighth marking portions 755B to 755H) are formed straddling the main body side model name engraved portion 732 and the lid side model name engraved portion 752 is perfectly formed. In order to duplicate, the same manufacturing process as in the present embodiment (specifically, a step of manufacturing the case main body 721 by molding so as to have the main body side model name engraved portion 732, and a lid side model name engraved portion 752 are provided. The process of manufacturing the case lid 741 by molding and the process of forming the marking portion by laser marking) must be performed. Further, since the portion where the marking portion (2nd to 8th marking portions 755B to 755H) is formed in the main body side model name engraved portion 732 and the lid side model name engraved portion 752 is scraped by the laser marking, the present embodiment and the present embodiment are used. Even if the same manufacturing process is performed, it is very difficult to completely reproduce the main body side model name engraved portion 732 and the lid side model name engraved portion 752 in which the marking portion is formed by laser marking.

Further, by molding, a wrinkle-shaped uneven shape forming portion 733 on the main body side is formed in the middle portion of the model name stamped portion 732 on the main body side, and a wrinkled shape is formed in the intermediate portion of the model name stamped portion 752 on the lid side. A lid-side wrinkle forming portion 753 having an uneven shape is formed. As a result, the surface shapes of the main body side model name engraved portion 732 and the lid side model name engraved portion 752 become more complicated, and it takes time and effort to duplicate the case main body 721 and the case lid 741, so that the main board case unit 700 is illegal. It is possible to prevent such duplication. Even if an attempt is made to duplicate the case main body 721 and the case lid 741 using a 3D printer, it is difficult to form the main body side grain forming portion 733 and the lid side grain forming portion 753 having a wrinkled uneven shape (generally). Therefore, even if an attempt is made to form the main body side grain forming portion 733 and the lid side grain forming portion 753 using a 3D printer, the wrinkle-like uneven shape cannot be formed and the surface becomes smooth). By confirming the shapes of the main body side model name engraved part 732 and the lid side model name engraved part 752 (main body side wrinkle forming part 733 and lid side wrinkle forming part 753), it is easy to make an illegally duplicated main board case unit. Can be found in.

In the ninth embodiment described above, the main body side embossed portion 733 having a wrinkled uneven shape is formed in the intermediate portion of the main body side model name engraved portion 732, and the middle portion of the lid side model name engraved portion 752 is wrinkled. A lid-side wrinkle-forming portion 753 having a concavo-convex shape is formed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the entire surface (front surface) of the model name engraved portion 732 on the main body side and the entire surface of the model name engraved portion 752 on the lid side may be formed with wrinkled irregularities, and the surface of the model name engraved portion 732 on the main body side may be formed. At least a part of the surface of the lid-side model name engraved portion 752 may be formed with wrinkle-like irregularities.

In the ninth embodiment described above, the main body side model name engraved portion 732 and the main body side model type number engraved portion 734 are formed on the main body side adjacent surface portion 731 of the case main body 721, and the lid side adjacent surface portion 751 of the case lid 741 is formed. The lid side model name engraved portion 752 and the lid side model type number engraved portion 754 are formed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the substrate case unit is formed on the main body side adjacent surface portion 731 and / or the lid side adjacent surface portion 751. A manufacturer engraved portion indicating the manufacturer may be formed.

In the ninth embodiment described above, each shape of the first to tenth marking portions 755A to 755J can be arbitrarily set to any shape from the numbers 0 to 9, but is not limited thereto. No. For example, each shape of the first to tenth marking portions 755A to 755J may be arbitrarily set to any shape of the alphabets A to Z, and numbers 0 to 9 and A to Z. Any shape of the alphabets up to can be set arbitrarily.

In the ninth embodiment described above, the marking portions 755A to 755J are formed by laser marking using a CO2 laser processing machine, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the case body 721 and the case lid 741 are manufactured using a transparent resin material such as polycarbonate, each marking portion 755A to 755J is formed by laser marking using a YVO4 laser processing machine. You may. When a YVO4 laser machine is used, each marking portion 755A to 755J is discolored with respect to other portions in the case main body 721 (main body side adjacent surface portion 731) and the case lid 741 (cover side adjacent surface portion 751). In this case, in order to ensure the visibility of the microprocessor 712 of the main control board 710 and the like, marking portions 755A to 755J are formed on the front surface of the case lid 741 (case body 721 and) at a portion sufficiently distant from the microprocessor 712. It is preferable to be done. A portion sufficiently distant from the microprocessor 712, such as a portion on the front surface of the case lid 741 that does not overlap with the microprocessor 712, to the extent that the visibility of the microprocessor 712 on the front surface of the case lid 741 (the case body 721 and) is not impaired. There is a part that is far enough away.

In the ninth embodiment described above, the main control board 710 is housed inside the case formed by connecting the case body 721 and the case lid 741, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the main control board 600 of the fourth embodiment may be configured to be accommodated. Further, not only the main board case unit 700 in which the main control board 710 is housed in the main board case 720 and unitized, but also the sub board case unit in which the sub control board is housed in the sub board case and unitized. Also, it is possible to apply this embodiment. Further, not only slot machines (rotary type game machines), but also pachinko game machines, arrange balls, sparrow ball game machines, (arcade) game machines, casino machines, etc., the control board is housed in a board case and is a unit. It is possible to apply this embodiment to the modified board case unit.

1 Slot machine 3a, 3b, 3c Reel 25 Start lever 26a, 26b, 26c Stop switch 60,600 Main control board 70 Sub control board 70A Sub main control board 70B Sub sub control board 100 Main control means 200 Sub control means 200A Sub main control Means 200B Sub-sub control means 610 Main control board 620 Relay board 630 Game medal payout device 631,632 Payout sensor 635 Swing shading body 637 Hopper motor 700 Main board Case unit (9th embodiment)
710 Main control board 720 Main board Case 721 Case body (first case member)
731 Main body side adjacent surface part 732 Main body side model name engraved part 733 Main body side grain forming part 741 Case lid (second case member)
751 Adjacent surface on the lid side 752 Model name on the lid side Engraved part 753 Texture forming part on the lid side 755A to 755J 1st to 10th marking parts

Claims (1)

With multiple reels
With multiple stop switches
Image display means and
Internal lottery means and
Equipped with reel control means,
When a power outage is detected, it is configured to be able to execute the power outage processing.
When a predetermined result is determined as the determination result of the internal lottery means, and the remaining one predetermined reel for which the operation of the stop switch has not yet been detected among the plurality of reels is rotating, the predetermined reel is set to the predetermined reel. As a result of detecting the operation of the corresponding predetermined stop switch at a predetermined timing, when the predetermined symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped, the game medium corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination can be provided.
When the predetermined result is determined as the determination result of the internal lottery means, and the remaining one of the plurality of reels for which the operation of the stop switch has not yet been detected is rotating, the predetermined reel is rotating. When the predetermined symbol combination does not stop in a situation where the plurality of reels are stopped due to the detection of a power failure even though the operation of the predetermined stop switch corresponding to the reel is detected at the predetermined timing. However, it is configured so that a game medium corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination can be provided after the power is restored.
The reel control means is configured to be able to execute an acceleration process for accelerating a specific reel over a predetermined period of time.
When a power failure is detected during the predetermined period during which the acceleration process for accelerating the specific reel is executed and then the power is restored, the acceleration process for accelerating the specific reel during the remaining period of the predetermined period is performed. Is configured to be able to run from the continuation
Based on the satisfaction of the predetermined conditions, it is possible to start a predetermined gaming state capable of notifying the operation mode of the stop switch which is advantageous to the player.
Based on the satisfaction of the specific conditions, the end image of the predetermined gaming state including the total number of acquired information in the predetermined gaming state can be displayed on the image display means.
When displaying the end image of the predetermined gaming state including the information on the total number of acquisitions in the predetermined gaming state on the image display means, the image is a warning image for preventing the player from being absorbed in the game. It can be displayed on the display means,
If the game media is provided in the specific condition is satisfied game, after the game media is granted, the end image of the predetermined game conditions including the total obtained number information at a given gaming state the image Display on the display means,
When the end image of the predetermined game state including the total number of acquired information in the predetermined game state and the caution image for preventing the player from being absorbed in the game are displayed on the image display means. A game machine with.

Images